Front cover

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Understand and use the new

Administration Center

Learn about enhancements and

new functions

Covering Versions 5.1.5,

5.2.x, and 5.3

Roland Tretau
Gerd Becker
Shayne Gardener
Armin Klos

ibm.com/redbooks
International Technical Support Organization

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3

Technical Guide

March 2005

SG24-6638-00
 Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in
“Notices” on page xxv.

First Edition (March 2005)

This edition applies to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, Version 5.3.0.

Note: This book is based on a pre-GA version of a product and may not apply when the
product becomes generally available. We recommend that you consult the product
documentation or follow-on versions of this redbook for more current information.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All rights reserved.

Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvii
The team that wrote this redbook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Become a published author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx

Part 1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.1 Disaster preparation and recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Product positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Overview of the development timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4 New features overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4.1 Server enhancements, additions, and changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4.2 Client enhancements, additions and changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1.1 Data Protection for Lotus Domino . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1.2 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1.3 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for UNIX, Linux, and OS/400 . . . 17
2.1.4 Data Protection for Microsoft Exchange Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.1 Data Protection for Microsoft SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.2 Data Protection for Oracle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for ERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3.1 Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com (DB2 UDB) . . . . . . . . 21
2.3.2 Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.4 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. iii

Part 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.1 Changes in Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2 Changes in Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.1 Accurate SAN device mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.2 Increased archive retention limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.3 Licensing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.2.4 Macintosh OS X unicode support for backup-archive client . . . . . . . 30
3.2.5 Security firewall support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2.6 Server performance tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2.7 Server-to-server export and import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2.8 StorageTek VolSafe support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.9 SCSI libraries with multiple drive types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.10 TapeAlert device support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.11 Tape autolabelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3 Changes in Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3.1 EMC Centera support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3.2 IBM 3592 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.3.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.3.4 NDMP operations and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3.5 Operational Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3.6 Sony AIT50 and IT100 WORM media support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3.7 TCPPORT, TCPADMINPORT, and defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4 Changes in Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.1 ACSLS library support enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.2 Activity log management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.4.3 Check-in and check-out enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.4 Collocation by group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.5 Database reorganization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.4.6 Disk only backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.4.7 Enhancements for server migration and reclamation processes . . . 52
3.4.8 IBM 3592 WORM support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.4.9 Improved defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.4.10 Validating a LAN-free environment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.4.11 NDMP operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.4.12 Network Appliance SnapLock support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.4.13 New interface to manage servers: Administration Center . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.14 Server processing control with scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.15 Multiple Tivoli Storage Manager client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.4.16 Tivoli Storage Manager scheduling flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.4.17 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

iv IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Chapter 4. AIX specific server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.4.1 Accurate SAN device mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.4.2 Storage agent and library sharing failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 5. HP-UX specific server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Chapter 6. Linux specific server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

6.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.2.1 Linux for pSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.2.2 Linux for zSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.3.1 Disaster Recovery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.4.1 Accurate SAN device mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.4.2 Communications options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Chapter 7. Sun Solaris specific server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

7.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.4.1 Accurate SAN device mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Chapter 8. OS/400 PASE specific server enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

8.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.4.1 PASE support discontinued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Chapter 9. Windows specific server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

9.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.2.1 Device driver for Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.2.2 IBM Device Driver for 3570, 3590, and IBM LTO devices . . . . . . . . 92

Contents v
 9.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.3.1 DVD support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
9.4.1 Communications options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
9.4.2 Increased block size for writing to tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Chapter 10. z/OS specific server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

10.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.2 Changes in server Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.4 Changes in server Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

11.1 Changes in Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.2 Changes in Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.3 Changes in Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.3.1 TCPPORT, TCPADMINPORT, and defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.3.2 SHOW LANFREE command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11.3.3 Storage Agent compatibility and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
11.3.4 Changed settings no longer require Storage Agent restart . . . . . . 102
11.4 Changes in Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
11.4.1 Validating a LAN-free environment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
11.4.2 Limitations when using LAN-free and simultaneous write. . . . . . . 103
11.4.3 Multiple file system support for FILE device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
11.4.4 Multi-session no-query restore for LAN-free path . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
11.4.5 LANFREETCPServeraddress option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 12. AIX specific Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

12.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
12.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
12.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
12.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Chapter 13. HP-UX specific Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . 113

13.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Chapter 14. Linux specific Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . 115

14.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14.2.1 Linux for pSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14.2.2 Linux for zSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

vi IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 14.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14.4.1 Supported Linux platforms and kernel dependencies . . . . . . . . . . 117
14.4.2 Communications options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 15. Sun Solaris specific Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . 119

15.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
15.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
15.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
15.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Chapter 16. Windows specific Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . 121

16.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16.4.1 Communications Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Chapter 17. z/OS specific Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

17.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
17.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
17.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
17.3.1 LAN-free details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Part 3. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

18.1 Changes in Version 5.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
18.1.1 New option to preserve last access date of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
18.1.2 Enhanced domain processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
18.1.3 Globally unique identifier (GUID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
18.1.4 Enhanced query backup and query archive commands . . . . . . . . 131
18.2 Changes in Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
18.2.1 Backing up files from one or more file spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
18.2.2 External snapshot provider support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
18.2.3 Enhancements to the Web client interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
18.2.4 Enhanced firewall security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
18.2.5 Displaying options and settings via the command line . . . . . . . . . 137
18.2.6 NDMP file-level restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
18.2.7 Processing EMC Celerra NAS file system images . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
18.2.8 Backup and restore of the WebSphere Application Server . . . . . . 141
18.2.9 Enhancements for command line image restore operations . . . . . 141
18.2.10 Gathering Tivoli Storage Manager system information . . . . . . . . 142
18.2.11 Enhancements for the query filespace command . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Contents vii
 18.2.12 Separately installable language packs available. . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
18.3 Changes in Version 5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
18.3.1 Removal of operand limits for backup and archive operations . . . 143
18.3.2 Multi-session backup session enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
18.3.3 WebSphere Application Server (WAS) security support . . . . . . . . 144
18.3.4 Language support enhanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
18.4 Changes in Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
18.4.1 Include-exclude enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
18.4.2 Enhancements to query schedule command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
18.4.3 Tivoli Storage Manager Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
18.4.4 Deleting individual backups from a server file space . . . . . . . . . . 153
18.4.5 Optimized option default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
18.4.6 Weblinks: Links from the backup-archive client Java GUI . . . . . . 156
18.4.7 New options: Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax, and DSM_LOG . . 156
18.4.8 Enhanced encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
18.4.9 Dynamic client tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
18.4.10 Web client enhancements (plus: Java GUI in UNIX) . . . . . . . . . 158

Chapter 19. UNIX specific client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

19.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
19.1.1 LAN-free data movement support on linux86 client . . . . . . . . . . . 160
19.1.2 Linux86 client support for the GPFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
19.1.3 Storage Agent now available for Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
19.1.4 64-bit support for the Storage Manager HP-UX client. . . . . . . . . . 160
19.2 Changes in client Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
19.2.1 Veritas file systems, ACLs, and Veritas Volume Manager . . . . . . 160
19.2.2 Automounter support for Linux86 and Linux390 clients . . . . . . . . 161
19.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
19.3.1 Support for controlling symbolic link processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
19.3.2 Backup and restore for SAN File System for AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
19.3.3 Backup-archive client Linux on iSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
19.3.4 Backup-archive client for Linux on Intel Itanium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
19.4 Changes in client Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
19.4.1 Client node proxy support [option: Asnodename] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
19.4.2 Backup-archive client for HP-UX Itanium 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
19.4.3 Linux for zSeries offline image backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 20. Windows specific client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

20.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
20.1.1 Excluding specific system objects from backup processing . . . . . 166
20.1.2 Ignore NTFS compression attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
20.1.3 Enhanced image backup and restore processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
20.1.4 Support for monitoring or cancelling server-free operations . . . . . 166

viii IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 20.1.5 DBCS installation path on Unicode-enabled clients . . . . . . . . . . . 167
20.2 Changes in client Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
20.2.1 Open file support for backup and archive operations . . . . . . . . . . 167
20.2.2 Microsoft Volume Shadowcopy Service (VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
20.2.3 Microsoft Automated System Recovery (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
20.2.4 Command line and GUI display actual image size . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
20.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
20.3.1 Support for Veritas Cluster Server cluster environment . . . . . . . . 168
20.3.2 Backup and restore support for SAN File System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
20.4 Changes in client Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
20.4.1 Journal based backup enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
20.4.2 Single drive support for OFS or online image backups . . . . . . . . . 173

Chapter 21. Netware specific client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

21.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
21.1.1 Support for Novell Cluster Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
21.2 Changes in client Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
21.2.1 Enhanced ALL-LOCAL domain processing (NDS replica) . . . . . . 176
21.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
21.3.1 Support for Novell NetWare 6.5 operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
21.4 Changes in client Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 22. Mac OS X specific client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

22.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
22.2 Changes in client Version 5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
22.2.1 Migrating to the Unicode-enabled client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
22.2.2 The inclexcl option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
22.2.3 The autofsrename option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
22.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
22.3.1 Enhanced firewall security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
22.3.2 Encrypting data during backup or archive operation . . . . . . . . . . . 181
22.3.3 Displaying options and their settings via the command line . . . . . 181
22.3.4 Gathering Tivoli Storage Manager system information . . . . . . . . . 182
22.3.5 Tivoli Storage Manager command line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
22.3.6 Tivoli Storage Manager as a background scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . 182
22.3.7 Non-administrators can manage their own data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
22.3.8 Tivoli Storage Manager administrative client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
22.3.9 Controlling symbolic link and alias processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
22.4 Changes in client Version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Part 4. Important new features in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 23. Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

23.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Contents ix
 23.1.1 What is the Integrated Solutions Console? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
23.1.2 Integrated Solutions Console Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
23.1.3 Console components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
23.2 Integrated Solutions Console installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
23.3 Administration Center installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
23.3.1 Administering Tivoli Storage Manager server(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
23.4 Quick start tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
23.4.1 Creating multiple ISC Admin login accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
23.4.2 Creating multiple Administrator accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23.4.3 Creating a Tivoli Storage Manager Server link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23.4.4 Creating a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
23.4.5 Creating an additional storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
23.4.6 Adding drives to an existing library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
23.4.7 Creating or modifying an option set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
23.4.8 Unlocking a client node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
23.4.9 Check-in and label volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
23.4.10 Tivoli Storage Manager Client remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
23.4.11 Creating a Management Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
23.4.12 Creating a Policy Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
23.5 Setting up LAN-free operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
23.5.1 Enable LAN-free Data Movement wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
23.5.2 Manually enabling LAN-free data movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
23.5.3 Prepare the server for enterprise management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
23.5.4 Define the Storage Agent as a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
23.5.5 Define paths to the storage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
23.5.6 Set up the storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
23.5.7 Define the LAN-free policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
23.5.8 Create a new management class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
23.5.9 Validating your LAN-free setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
23.5.10 Enabling Health Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
23.5.11 Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
23.5.12 Protecting the ISC Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

24.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
24.1.1 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
24.1.2 Using IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting . . . . . . 305
24.1.3 MMC Plugin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
24.1.4 Creating a default Daily Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
24.1.5 Creating a default Hourly Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Part 5. Appendixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Appendix A. Hints and tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

x IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Comparison of options virtualnodename/fromnode/asnodename . . . . . . . . . 320
Installation of the new Java GUI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Reasons for restarting a Storage Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Device driver on Windows 2003 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Command line access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Perform a restore of another node on your own client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Appendix B. Quick paths to performing tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Client node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Database and database volumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Expiration processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
LAN-free data movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Library volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Network-attached storage (NAS) file server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Restore session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Server group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Volume history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects .

349
Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Backup Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Client node (including its file spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Data Mover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Database space trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Database volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Device class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Management class (including copy groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Option set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Path for a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Path for a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Policy Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
The role of policy sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Profile (for a configuration manager server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Recovery log space trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Contents xi
 Recovery log volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Schedule for client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Schedule for a server (administrative schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Server (other Tivoli Storage Manager servers) Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Server group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Server script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Subscription to a profile (for a managed server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Volumes in a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Volumes in a storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Appendix D. Administration Center Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Enterprise management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Storage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Policy domains and client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Server maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions: Administration Center . . . . . 371

Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Using the Administration Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Troubleshooting and additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Appendix F. Tables of the changes and enhancements by versions . . . 383

Client versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table of Version 5.1.5 TSM Client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table of Version 5.2 TSM Client enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table of Version 5.2.2 TSM Client enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Table of Version 5.3 TSM Client enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Server versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Table of Version 5.1.5 TSM TSM Server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Table of Version 5.2 TSM TSM Server enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Table of Version 5.2.2 TSM Server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Table of Version 5.3 TSM Server enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Storage Agent versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table of Version 5.1.5 Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table of Version 5.2 Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table of Version 5.2.2 Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table of Version 5.3 Storage Agent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Appendix G. Additional material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Locating the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Using the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Requirements for downloading the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

xii IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 How to use the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Abbreviations and acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Other publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
How to get IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Contents xiii
xiv IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
Figures

1-1 How the product components interrelate in version 5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1-2 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overall product progression . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3-1 How the components for library-sharing work together . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3-2 Administration Center check-in options - WAITTIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3-3 Administration Console Checkout Options - Remove No/Yes/to bulk . . 44
3-4 Example of collocation by group enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3-5 Group of nodes on sequential media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3-6 Advanced Schedule - Start Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3-7 Advanced Schedule - Select Archive Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3-8 Advanced Schedule - Repetition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3-9 Advanced Schedule - Repeat the Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3-10 Advanced Schedule - Advanced Schedule Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3-11 Advanced Schedule - Associate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3-12 Advanced Schedule - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3-13 First and third Tuesday schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
11-1 Storage Pool properties Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
11-2 Components and connections in our LAN-free environment . . . . . . . . 106
17-1 LAN-free data movement for z/OS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
18-1 Viewing Policy Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
18-2 Web client: Preview Include-Exclude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
18-3 Preview Include-Exclude file in a spreadsheet application . . . . . . . . . 146
18-4 Client Web/Java GUI: Details of included and excluded objects . . . . . 147
18-5 Client Web/Java GUI: Advanced options, include/exclude of objects . 148
18-6 Client Configuration Wizard: Recommended Include/Exclude List . . . 149
18-7 Client Configuration Wizard: Common File Exclusion Selection . . . . . 150
18-8 Client Configuration Wizard: Selection of Domain for Backup . . . . . . . 151
18-9 Client Web/Java GUI: Include/Exclude files or directories . . . . . . . . . . 152
18-10 Client Web/Java GUI: Delete Backup Data from the Utilities menu. . . 155
18-11 Finding files in the backup, restore, archive or retrieve window . . . . . 158
23-1 Java install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
23-2 Initial Welcome window for ISC Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
23-3 Second Welcome window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
23-4 International Program License Agreement window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
23-5 Location of Installation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
23-6 Install destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
23-7 Create ISC administrator userid and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
23-8 Select ports for ISC to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
23-9 Installing the ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. xv

 23-10 Installation completed successfully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
23-11 Installation summary and login details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
23-12 Automatically launched ISC Login page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
23-13 Java Virtual Machine preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
23-14 Welcome to InstallShield Wizard for Administration Center. . . . . . . . . 200
23-15 Second Welcome with further details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
23-16 International Program License Agreement window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
23-17 Review install path, Admin port and user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
23-18 Enter ISC password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
23-19 Select location of installation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
23-20 Final review of selected installation option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
23-21 Installation commences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
23-22 Installation successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
23-23 Installation summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
23-24 ISC Login automatically appears following install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
23-25 First login showing expanded Tivoli Storage Manager component . . . 209
23-26 Layout of new interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
23-27 Tivoli Storage Manager plug-in expanded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
23-28 Getting Started window in ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
23-29 Contract navigation frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
23-30 Navigation frame contracted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
23-31 Click Settings in the Navigation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
23-32 Manage Users and Groups portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
23-33 All authenticated users view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
23-34 New user button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
23-35 ISC Admin user details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
23-36 All authenticated portal users Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23-37 Enter server name and admin details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
23-38 Add Storage Device wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
23-39 Select Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23-40 Define Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23-41 Define SCSI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
23-42 Library successfully defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
23-43 Add Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
23-44 Add drive detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
23-45 Drive added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
23-46 Wizard completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
23-47 Add a Storage Device drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
23-48 Add a Storage Device Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
23-49 Choose device type and location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
23-50 Create or Add volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
23-51 Add to existing or new storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
23-52 Successful completion of wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

xvi IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23-53 Modify Library drop-down selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
23-54 Library properties portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
23-55 Add drive drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
23-56 Enter drive details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
23-57 Drive successfully added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
23-58 Policy Domain properties during option set creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
23-59 Search for client node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
23-60 Uncheck the Refuse actions check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
23-61 Library properties portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
23-62 Add volumes drop-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
23-63 Add volumes wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
23-64 Add volumes labelling details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
23-65 Label and check in volumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
23-66 Set waittime for mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
23-67 Discovery process started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
23-68 Server process status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
23-69 Policy Domains and Client Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
23-70 Choose appropriate policy domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
23-71 Expand Client Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
23-72 Select node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
23-73 Open drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
23-74 Prompt for client password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
23-75 Web client launched from Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
23-76 Enable LAN-free Data Movement wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
23-77 Wizard summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
23-78 Setup the Enterprise Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
23-79 Select Set Up Enterprise Configuration... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
23-80 Enterprise Configuration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
23-81 Enterprise Configuration Wizard - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
23-82 Enterprise Configuration Wizard - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
23-83 Enterprise Configuration - Server-to-Server Communication Settings. 259
23-84 Enterprise Configuration - Enable Cross Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
23-85 Setup the Enterprise Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
23-86 Select the server for Enterprise Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
23-87 Show all defined servers and select Define Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
23-88 Define Server Wizard introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
23-89 Define Server Wizard - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
23-90 Define Server Wizard - Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
23-91 Define Server Wizard - Virtual Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
23-92 Define Server Wizard - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
23-93 Modify Library drop-down selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
23-94 Library properties portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
23-95 Add path drop-down menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Figures xvii
 23-96 Enter path details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
23-97 Path successfully added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
23-98 View Storage Pools drop-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
23-99 Create a Storage Pool drop-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
23-100 Choose Storage pool name and type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
23-101 Select a Device Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
23-102 Successful completion of wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
23-103 Modify Storage Pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
23-104 Enable CRC checking for Storage Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
23-105 Define Policy Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
23-106 Define Policy Domain Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
23-107 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Storage pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
23-108 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Assign client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
23-109 Define Policy Domain Wizard - View client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
23-110 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Select client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
23-111 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
23-112 Policy Domains Properties - Define a new Management Class . . . . . 285
23-113 Create a Management Class drop-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
23-114 Create Management Class Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
23-115 Create Management Class Wizard - Backup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
23-116 Create Management Class Wizard - Backup versions. . . . . . . . . . . . 289
23-117 Create Management Class Wizard - Archive settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
23-118 Create Management Class Wizard - HSM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
23-119 Create Management Class Wizard - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
23-120 Validate LAN-free configuration with command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
23-121 Library Properties - enable library sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
23-122 Validate LAN-free after activation of library sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
23-123 Server Properties view showing Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
23-124 Ensure account is not locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
23-125 Configure Health Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
23-126 Enter password and refresh interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
23-127 Health monitor drop-down selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
23-128 Health monitor details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
23-129 Expanded view of Health Monitor Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
23-130 Favorites drop-down list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
23-131 Organize Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
23-132 Zoomed view of navigation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
23-133 Manage pages in Page Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
24-1 MMC View showing Operational Reporting elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
24-2 MMC view of Tivoli Storage Manager Server - Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . 306
24-3 Right click menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
24-4 Enter Report name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
24-5 Select Report Sections for report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

xviii IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

24-6 Add E-mail recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
24-7 Choose Automatic Notification recipients for specific nodes . . . . . . . . 310
24-8 Top part of Daily Report with highlighted errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
24-9 Create new Hourly Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
24-10 Monitor details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
24-11 E-mail recipient information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
24-12 Net send recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
A-1 Cluster using GPFS and ASNODENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A-2 Install from specific location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
A-3 Do not search for driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
A-4 Select device driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
24-13 First certification warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A-5 Final warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A-6 Administration Center showing Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
A-7 Web client: Node access list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
A-8 Web client: Granting access to another node for filespace or directory334
A-9 Web client: Node access list with added node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
A-10 Web client: Access another node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
A-11 Web client: checking Connection Information: Accessing As Node. . . 336
A-12 Web client: Access another node: warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
A-13 Access Another Node: Restore file list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Figures xix
xx IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
Tables

3-1 Dependencies of collocation groups and storage pool collocation . . . . 49

3-2 Random vs. sequential access DISK/FILE device class storage pools . 52
3-3 Improved defaults (old/new values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
18-1 Overview of backup grouping differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
23-1 Restricted or unsupported commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
A-1 Functions available - virtualnodename, fromnode, and asnodename . 320
B-1 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
B-2 Client node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
B-3 Database and database volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
B-4 Disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
B-5 Expiration processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
B-6 LAN-free data movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
B-7 Library volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
B-8 Network-attached storage (NAS) file server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
B-9 Restore session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
B-10 Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
B-11 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
B-12 Server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
B-13 Storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
B-14 Storage pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
B-15 Volume history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
C-1 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
C-2 Backup Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
C-3 Client node including file spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
C-4 Data Mover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
C-5 Database space trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
C-6 Database volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
C-7 Device class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
C-8 Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
C-9 Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
C-10 Management class including copy groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
C-11 Option set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
C-12 Path for a drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
C-13 Path for a library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
C-14 Policy domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
C-15 Profile for a configuration manager server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
C-16 Recovery space log trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
C-17 Recovery log volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. xxi

 C-18 Schedule for client nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
C-19 Administrative schedule for a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
C-20 Add or modify Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
C-21 Server group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
C-22 Server script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
C-23 Storage pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
C-24 Subscription to a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
C-25 Volumes in a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
C-26 Volumes in a storage pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
D-1 Enterprise management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
D-2 Storage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
D-3 Policy domains and client nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
D-4 Server maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
E-1 Basics of the Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
E-2 Installation of the Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
E-3 Using the Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
E-4 Troubleshooting and additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
G-1 Additional material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

xxii IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Examples

3-1 Additional information now displayed with QUERY STATUS . . . . . . . . 42

3-2 Labeling and check-in of tapes without a reply by using WAITTIME=0 . 43
3-3 Check-out of tapes without a reply by using REMOVE=BULK . . . . . . . 44
3-4 DEFINE COLLOCGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3-5 DEFINE COLLOCMEMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3-6 QUERY COLLOCGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3-7 QUERY NODEDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3-8 SELECT statement for listing node name and collocation group name. 49
3-9 ESTIMATE DBREORGSTATS and detailed query of database . . . . . . 49
3-10 MIGRATE STGPOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3-11 RECLAIM STGPOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3-12 Validating LAN-free configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-13 Validating LAN-free Configuration - explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3-14 Usage of PARALLEL and SERIAL in server scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3-15 Entry in activity log of newly created enhanced schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3-16 Detailed display of newly created enhanced schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
11-1 Output from the command SHOW LANFREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
11-2 Validate lanfree with copystoragepool assigned to primary pool . . . . . 104
11-3 Configuration of the client options file (dsm.sys) for CRETE1 . . . . . . . 106
11-4 Check the LAN-free configuration for Node CRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11-5 Configuration in Client options file for LANFREETCPServeraddress . 107
11-6 Check the LAN-free configuration for Node KATHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11-7 Storage Agent Console Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
18-1 Some excludes from domain option in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
18-2 Excludes from domain option in UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
18-3 Output of the command query node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
18-4 List backed up files with last modification and last access date . . . . . 132
18-5 List archived files with last modification and last access date . . . . . . . 132
18-6 QUERY OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
18-7 “dd” command provided with the Windows client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
18-8 Display a single file space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
18-9 Querying scheduled events: new fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
18-10 DELETE BACKUP using the client command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
20-1 Improved command line client status messages - example 1 . . . . . . . 170
20-2 Improved command line client status messages - example 2 . . . . . . . 171
23-1 Select a Management class - include/exclude statement in dsm.opt . 295
A-1 Example of a PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
A-2 Creating symbolic link to dsm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. xxiii

 A-3 SET ACCESS and QUERY ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

xxiv IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult
your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area.
Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that
does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions
are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES
THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may
make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at
any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published
announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm
the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on
the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them
as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products.
All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrates programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in
any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the
sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM,
therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of
developing, using, marketing, or distributing application programs conforming to IBM's application
programming interfaces.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. xxv

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:

AFS® FlashCopy® Redbooks™

AIX® HACMP™ Redbooks (logo) ™
AIX 5L™ IBM® SANergy®
Domino® ibm.com® Tivoli®
DB2 Universal Database™ iSeries™ Tivoli Enterprise™
DB2® Lotus® Tivoli Enterprise Console®
DFS™ Notes® TotalStorage®
Enterprise Storage Server® OS/390® WebSphere®
ESCON® OS/400® z/OS®
Eserver® PowerPC® zSeries®
Eserver® pSeries®

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.

Intel and Intel Inside (logos) are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or
both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

xxvi IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Preface

This IBM® Redbook presents an overview of IBM Tivoli® Storage Manager

Version 5.3, giving detailed descriptions of the changes provided in this new
release. This Redbook also covers the cumulative changes in the releases after
version 5.1.

This book is intended for customers, consultants, IBM Business Partners, IBM
and Tivoli staff who are familiar with earlier releases of Tivoli Storage Manager
and who want to understand what is new in Version 5.3. It should be used in
conjunction with the manuals and readme files provided with the products and is
not intended to replace any information contained therein.

This redbook is the latest in a series of Technical Guides for the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager. The books previously published have been:
򐂰 ADSM Version 3 Technical Guide, SG24-2236-01,
published 9 December 1998
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 3.7: Technical Guide, SG24-5477-00,
published 26 December 1999, last updated 27 March 2000
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 3.7.3 & 4.1: Technical Guide, SG24-6110-00,
published 29 September 2000
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 4.2 Technical Guide, SG24-6277-00,
published 31 January 2002
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1 Technical Guide, SG24-6554-00,
published 20 June 2002

Note: The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager documentation carries the same
version number 5.2 for both the 5.2 and 5.2.2 versions of the software product.
Make sure you look at the release date of the publication on the first pages.
The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide 5.2/5.2.2 have been
published June 2003/January 2004.
The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Reference 5.2/5.2.2 have
been published April 2003/January 2004.
The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide 5.2/5.2.2 have been
published April 2003/December 2004.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. xxvii

The team that wrote this redbook
This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world
working at the International Technical Support Organization, San Jose Center.

The team, from left to right: Roland, Gerd, Armin, Shayne

Roland Tretau is a Project Leader with the IBM International Technical Support
Organization, San Jose Center. Before joining the ITSO in April 2001, Roland
worked in Germany as an IT Architect with a major focus on open systems
solutions and Microsoft® technologies. He holds a Master's degree in Electrical
Engineering with an emphasis in telecommunications. He is a Red Hat Certified
Engineer (RHCE) and a Microsoft Certified Systems Engineer (MCSE), and he
holds a Masters Certificate in Project Management from The George Washington
University School of Business and Public Management.

xxviii IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Gerd Becker is a Project Manager for Emprise Network Consulting GmbH, a
Premium IBM Business Partner in Germany. He has more than 25 years of IT
experience, including over 13 years experience with storage management
products such as DFSMS and Tivoli Storage Manager. His areas of expertise
include IBM Tivoli Storage Manager implementation projects and education at
customer sites, including mainframe environments (OS/390®, VSE, VM, and
Linux® for zSeries®). He holds several certifications, including technical and
sales, and is an IBM Tivoli Certified Instructor. He has developed and taught
several storage classes for IBM Education Services in Germany, Switzerland
and Austria. He has been Chairman of the Guide Share Europe (GSE) user
group for more than 4 years.

Shayne Gardener is a Tivoli Storage Manager Support Specialist in the United

Kingdom. He has over 15 years of customer facing experience in Computer
Support. He has an HND in Computing from Gloucestershire University in
Cheltenham, United Kingdom. Before joining IBM he worked for major Utility,
Telephony and Internet companies specializing in Windows® Desktop and
Server Systems support. He has also worked for UK government organizations
both in the UK and in the United States. He has nearly 5 years of service with
IBM. His skill areas include IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and additional products,
including Tivoli Decision Support, Tivoli Data Protection, and recently, Tivoli
Storage Resource Manager.

Armin Klos is an IT Storage Specialist in Germany. He has over 10 years of IT

experience. He joined IBM 7 years ago and started as a Systems Management
IT Specialist. He now has 4 years of experience in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
implementation projects at major international companies. He has a degree in
Computer Science from the Fachhochschule Darmstadt. His areas of expertise
include IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and complementary products on the Wintel
and UNIX® platforms, as well as tape and disk systems in SAN environments.

Many thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project:

Yvonne Lyon, Deanna Polm, Emma Jacobs

International Technical Support Organization, San Jose

Tricia Jiang, Freddy Saldana, Aggie Rubio, Alexei Kojenov, Bill Komanetsky,
Billy Ward, Bob LaBrie, Carlota Madani, Claire Rankin, Clare Byrne, Craig Bell,
David Ellis, Edward Mike Collins, Gary Spizizen, Gergana Markova,
Glen Hattrup, Henry Hom, Holly King, Jim Smith, Joanne Nguyen,
Julius Martinez, Katherine Keaney, Kathy Mitton, Kevin Dang, Mark Holfinger,
Mary Mendoza-Baker, Massimo Mastrorilli, Nicholas Kovacs, Pete Tanenhaus,
Rob Gagliardo, Roy Tritch, Sandra Boesch, William Scheid, Yolanda Martinez
Terri McLaughlin, Tammy Hsia
IBM US

Preface xxix
 Joerg Erdmenger, Dr. Hans-Joachim Renger, Dietmar Fischer
IBM Germany

Michael Klatt
StorageTek Germany

Become a published author

Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write an IBM Redbook
dealing with specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience
with leading-edge technologies. You'll team with IBM technical professionals,
Business Partners and/or customers.

Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As
a bonus, you'll develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and
increase your productivity and marketability.

Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and
apply online at:
ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html

Comments welcome
Your comments are important to us!

We want our Redbooks™ to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments

about this or other Redbooks in one of the following ways:
򐂰 Use the online Contact us review redbook form found at:
ibm.com/redbooks
򐂰 Send your comments in an e-mail to:
[email protected]
򐂰 Mail your comments to:
IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization
Dept. QXXE Building 80-E2
650 Harry Road
San Jose, California 95120-6099

xxx IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Part 1

Part 1 Overview
This part of the book gives a basic introduction to the new features provided with
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3. It also provides an overview of the
improvements incorporated in previous versions (5.1.5/5.2/5.2.2), not covered
since the last Technical Guide.

Server and client specific features are covered in more detail in later chapters.

New functions or processes are covered in more depth in the Appendixes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 1

2 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 1

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

overview
This chapter contains an overview of the new functionality and changes that
come with the latest Version 5.3 of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager, as well as
the cumulative changes in the releases after Version 5.1.

In this chapter we provide information on the following major areas of change:

򐂰 Overview of enhancements, additions, and changes:
– Server enhancements, additions, and changes
– Client enhancements, additions, and changes
– IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Products

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 3

1.1 Overview
As part of the IBM TotalStorage® Open Software Family, IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager protects data from hardware failures, errors, and unforeseen disasters
by storing backup and archive copies on offline and offsite storage. Scaling to
protect hundreds to thousands of computers running more than a dozen
operating systems, ranging from laptops to mainframes and connected together
via the Internet, WANs, LANs or SANs, Storage Manager Extended Edition's
centralized Web-based management, intelligent data move and store
techniques, and comprehensive policy based automation all work together to
minimize administration costs and the impact to both computers and networks.

Optional software modules allow business-critical applications that must run

24x365 to utilize Storage Manager's centralized data protection with no
interruption to their service. Optional software extensions also allow SAN
connected computers to use the SAN for data protection data movements, and
provide Hierarchical Storage Management to automatically move unused data
files from online disk storage to offline tape storage. Storage Manager Extended
Edition expands on the data backup and restore, and managed data archive and
retrieve capabilities of the base Storage Manager by adding, disaster planning
capability, NDMP control for NAS filers, and support for large tape libraries.

Figure 1-1 shows the interrelation of the components in IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Version 5.3.

ISC Server can be run

on separate server ISC Server can be run
on the same server as
the TSM server
Integrated Solution Console
with TSM Admin Center

Local Area Network

Log

Database

Storage
Servers, Clients, Repository
Application systems Storage Area Network

TSM Clients TSM Server TSM Stgpools

Figure 1-1 How the product components interrelate in version 5.3

4 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Note: The Tivoli Storage Manager Server and the Administration Center can
be installed on the same machine. The Administration Center requires a
minimum of 512 MB RAM in addition to the RAM required for the Tivoli
Storage Manager Server.

For the latest recommendations on Administration Center installation, use

keyword TSMADMINCENTER when you visit:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager.html

1.1.1 Disaster preparation and recovery

Local copies of data will not protect against a local disaster. IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Extended Edition facilitates the tracking of the additional copies of your
active data that IBM Tivoli Storage Manager creates for safekeeping at an off site
location. This is known as the Disaster Recovery Manager. IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Extended Edition prepares and keeps up to date a text file, the
“recovery plan”, which contains detailed recovery steps and automated scripts to
recover your server. Should a disaster strike and destroy your storage and
computers, this plan and the off site data copies will get your business back up
and running quickly.

1.2 Product positioning

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and its complementary products provide a
comprehensive solution focused on the key data protection activities of backup,
archive, recovery, space management, and disaster recovery planning.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager helps ensure recoverability through the automated
creation, tracking, and vaulting of reliable recovery points.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition provides the following support:
򐂰 Disaster Recovery Manager
򐂰 NDMP (for selected network attached storage devices)
򐂰 Large tape libraries (greater than 3 drives or 40 slots)
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager (for basic backup-archive using a tape library
with up to 3 drives and 40 slots).

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Storage Area Networks and IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager for Space Management can be used with either IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition.

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview 5

1.3 Overview of the development timeline
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager started life as ADSM (ADSTAR Distributed Storage
Manager). Figure 1-2 illustrates the changes to ADSM to become IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager over its lifetime.

ITSM V5.3

ITSM V5.2.2

ITSM V5.2

er
ITSM V5.1.5
ADSM
g
na
Marketing/Sales TSM V5.1
a
moved from

M
IBM Storage TSM V4.2 12/2004

e
Systems to

ag
IBM Tivoli Software TSM V4.1 12/2003

r
Tivoli
Storage
Sto 06/2003
Manager
V3.7
ol i 10/2002

Tiv 04/2002

M 06/2001

IB
ADSM V3.1
07/2000
ADSM V2.1

ADSM V1.1 09/1999

SM
ADSM V1.2

AD 01/1999

1997

1995

1993

Figure 1-2 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overall product progression

1.4 New features overview

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager helps you evolve into an On Demand storage
environment in order to deliver specific results in the areas of:
򐂰 Improved application availability:
– IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Space Management: HSM for AIX® JFS2,
enhancements to HSM for AIX and Linux GPFS
– IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for application products update

6 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 򐂰 Optimized storage resource utilization:
– Improved device management, SAN attached device dynamic mapping,
native STK ACSLS drive sharing and LAN-free operations, improved tape
checkin and checkout, and label operations, and new device support
– Disk storage pool enhancements, collocation groups, proxy node support,
improved defaults, reduced LAN-free CPU utilization, parallel reclamation
and migration
򐂰 Enhanced storage personnel productivity:
– New Administrator Web GUI
– Task-oriented interface with wizards to simplify tasks such as scheduling,
managing server maintenance operations (storage pool backup,
migration, reclamation), and configuring devices
– Health monitor which shows status of scheduled events, the database and
recovery log, storage devices, and activity log messages
– Calendar-based scheduling for increased flexibility of client and
administrative schedules
– Operational customization for increased ability to control and schedule
server operations

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 is designed to provide significant

improvements to the ease of use and ease of administration and serviceability
characteristics. These enhancements help you improve the productivity of
personnel administering and using IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. Additionally, the
product is easier to use for new administrators and users.

1.4.1 Server enhancements, additions, and changes

This section lists all the functional enhancements, additions, and changes for the
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server introduced after version 5.1.

Note: For a list of the enhancements introduced with each version and the
availability on specific platforms see Appendix F, “Tables of the changes and
enhancements by versions” on page 383

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview 7

 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1.5
There are several operating platform improvements.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2

Changes between Version 5.1 and Version 5.2 are listed here:
򐂰 Accurate SAN device mapping
򐂰 Device driver for Windows Server 2003
򐂰 IBM device driver for 3570, 3590, and IBM LTO devices
򐂰 Increased archive retention limits
򐂰 LAN-free data movement for z/OS®
򐂰 Licensing changes
򐂰 Linux for pSeries®
򐂰 Linux for zSeries
򐂰 Macintosh OS X unicode support for backup-archive client
򐂰 Move data by node
򐂰 Product packaging and name changes
– DRM part of IBM Tivoli Storage Manager EE
– TDP now Application Client
– TDP for NDMP in EE
– Tivoli Space Manager now HSM
– Tivoli Storage Manager for SAN product now includes LAN-free data
movement
򐂰 Server Performance Tuning TXNGROUPMAX
򐂰 Server to server export and import
򐂰 Security firewall support
򐂰 StorageTek VolSafe support
򐂰 Support for SCSI libraries with multiple drive types
򐂰 Support for simultaneous writes to primary and copy storage pools
򐂰 Tape alert device support
򐂰 Tape autolabeling

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2.2

Changes between Version 5.2 and Version 5.2.2 are listed here:
򐂰 Disaster Recovery Manager for Linux

8 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

򐂰 DVD support
򐂰 EMC Centera support
򐂰 IBM 3592 support
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for data retention
– Data retention protection
– Event-based retention policy
– Deletion hold
򐂰 LAN-free data movement for z/OS
򐂰 NDMP operations
– IBM 3494 library support
– File level restore
– EMC Celerra NAS device support
򐂰 Operational Reporting
򐂰 Sony AIT50 and AIT100 WORM media support

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3

The latest changes are listed here:
򐂰 ACSLS library support enhancements
򐂰 Accurate SAN device mapping for UNIX servers
򐂰 ACSLS library support enhancements
򐂰 Activity Log management
򐂰 Check-in and check-out enhancements
򐂰 Collocation by group
򐂰 Communications options
򐂰 Database reorganization
򐂰 Disk-only backup
򐂰 Enhancements for server migration and reclamation processes
򐂰 IBM 3592 WORM support
򐂰 Improved defaults
򐂰 Increased block size for writing to tape
򐂰 LAN-free environment configuration
򐂰 NDMP operations
򐂰 Net Appliance SnapLock support

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview 9

 򐂰 New interface to manage servers: Administration Center
򐂰 Server processing control in scripts
򐂰 Simultaneous write inheritance improvements
򐂰 Space triggers for mirrored volumes
򐂰 Storage Agent and library sharing failover
򐂰 Support for Multiple IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client nodes
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager scheduling flexibility

1.4.2 Client enhancements, additions and changes

This chapter lists all the functional enhancements, additions and changes for the
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Backup Archive Client introduced after version 5.1.

Note: For a list of the enhancements introduced with each version and the
availability on specific platforms see Appendix F, “Tables of the changes and
enhancements by versions” on page 383

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1.5

Changes between Version 5.1 and Version 5.1.5 are listed here:
򐂰 New backup-archive option to preserve last access date of files
򐂰 Enhanced domain processing
򐂰 64-bit support for the Storage Manager HP-UX client
򐂰 Support for a globally unique identifier (GUID)
򐂰 Enhanced query backup and query archive commands
򐂰 Linux86 client support for the General Parallel File System (GPFS)
򐂰 Lan-free data movement support on linux86 client
򐂰 STORAGE AGENT 5.1 (October 2002) - for Linux
򐂰 Support for excluding specific system objects from backup processing
򐂰 Ignore NTFS compression attribute
򐂰 Enhanced image backup and restore processing (Windows 2000 only)
򐂰 Support for DBCS installation path on Unicode-enabled clients
򐂰 Support for Novell Cluster Services
򐂰 Enhanced domain processing
򐂰 Enhanced query backup and query archive commands

10 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

򐂰 No changes introduced in 5.1.5 to the Mac OS X

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2

Changes between Version 5.1.5 and Version 5.2 are listed here:
򐂰 Support for backing up files from one or more file space origins
򐂰 Support for an external snapshot provider in the backup-archive clients
򐂰 Enhancements to the Web client interface
򐂰 Enhanced firewall security
򐂰 Support for displaying options and their settings via the command line
򐂰 NDMP file-level restore
򐂰 Support for processing EMC Celerra Network Attached Storage (NAS) file
system images
򐂰 Support for backup and restore of the WebSphere® Application Server
(WAS)
򐂰 Enhancements for command line image restore operations
򐂰 Support for gathering IBM Tivoli Storage Manager system information
򐂰 Enhancements for the query filespace command
򐂰 Separately installable language packs available
򐂰 Veritas file systems, ACLs, and Veritas Volume Manager support on AIX
(32-bit and 64-bit) clients
򐂰 Automounter support for Linux86 and Linux390 clients
򐂰 Open file support for backup and archive operations on Windows 2000 and
Windows XP
򐂰 Support for Microsoft Volume Shadowcopy Service (VSS) on Windows
Server 2003
򐂰 Support for Microsoft Automated System Recovery (ASR) on Windows
Server 2003 and Windows XP
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager command line and GUI display actual image size
stored on IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server
򐂰 Enhanced ALL-LOCAL domain processing (NDS replica)
򐂰 Migrating to the Unicode-enabled client
򐂰 Considerations for Unicode-enabled clients
򐂰 Inclexcl
򐂰 Autofsrename

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview 11

 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2.2
Changes between Version 5.2 and Version 5.2.2 are listed here:
򐂰 Removal of operand limits for backup and archive operations
򐂰 Multi-session backup session enhancements
򐂰 Support for WebSphere Application Server (WAS) security
򐂰 Language support expanded to include Russian, Hungarian, Polish, and
Czech
򐂰 Support for controlling symbolic link processing
򐂰 Backup and restore support for IBM TotalStorage SAN File System
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client Linux on iSeries™
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client for Linux on Intel® Itanium
򐂰 Support for Veritas Cluster Server cluster environment
򐂰 Backup and restore support for IBM TotalStorage SAN File System (Windows
2000 Client)
򐂰 Multi-session backup session enhancements
򐂰 Support for Novell NetWare 6.5 operating system
򐂰 Enhanced firewall security
򐂰 Support for encrypting data during backup or archive operation
򐂰 Support for displaying options and their settings via the command line for
Mac OS X (available since 5.1.5 for all others)
򐂰 Support for gathering IBM Tivoli Storage Manager system information for
Mac OS X (available since 5.1.5 for all others)
򐂰 Support for an IBM Tivoli Storage Manager command line interface for
Mac OS X
򐂰 Support for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager as a background scheduler for
Mac OS X
򐂰 Support for non-administrators to use
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager to manage their own data for Mac OS X
򐂰 Support for a IBM Tivoli Storage Manager administrative client for Mac OS X
򐂰 Support for controlling symbolic link and alias processing for Mac OS X

12 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3
The latest Changes are listed here:
򐂰 Include-exclude enhancements
򐂰 Enhancements to query schedule command
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administration Center
򐂰 Support for deleting individual backups from a server file space
򐂰 Optimized option default values
򐂰 New links from the backup-archive client Java™ GUI to the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager and Tivoli Home Pages
򐂰 New options, Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax, and DSM_LOG environment
variable changes
򐂰 Enhanced encryption
򐂰 Dynamic client tracing
򐂰 Web client enhancements
򐂰 Client node proxy support (asnodename)
򐂰 Java GUI and Web client enhancements
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client for HP-UX Itanium 2
򐂰 Linux for zSeries® offline image backup
򐂰 Journal based backup enhancements
򐂰 Single drive support for Open File Support (OFS) or online image backups

Chapter 1. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview 13

14 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 2

Chapter 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

for products
This chapter gives a brief description of the changes in the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager for Mail, Databases, Hardware, Application Servers, and Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP), which appeared since the versions documented in
earlier redbooks.

Tip: Be aware that failure to register licenses for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
for products can lead to unusual client behavior which can often be resolved
by registering the relevant license.

For a short functional overview of how these products work, please refer to
Chapter 5, “Storage Management”, in the IBM Redbook: Understanding the IBM
TotalStorage Open Software Family, SG24-7089-00, available at:
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg247098.html?Open

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 15

2.1 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Mail
Data Protection for Domino® is an application that backs up and restores Lotus®
Domino databases and transaction logs. When archival logging is used on the
Domino Server, it archives transaction log files and retrieves them as required for
database recovery.

Data Protection for Exchange performs online backups and restores of Microsoft
Exchange Server storage groups. You can perform backups and restores using
a command line interface (CLI) or graphical user interface (GUI) on a Windows
NT®, Windows 2000, or Windows 2003 system.

The following sections summarize the changes for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
for Mail, which is divided into Data Protection for Lotus Domino and Data
Protection for Microsoft Exchange.

2.1.1 Data Protection for Lotus Domino

Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for Lotus Domino:
򐂰 Data Protection for Domino supports Domino 6 and the alternate restore path
feature for transaction logs in a Domino 6 environment.
򐂰 The resetdatabase command resets a Domino server database that is in an
incomplete state as a result of an unexpected termination during a Data
Protection for Domino backup.
򐂰 The statistics option provides backup and restore information to assist in
performance measurement. This option is specified in the Data Protection for
Domino preferences file (domdsm.cfg).
򐂰 Remote Web access — You can access Data Protection for Domino remotely
using the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Web client. This feature is available on
Windows, AIX, Linux 86, Linux on 390, Solaris, and z/OS(R) only.
򐂰 Quick Start — A quick start procedure is available to assist in setting up your
Data Protection for Domino environment.
򐂰 Best Practices — Recommended tips and hints regarding Data Protection for
Domino processing are available in a new chapter.
򐂰 Frequently Asked Questions — Answers to frequently asked questions
regarding Data Protection for Domino processing are available in a new
appendix.

16 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

2.1.2 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for Windows
Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for Lotus Domino
for Windows:
򐂰 Language option — The language option specifies locale information for your
environment. This option is specified in the Data Protection for Domino
preferences file(domdsm.cfg)
򐂰 Enhanced GUI Query Filter — The By Database Name GUI query filter
reduces processing time when querying the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
server for databases to restore.

2.1.3 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for UNIX, Linux, and OS/400
Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for Lotus Domino
for UNIX, Linux, and OS/400®:
򐂰 Data Protection for Domino supports Domino 6 and the alternate restore path
feature for transaction logs in a Domino 6 environment
򐂰 Data Protection for Domino provides a new dominstall program. This
program automatically configures Data Protection for Domino to operate
within your desired Domino environment and replaces the domsetup script
provided in earlier releases of Data Protection for Domino. The dominstall
program also supports multiple Domino server partitions.
򐂰 The resetdatabase command resets a Domino server database that is in an
incomplete state as a result of an unexpected termination during a Data
Protection for Domino backup.
򐂰 The statistics option provides backup and restore information to assist in
performance measurement. This option is specified in the Data Protection for
Domino preferences file (domdsm.cfg).
򐂰 Data Protection for Domino supports the Linux operating system.
򐂰 OS/400 users — The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Mail 5.1.5 version of
DataProtection for Domino contains the Version 1.1.2 level release of Data
Protection for Domino on OS/400. Only the product name has changed. All
technical requirements and functionality are at the Version 1.1.2 level.
򐂰 The OS/400 operating system supports the dominstall program and no
longer requires running the domsetup script.
򐂰 The OS/400 operating system uses the Version 5.2.0 level of the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager API.
򐂰 Remote Web access — You can access Data Protection for Domino remotely
using the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Web client. This feature is available on
AIX, Linux. 86, Linux on 390, Solaris, and z/OS only.

Chapter 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for products 17

 򐂰 Quick Start — A quick start procedure is available to assist in setting up your
Data Protection for Domino environment
򐂰 Best Practices — Recommended tips and hints regarding Data Protection for
Domino processing are available in a new chapter
򐂰 Frequently Asked Questions — Answers to frequently asked questions
regarding Data Protection for Domino processing are available in a new
appendix.

2.1.4 Data Protection for Microsoft Exchange Server

Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for Microsoft
Exchange Server:
򐂰 The language option specifies locale information for your environment. This
option is specified in the Data Protection for Exchange preferences
file(tdpexc.cfg).
򐂰 Data Protection for Exchange supports back up and restore of Exchange
2000 Server Key Management Service (KMS) and Site Replication Service
(SRS) databases from the Data Protection for Exchange graphical user
interface (GUI).
򐂰 Data Protection for Exchange provides information on how to perform
brick-level backup and restores of your Microsoft Exchange Server.
See the BRICKBACK.DOC file in the Data Protection for Exchange
installation directory for more information.
򐂰 Support is provided for:
– Exchange Server 2003
– Exchange Server 2003 Recovery Storage Group
– Windows Server 2003
򐂰 Separately installed Language Packs are available.
򐂰 A new quick start procedure is available to assist in setting up your
DataProtection for Exchange environment.

2.2 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Databases

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Databases performs online or offline backups of
databases to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. This integration maximizes the
protection of data, thus providing a comprehensive storage management
solution.The list summarizes the changes for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for
Databases, divided into Data Protection for Microsoft SQL Server and Data
Protection for Oracle.

18 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

2.2.1 Data Protection for Microsoft SQL Server
Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for Microsoft SQL
Server:
򐂰 Support is provided for Windows Server 2003.
򐂰 Separately installed Language Packs are available.
򐂰 Data Protection for SQL supports SQL Server 2000 (64-bit).
򐂰 Language option specifies locale information in the Data Protection for SQL
preferences file (tdpsql.cfg).

2.2.2 Data Protection for Oracle

The changes and improvements for Data Protection for Oracle include support
for the following databases and operating systems:
򐂰 Oracle 9i databases
򐂰 Windows Server 2003 operating system
򐂰 Linux operating system
򐂰 Linux zSeries operating system
򐂰 AIX 5L™ (Version 5.1) operating system
򐂰 Solaris 9 operating system
򐂰 Oracle 9i databases

2.2.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for ERP

Specifically designed and optimized for the SAP R/3 environment, IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager for ERP provides automated data protection, reduces the CPU
performance impact of data backups and restores on the R/3 server, and greatly
reduces the administrator workload necessary to meet data protection
requirements. Tivoli Storage Manager for ERP builds on the SAP BR Tools, a set
of database administration functions integrated with R/3 for database control and
administration.

The Storage Manager for ERP software module allows multiple R/3 servers to
utilize a single Tivoli Storage Manager server to automatically manage the
backup of R/3 data. As the intelligent interface to the R/3 database, Tivoli
Storage Manager for ERP is SAP certified in heterogeneous environments,
supporting large-volume data backups, data recovery, data cloning, and disaster
recovery of multiple SAP R/3 servers.

Chapter 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for products 19

 Here are the new functions and improvements in Version 5.3:
򐂰 The new release will adhere to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager VRMF
numbering — Version, Release, Modification, Fix. Although this is actually
“only” a new release, the version number has been incremented from 3 to 5 to
match the numbering of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager family.
򐂰 Simulated backup/restore allows for “non-invasive” testing in production
environments.
򐂰 Analysis of data throughput bottlenecks in production or simulated runs is
greatly simplified by enhancements in the Administration Assistant.
򐂰 CPU load reduction for LAN-free backups minimizes impact of online backups
on production work.
򐂰 Redirected restore capability in BACKFM simplifies cloning of mySAP Oracle
databases.
򐂰 Support is provided for the new DB2® V8.2 log archive API that exploits
enhanced log file management for DB2 UDB.
򐂰 Support is included for:
– HP-UX 11iV2 on Itanium processors
– Oracle RAC (AIX-GPFS) (available 1Q05)

2.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Hardware

Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com Technology (hereafter, DP for
ESS) minimizes the impact on mySAP.com database servers while allowing
automated database backups to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server. DP for
ESS off-loads the transfer of backup data from the database server. The
database must reside on an ESS storage subsystem.

DP for ESS provides options to implement high-efficiency backup and recovery

of business-critical databases while virtually eliminating backup-related
downtime or user disruption on the production host. The new FlashCopy®
Restore (FlashBack Restore) functionality of DP for ESS provides a fully
automated tool for a quick restore of business-critical databases. DP for ESS
now exploits the IBM ESS Copy Services for both FlashCopy Backup and
FlashCopy Restore.

This list summarizes the changes for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Hardware,
divided into Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com (DB2 UDB) and Data
Protection IBM ESS for mySAP.com (Oracle).

20 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

2.3.1 Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com (DB2 UDB)
Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for IBM ESS for
mySAP.com (DB2 UDB):
򐂰 Support is provided for:
– DB2 UDB EEE (Enterprise - Extended Edition)
– FlashCopy Restore (also known as FlashBack Restore)
– SDD Configurations on the backup system
– Incremental FlashCopy

Note: The Incremental FlashCopy feature requires AIX 5.1 or AIX 5.2.
It is not available on AIX 4.3.3.

򐂰 File system consistency check is done for FlashCopied database volumes.

򐂰 There is a new Setup File parameter:
– backup_destination
򐂰 The following new commands are available:
– WITHDRAW
– QUERYDISK
– HELP
򐂰 Selected FlashCopy V2 functionality is employed:
– Incremental FlashCopy
– FlashCopy across different logical subsystems (eliminates an ESS volume
setup restriction)
򐂰 The range of supported platforms is increased to include AIX 5.2, and deleted
AIX 4.3.3 as a supported platform.
򐂰 There are changes in setup requirements — all volume groups of the
production system containing ESS volumes must be set up with vpaths if
SDD is installed.
򐂰 These features are provided:
– DB2 UDB database multi-partition support
– Configuration Wizard
– Best Practices
– How do I...
– Data Protection for ESS on HACMP™ and DB2 UDB Setup —
Data Protection for ESS can be set up to operate in a High Availability
Cluster Multi-Processing (HACMP) and DB2 UDB environment.

Chapter 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for products 21

 򐂰 These commands are provided:
Data Protection for ESS Version 5.3 uses the backup-archive client command
line interface exclusively. As a result, the following commands are new:
– DSMC Backup DB2UDB — Previous versions of Data Protection for ESS
only performed backups of your Oracle database and did not require
specifying backup on the command line. With several new commands
available in Version 5.2.1, backup can now be specified on the command
line.
This command replaces the essdb2p backup command. See “Backup
DB2UDB” for detailed information.
– DSMC Restore DB2UDB — This command allows you to restore the
Oracle database specified in the Setup File.
This command replaces the essdb2p restore command.
– DSMC Query DB2UDB — This command queries the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Server for a list of local and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
snapshot backups.
This command replaces the essdb2p query command.
– DSMC Withdraw DB2UDB — This command withdraws persistent
flashcopy relationship between all the Enterprise Storage Server® Source
Volumes and Target Volumes related to your databases.
This command replaces the essdb2p withdraw command.

Attention: The withdraw command requires AIX 5.1 or AIX 5.2. It is not
available on AIX 4.3.3.

򐂰 The following commands are not supported in Data Protection for ESS
Version 5.3:
– ESSDB2P BACKUP
– ESSDB2P RESTORE
– ESSDB2P MONITOR
– ESSDB2P WITHDRAW
– ESSDB2P QUERYDISK
– ESSDB2P HELP
򐂰 Options — There are several new options; see the documentation for more
information.

22 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

2.3.2 Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com (Oracle)
Here are the changes and improvements for Data Protection for IBM ESS for
mySAP.com (Oracle):
򐂰 Support for the SAP “SPLITINT Interface for Oracle”. The older “Split Mirror
Backup” interface and the Shortened Backup Processing Feature (SBPF) are
no longer supported. The functionality of both is integrated into the new
interface, and the DP for ESS program “IDSCNTL” has therefore been
renamed to “SPLITINT”.

Note: For existing installations upgrading to DP for ESS 1.2.10:

In conjunction with the above program name change, the parameters
“split_cmd” and “resync_cmd” have effectively been deleted and two new
parameters, “split_options” and “split_resync”, have been introduced.

򐂰 Support for FlashCopy restore (also known as FlashBack Restore).

To support the FlashBack Restore, a new FCS_FILE parameter has been
introduced for DP for mySAP.com.
򐂰 Selected FlashCopy V2 functionality is employed:
– Incremental FlashCopy
– FlashCopy across different logical subsystems (eliminates an ESS volume
setup restriction)
򐂰 Existing functionality has been changed (“unmount” function) and extended
with the new “split” (formerly “flashcopy”) and “resync” functions.
򐂰 A capability for a “diskonly” FlashCopy Backup is provided.
򐂰 Anew command (tdpessora) has been added to provide information for the
restore/recovery process.
򐂰 The range of supported platforms has been increased to include AIX 5.2, and
AIX 4.3.3 has been deleted as a supported platform.
򐂰 A paragraph has been added listing environments that are not supported
򐂰 There are changes in setup requirements:
򐂰 All volume groups of the production system containing ESS volumes must be
set up with vpaths if SDD is installed.
򐂰 Data Protection for ESS provides FlashCopy restore (referred to as Quick
Restore) for your Oracle database.
򐂰 Support is provided for Incremental FlashCopy.

Note: The Incremental FlashCopy feature requires AIX 5.1 or AIX 5.2. It is
not available on AIX 4.3.3.

Chapter 2. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for products 23

 򐂰 A file system consistency check is done for FlashCopied database volumes.
򐂰 These are new Setup File parameters:
– backup_destination
– database_control_file_restore
– database_ops_host_sid_orchome
– shark_query_interval
– shark_query_lun_statusv
򐂰 These are new commands:
– backup
– restore
– monitor
– withdraw
– querydisk
– help

2.4 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Application Servers

Data Protection for WebSphere Application Server (Data Protection for WAS) is
a separately priced and licensed product from the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
backup-archive client. If you installed the Data Protection for WAS plug-in, you
can use IBM Tivoli Storage Manager to back up WebSphere Application Server
(WAS) Version 5.x.x components (Application Server and Network Deployment
Manager). Data Protection for WAS is available with the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager backup-archive client Version 5.2.0 (or later).

Changes for this release are summarized below.

The new features include support for:

򐂰 WebSphere Application security
򐂰 WebSphere Application Server Express

The following new option is provided:

wasexphome

A new command has been added:

set waspassword

There is a new procedure:

A section has been added that describes how to automate Data Protection for
WAS backups.

24 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Part 2

Part 2 IBM Tivoli Storage

Manager server
enhancements
This part of the book describes common and specific server enhancements and
Storage Agent enhancements for AIX, HP-UX, Linux, Sun Solaris, OS/400,
Windows, and Z/OS.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 25

26 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 3

Chapter 3. Common server

enhancements
This chapter discusses the new features and enhancements delivered in IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 server, which are common to all server
platforms.

In this chapter we also provide information on major additions to IBM Tivoli

Storage Manager in Versions 5.1.5/5.2/5.2.2.

Note: Please refer to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Installation Guide and
the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide for each supported
server platform, for more detailed information about the changes or new
features.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 27

3.1 Changes in Version 5.1.5
There are no common server enhancements for this version of the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Server.

No common server enhancements

Changes from IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1 to 5.1.5 were limited to
Linux and OS/400 PASE. These changes are documented in their respective
platform specific chapters.

3.2 Changes in Version 5.2

The changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2 covered many areas across
many platforms.

The most obvious change is the new naming convention for the Tivoli Data
Protection clients.

The following sections describe changes common to all platforms.

3.2.1 Accurate SAN device mapping

This enhancement applies to all platforms OS/400 PASE and z/0S.

Device IDs within a SAN environment change when a reset or other

environmental changes occur. With accurate SAN device mapping, Tivoli
Storage Manager can now detect SAN changes using automatic detection of
serial number and element addresses and report that a reconfiguration is
required.

Monitoring the activity log for messages will inform an administrator when device
changes on the SAN have affected Tivoli Storage Manager.

The following number ranges are for messages related to serial numbers:
ANR8952 through ANR8958
ANR8961 through ANR8967

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE DRIVE
DEFINE LIBRARY
DEFINE PATH

28 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 UPDATE DRIVE
UPDATE LIBRARY
UPDATE PATH

Note: With accurate SAN device mapping on the Windows platform

specifically, Tivoli Storage Manager can now detect SAN changes and
automatically make the appropriate processing changes to the server
definitions. AIX, HP, Solaris, and Linux only report that a reconfiguration is
required.

Restriction: Some devices do not have the capability of reporting their serial
numbers to applications such as the Tivoli Storage Manager server. If the
server cannot obtain the serial number from a device, it cannot assist you with
changes to that device’s location on the SAN.

See “Recovering from Device Changes on the SAN” of the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.

3.2.2 Increased archive retention limits

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports increased retention times for archives and
backup sets (maximum value for RETver: 30,000 days = roughly 82 years,
previously 9,999 days = roughly 27 years). These new retention values will allow
data archives to be kept longer. See the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Administrator’s Reference for more information.

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE BACKUPSET
DEFINE COPYGROUP Tivoli Storage Manager
DEFINE DOMAIN
DELETE BACKUPSET
GENERATE BACKUPSET
QUERY BACKUPSET
UPDATE BACKUPSET
UPDATE COPYGROUP
UPDATE DOMAIN

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 29

3.2.3 Licensing changes
The application client for the WebSphere server is now licensed. The licensing
file was.lic is new to this release of Tivoli Storage Manager server.

Tip: Be aware that failure to register licenses for Tivoli Data Protection
products can lead to unusual client behavior which can often be resolved by
registering the relevant license.

See Chapter “Managing Server Operations” of the Tivoli Storage Manager

Administrator’s Guide for more information.

3.2.4 Macintosh OS X unicode support for backup-archive client

Unicode file spaces are now supported on the Macintosh client. By supporting a
Unicode-enabled client, the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server can store file
spaces with Unicode file space names, directory names, and file names. The
client can successfully process an IBM Tivoli Storage Manager operation even
when the file spaces contain directory names or files in multiple languages or
when the client uses a different code page from the server.

See the following changed commands:

DELETE FILESPACE
EXPORT NODE
GENERATE BACKUPSET
IMPORT NODE
QUERY CONTENT
QUERY FILESPACE
QUERY OCCUPANCY
QUERY RESTORE
REGISTER NODE
RENAME FILESPACE
UPDATE NODE

See Chapter “Managing Client Nodes” of the Administrator’s Guide for more
information.

30 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

3.2.5 Security firewall support
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager has enhanced support for environments with
firewalls in which communication originating from outside the firewall is to be
restricted. Clients normally contact the server but with the new firewall support,
you can choose to restrict session initiation to the server
(sessioninitiation=serveronly). Scheduled backup-archive client operations can
be restricted to server-initiated sessions.

See Chapter “Adding Client Nodes” of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Administrator’s Guide and Quick Start for more information.

3.2.6 Server performance tuning

The maximum value of the server option TXNGROUPMAX has been increased.
When transferring multiple small files, increasing the TXNGROUPMAX option
can improve throughput for operations to tape. It is now possible to set the
TXNGROUPMAX option for individual clients.

Attention: Performance tuning cannot be restricted to a single component of

your Tivoli Storage Manager environment. It is an iterative and often complex
process to achieve optimum performance in a given environment and should
be undertaken with the knowledge that changes can sometimes cause
performance to deteriorate as well as improve. For example improving backup
times can impact restore performance.

For more information, see the Administrator’s Reference , as well as the

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Performance Tuning Guide, SC32-9101-01,
available from:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/TSMM/SC32-9101-01/en_US/HTML/SC32-9101-01.htm

3.2.7 Server-to-server export and import

This functionality is available to all platforms except OS/400 PASE and was
introduced for selected platforms prior to 5.2.

Tivoli Storage Manager server export and import processing has been enhanced
to support the following functions:
򐂰 Direct server export to server import over the TCP/IP communications line
between two servers of the same or differing platforms, which eliminates the
need for compatible sequential device types between servers to perform data
movement.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 31

 򐂰 Merging of imported data into existing client file spaces on the server.
򐂰 Ability to export client file data based on a date and time specification, which
allows server-to-server export and import operations to maintain duplicate
copies of client data on two or more servers.

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

See the following changed commands:

EXPORT ADMIN
EXPORT NODE
EXPORT POLICY
EXPORT SERVER
IMPORT NODE
IMPORT SERVER

3.2.8 StorageTek VolSafe support

This functionality is available to all platforms except Linux and OS/400 PASE.

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports StorageTek’s VolSafe media technology.

3.2.9 SCSI libraries with multiple drive types

This function is common to all platforms except OS/400 PASE.

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager now supports libraries that are configured with more
than a single drive and media type. Partitioning the library to segregate the
device types is not required, but each device type requires a separate device
class and storage pool. This is limited to certain models which are denoted as
such in the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Supported Devices Web page:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBM_TSM_Supported_Devices_
for_AIXHPSUNWIN.html
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBM_TSM_Supported_Devices_
for_Linux.html
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBM_TSM_Supported_Devices_
for_iSeries.html

3.2.10 TapeAlert device support

This function is common to all platforms except OS/400 PASE and z/OS.

32 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 TapeAlert is an application that provides detailed diagnostic information about
tape and library device hardware errors. It captures the log page from the drive or
library when tapes are dismounted and issues the appropriate ANRxxxx error
messages, allowing you to recognize problems as early as possible.

See “Handling Tape Alert Messages” in the Administrator’s Guide for more
information.

Tape alert messages are turned off by default. You may set tape alert messages
to ON or OFF by using the SET TAPEALERTMSG command. You may query tape
alert messaging status by using the QUERY TAPEALERTMSG command.

3.2.11 Tape autolabelling

Tivoli Storage Manager now provides the option to have tape volumes
automatically labeled by the server. This option is available for SCSI library
types. The server will label both blank and incorrectly labeled tapes when they
are initially mounted. This eliminates the need to pre-label a set of tapes.

3.3 Changes in Version 5.2.2

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2.2 introduced some new functionality and
features, not the least of which was Operational Reporting. This subject is
covered more completely in the 3.3.5, “Operational Reporting” on page 36.

3.3.1 EMC Centera support

This device support is common to all platforms except OS/400 PASE and z/OS.

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports the EMC Centera Version 2.0 storage
device. Centera devices provide retention protection for archiving fixed content
digital data records. Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention together with
Centera devices provide a foundation storage system that allows mission-critical
data to be retained for a mandated period of time without the possibility of being
rewritten or erased. Centera devices can also be used as standard storage
devices if no mandatory retention requirements exist for the data.

To enable Centera support for data retention protection, use these new
commands:
DEFINE DEVCLASS CENTERA
SET ARCHIVERETENTION PROTECTION

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 33

 For more information about Tivoli Storage Manager support of Centera devices,
see “Defining and Updating CENTERA Device Classes” in the Administrator’s
Guide.

3.3.2 IBM 3592 support

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports IBM 3592 devices. The 3592 device has
fast access capability that gives users the option of scaling down tape capacities
in order to get improved data access response times. See “Scale Capacity” and
“Setting Up a Storage Pool Hierarchy” in the Administrator’s Guide for more
information.

3.3.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention

Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention provides enhancements to Tivoli
Storage Manager Extended Edition to prevent critical data from being erased or
rewritten. This new product helps meet additional requirements defined by
regulatory agencies for retention and disposition of data. These enhancements
include new functionality and new device support and are delivered in these key
areas:

Data retention protection

This feature prevents deliberate or accidental deletion of data until its specified
retention criterion is met.

Event based retention policy

In some cases, retention must be based on an external event such as closing a
brokerage account. Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention supports
event-based retention policy to allow data retention to be based on an event
other than the storage of the data.

Deletion hold
In order to ensure that records are not deleted when a regulatory retention period
has lapsed but other legal requirements mandate that the records continue to be
maintained, Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention includes deletion hold.
Using this feature will prevent stored data from being deleted until the hold is
released.

For additional reading also see the IBM Redbook, Understanding the IBM
TotalStorage Data Retention 450, SG24-7091-00.

34 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

3.3.4 NDMP operations and support
These enhancements are common to all platforms except OS 400 and z/OS
OS/390.

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports backup using NDMP for NAS file servers
that comply with NDMP standards and are neither EMC Celerra nor Network
Appliance file servers. NAS vendors can now use a certification process in order
to ensure NAS file servers are compatible with Tivoli Storage Manager.

NDMP operations for backup of NAS file servers have been enhanced to support
the following functions:
򐂰 Directory-level backup of NAS data, which enables the division of a file
system backup operation among several NDMP backup operations as well as
several tape drives. This enhancement will reduce backup and restore times.
򐂰 NDMP Directory Level Backup will enable Tivoli Storage Manager to backup
user created snapshots that are stored as sub-directories, specifically
Network Appliance snapshots.

See “Using NDMP for Operations with NAS File Servers” in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager 5.2.2 Server Administrator’s Guide for more information.

IBM 3494 library support

NDMP support to the library type IBM 3494 Tape Library DataServer is now
provided.

See “Using NDMP for Operations with NAS File Servers” in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager 5.2.2 Server Administrator’s Guide for more information,
specifically “Configuration 3: 349X Library Connected to the Tivoli Storage
Manager Server“.

File level restore

Tivoli Storage Manager currently provides backup and recovery support for
network-attached storage (NAS) file servers and utilizes Network Data
Management Protocol (NDMP) to communicate with and provide backup and
recovery services for NAS file servers. Support for file level restore includes
enhancements to allow tracking of individual files within a backed-up file system
image. This enhancement makes it possible to display the contents of an image
backup, and individual files within that image can be selected for restore.
Implementation is achieved by generating a table of contents (TOC) during
backup which is stored on the server.

See “Using NDMP for Operations with NAS File Servers” in the Administrator’s
Guide for more information, specifically “Planning for File-Level Restore“.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 35

 EMC Celerra NAS device support
Backup and restore operations for EMC Celerra file servers via NDMP is now
supported. This support includes all base NDMP functions provided for Network
Appliance file servers as well as the file-level restore function.

See “Using NDMP for Operations with NAS File Servers” and “Managing Storage
Pools and Volumes” in the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

3.3.5 Operational Reporting

This function provides operators and administrators with an at-a-glance view of
the performance of their IBM Tivoli Storage Manager environments.

This new feature has not been previously documented, so, for more information,
see “Chapter 21., “Monitoring the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server”, section
“Using IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting” in the Tivoli Storage
Manager 5.3 for Windows Administrator’s Guide.

Note: More details are provided in Chapter 24., “Operational Reporting” on

page 303.

Additional reading
The IBM Redpaper, Integrating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational
Reporting with Event Management, REDP-3850-00, can be found on the IBM
Redbooks Web site at:
http://ibm.com/redbooks

This Redpaper outlines how it is possible to integrate management and reporting

in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager environments into an enterprise-wide IT
monitoring and management solution. It shows how IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Operational Reporting can be used to simplify the monitoring and reporting on
the status of Tivoli Storage Manager environment, as well as how this can be
displayed centrally on an enterprise event management console.

3.3.6 Sony AIT50 and IT100 WORM media support

This device support is common to all platforms except OS/400 PASE and z/OS.

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports the Sony AIT50 and AIT100 WORM (write
once, read many) media technology. To enable this support, the DEFINE
DEVCLASS (8MM) command has a new parameter. For more information about
WORM media, including Sony AIT50 and AIT100, see “Special Considerations
for WORM Tape Media” in the Administrator’s Guide.

36 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

3.3.7 TCPPORT, TCPADMINPORT, and defaults
Note that TCPADMINPORT is a new server option for Tivoli Storage Manager
5.2 which defaults to the value 1500. It does NOT default to the same value as
the TCPPORT option. If multiple servers are running on a system and one of
those servers is using a TCPPORT value of 1500 and if the TCPADMINPORT
option is not specified in all of the server option files, a conflict will occur on port
1500. Only the first server to be brought up will be able to use this port. Other
servers will fail to communicate on port 1500.

Notes:
򐂰 This option also applies to Storage Agents.
򐂰 The default value has been changed in 5.3., see 18.4.5, “Optimized option
default values” on page 155.

3.4 Changes in Version 5.3

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3 has introduced many improvements, most of
which are common to all supported server platforms. See the appropriate server
specific chapter for details regarding a specific platform.

Note: The Quick Start Guide is now entitled Install Guide.

3.4.1 ACSLS library support enhancements

With the exception of HP-UX, OS/400 and z/OS, library support has been
enhanced to allow the sharing of ACSLS libraries.

This implementation will provide the basic support to share ACSLS libraries
across Tivoli Storage Manager servers in the same way that SCSI libraries are
shared. Support for LAN-free data movement using libraries that are controlled
by StorageTek’s ACSLS interface has also been provided. As a result, the use of
a third party product is no longer required.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 37

 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager supports tape libraries controlled by StorageTek
Automated Cartridge System Library Software (ACSLS). The ACSLS library
server manages the physical aspects of tape cartridge storage and retrieval. The
ACSLS client application communicates with the ACSLS library server to access
tape cartridges in an automated library. Tivoli Storage Manager is one of the
applications that gains access to tape cartridges by interacting with ACSLS
through its client, which is known as the control path.

The Tivoli Storage Manager server reads and writes data on tape cartridges by
interacting directly with tape drives through the data path. The control path and
the data path are two different paths. The ACSLS client daemon must be
initialized before starting the server. See /usr/tivoli/tsm/devices/bin/rc.acs_ssi for
the client daemon invocation. For detailed installation, configuration, and system
administration of ACSLS, refer to the appropriate StorageTek documentation.

See “Configuring Storage Devices” in the Administrate’s Guide for more

information.

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE LIBRARY
UPDATE LIBRARY

Multiple ACSLS server configuration

A single Tivoli Storage Manager Server is not capable of communicating with
more than one ACSLS server because it is not possible to define more than one
ACSLS in the Tivoli Storage Manager SSI (rc.acs_ssi) (Note: in Windows STK
LibAttach needs to be installed). Third party products are able to access several
ACSLS servers.

For a better understanding of what a shared Tivoli Storage Manager/ACSLS

environment might look like, see Figure 3-1.

Explanation of abbreviations used:

򐂰 CSC=Client System Component
򐂰 CSI=Client System Interface
򐂰 ACSLS=Automated Cartridge System Library Software
򐂰 TSM SSI = Tivoli Storage Manager Subsystem Interface

38 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 TCP/UDP Control path

Server to
Server to Server
Server

TSM SSI Unix

CSC (rc.acs_ssi)
(rc.acs_ssi) AIX / Solaris
IBM Tivoli IBM
IBM Tivoli
Tivoli IBM Tivoli
IBM Tivoli IBM Tivoli
Storage Storage
Storage Storage
Storage Storage
Manager
Manager Manager
Manager Manager
Manager
Control path

Server
Server StorageAgent
StorageAgent Server
Server

Data path

SAN
SAN
Media Manager „shared“
„shared“Drives
Drives

Data path
CSI
ACSLS, HSC/LS
Drives

Control path
Library

Figure 3-1 How the components for library-sharing work together

The following example provides you with a solution to this problem. You can use
multiple ACSLS by defining them on several Tivoli Storage Manager Servers or
instances and sharing them.

Note: A single Tivoli Storage Manager server is not capable of communicating

with more than one ACSLS server.

The following outline represents the rough steps that allow any Tivoli Storage
Manager server to access any ACSLS library.

For example, if you have ACSLS Server 1, 2, and 3...

Sharing several ACSLS servers among several servers

From SERVER1:
DEFINE LIB1 LIBTYPE=ACSLS
-> (that is, SERVER1 setup for communication with ACSLS Server1)

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 39

 DEFINE LIB2 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER2
DEFINE LIB3 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER3
DEFINE SERVER SERVER2
DEFINE SERVER SERVER3

From SERVER2:
DEFINE LIB2 LIBTYPE=ACSLS
-> (that is, SERVER2 setup for communication with ACSLS Server2)
DEFINE LIB1 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER1
DEFINE LIB3 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER3
DEFINE SERVER SERVER1
DEFINE SERVER SERVER3

From SERVER3:
DEFINE LIB3 LIBTYPE=ACSLS
-> (that is, SERVER3 setup for communication with ACSLS Server3)
DEFINE LIB1 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER1
DEFINE LIB2 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER2
DEFINE SERVER SERVER1
DEFINE SERVER SERVER2

You may consider consolidating control of your libraries into a single ACSLS
server. The ACSLS HA (high availability) option provides redundancy to
minimize down time etc.

Accessing several ACSLS servers from one server

The previous outline represented the rough steps that allowed any Tivoli Storage
Manager server to access any ACSLS library.

To illustrate the case where SERVER1 is your single Tivoli Storage Manager
server that would like access to multiple ACSLS library servers... consider this.

Tivoli Storage Manager SERVER2 and SERVER3 act exclusively as library

managers and control access to the tape drives and tape library volume
inventory. Neither of the servers require NODE definitions, in other words —
backup/archive clients do not connect to these servers. These servers maintain
Tivoli Storage Manager server-to-server connections with Tivoli Storage
Manager SERVER1 as a result of the Tivoli Storage Manager library sharing
engagement. The client NODE is registered on SERVER1. The storage pools
and logical storage pool volumes reside on SERVER1. Device classes
referencing LIB2 and LIB3 require the service of SERVER2 and SERVER3
respectively. The physical tape volume cartridges reside in ACSLS libraries LIB2
and LIB3. Tivoli Storage Manager SERVER1 can host LAN-free activity whose
target library is LIB1, LIB2, or LIB3.

40 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

For example, assume that the LAN-free StgAgentA is configured to store on LIB2
and the associated client NODEA is registered on SERVER1. Likewise,
StgAgentB will target tape volumes located in LIB3 while the associated client
NODEB is registered on Tivoli Storage Manager SERVER1.

The following steps are meant to serve as an example and are not complete, but
rather are intended to represent a rough outline of the general steps.

This outline has been modified to include DRIVEs and PATHs. Additional steps
to represent a LAN-free configuration are highlighted with an underscore.

From SERVER1:
DEFINE LIB1 LIBTYPE=ACSLS
-> (that is, SERVER1 setup for communication with ACSLS Server1)
DEFINE LIB2 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER2
DEFINE LIB3 LIBTYPE=SHARED PRIMMGR=SERVER3
DEFINE SERVER SERVER2
DEFINE SERVER SERVER3
DEFINE PATH SERVER1 DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB1
DEVICE=xxx

Note: There is no path definition for SERVER2, SERVER3, or STGAGENTs

for LIB1, since they have no need (LIB1 in this configuration could be for
exclusive use of SERVER1 for DB backup).

REG NODE NODEA

REG NODE NODEB
DEFINE SERVER STGAGENTA
DEFINE SERVER STGAGENTB

From SERVER2
DEFINE LIB2 LIBTYPE=ACSLS
-> (that is, SERVER2 setup for communication with ACSLS Server2)
DEFINE DRIVE LIB2 DRIVEX
DEFINE SERVER SERVER1
DEFINE PATH SERVER2 DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB2
DEVICE=xxx
DEFINE PATH SERVER1 DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB2
DEVICE=xxx
DEFINE SERVER STGAGENTA
DEFINE PATH STGAGENTA DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB2
DEVICE=yyy

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 41

 From SERVER3:
DEFINE LIB3 LIBTYPE=ACSLS
-> (that is, SERVER3 setup for communication with ACSLS Server3)
DEFINE DRIVE LIB3 DRIVEX
DEFINE SERVER SERVER1
DEFINE PATH SERVER3 DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB3
DEVICE=xxx
DEFINE PATH SERVER1 DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB3
DEVICE=xxx
DEFINE SERVER STGAGENTB
DEFINE PATH STGAGENTB DRIVEX SRCTYPE=SERVER DESTT=DRIVE LIBRARY=LIB3
DEVICE=yyy

Note: Device classes on SERVER1 must exist on SERVER2 and SERVER3

and be policy configured to direct NODEA / STGAGENTA to LIB2, etc.

3.4.2 Activity log management

The activity log can now be managed based either on maximum size for the log
or retention time. The new option for size-based activity log management gives
administrators greater control over the amount of space the activity log occupies.

Additional information about the activity log is now displayed when the server
status is queried as shown in Example 3-1.

Example 3-1 Additional information now displayed with QUERY STATUS

tsm: POLONIUM1>q stat
Storage Management Server for Windows - Version 5, Release 3, Level 0.0

Server Name: POLONIUM1

Server host name or IP address: polonium.almaden.ibm.com
Server TCP/IP port number: 1500
.
.
.
Activity Log Retention: 60 Day(s)
Activity Log Number of Records: 6970
Activity Log Size: <1 M
.
.
.

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

42 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 See the following changed commands:
QUERY STATUS
SET ACTLOGRETENTION

3.4.3 Check-in and check-out enhancements

These enhancements are common to all platforms except z/OS.

The amount of user intervention required for check-in and check-out functions
has been reduced.

See the Administrator’s Guide and Administrator’s Reference for more

information.

See the following changed commands:

CHECKIN LIBVOLUME
CHECKOUT LIBVOLUME
LABEL LIBVOLUME
MOVE DRMEDIA
MOVE MEDIA

Note: A REPLY command is no longer required if you specify a wait time of

zero using the optional WAITTIME parameter on the CHECKIN LIBVOLUME or
LABEL LIBVOLUME command. The default wait time is 60 minutes. See
Example 3-2 for a command line example.

Example 3-2 Labeling and check-in of tapes without a reply by using WAITTIME=0
LABEL libvol TSMLIB01 search=BULK labelsource=barcode overwrite=NO
checkin=SCRATCH WAITTIME=0

In the Administration Center, when adding volumes, the WAITTIME parameter is

the value provided in the Advanced Options window for If a volume is not
mounted within this amount of time, cancel the mount request in[0] Minutes as
shown in Figure 3-2.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 43

 Figure 3-2 Administration Center check-in options - WAITTIME

Note: For the commands, CHECKOUT LIBVOLUME, MOVE DRMEDIA, and MOVE
MEDIA, the new default value of the REMOVE option is now REMOVE=BULK,
which means that a REPLY is not requested. Additionally, the server waits for
a port to be made available if it is full (Example 3-3).

Example 3-3 Check-out of tapes without a reply by using REMOVE=BULK

CHECKOut LIBVolume tsmlib01 ABA920L1 REMove=Bulk CHECKLabel=No

In the Administration Center, when checking out volumes, the REMOVE=BULK

option is “YES, and move volume to bulk input-output station (requires operator
reply)” value provided for the “Eject volume” on the last window, Checkout
Option, as shown in Figure 3-3.

Be advised that, despite this statement, it does NOT require an operator reply!
The REMOVE=YES option is equivalent to “YES”, and this requires an operator
reply !

This information is based on the GA Version of IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3
and may be corrected when this book is published.

Figure 3-3 Administration Console Checkout Options - Remove No/Yes/to bulk

44 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

3.4.4 Collocation by group
Collocation by group is now supported. Groups of nodes can be defined, and the
server can then collocate data based on these groups. Collocation by group can
yield the following benefits:
򐂰 Reduce unused tape capacity by allowing more collocated data on individual
tapes.
򐂰 Minimize mounts of target volumes.
򐂰 Minimize database scanning and reduce tape passes for
sequential-to-sequential transfer.

Note: For newly defined storage pools, the default storage pool collocation
setting is now GROUP.

Attention: If you specify COLLOCATE=GROUP (which now is the default)

but do not define any groups, or you define a group but do not add nodes to
the group, data is collocated by node!

So, if collocation is not desired, then set COLLOCATE=NO, which previously

has been the default.

Note: During collocation processing the message ANR1142I will be replaced

with ANR1176I.

Figure 3-4 illustrates collocation by group for client nodes. Three groups have
been defined, and the data for each group is stored on separate volumes.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 45

 .

Figure 3-4 Example of collocation by group enabled

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information, specifically “Keeping a

Client’s Files Together: Collocation“.

Some typical Collocation Groups are illustrated in Figure 3-5.

Definegroupsof nodeswhose GroupA: GroupB:

NodeTED NodeBOB
datawill becollocatedtogether
NodeSUE NodeJOE
onsequential media NodeMARY NodeANN

GroupA A GroupA
A
BOB JOE
SUE
MARY TED GroupB B GroupB
ANN B
Migration Reclamation
Figure 3-5 Group of nodes on sequential media

Benefits of Collocation Groups

The benefits of Collocation Groups are listed below:
򐂰 Collocation of small nodes without requiring that a tape and library slot be
dedicated to each node

46 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

򐂰 Optimal recovery:
– Efficient collocation of small nodes
– Possible increased efficiency for multi-session restore by spreading data
for a node over multiple volumes
– Possible collocation of copy storage pools for offsite storage
򐂰 Improved efficiency for internal data-transfer operations by transferring all
nodes in the group together:
– Minimizes mounts of target volumes
– For sequential-to-sequential transfer (such as reclamation), minimizes
database scanning and reduces tape passes

See the following new commands:

DEFINE COLLOCGROUP
DEFINE COLLOCMEMBER
DELETE COLLOCGROUP
DELETE COLLOCMEMBER
QUERY COLLOCGROUP
QUERY NODEDATA
UPDATE COLLOCGROUP

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE STGPOOL
MOVE NODEDATA
QUERY NODE
QUERY STGPOOL
REMOVE NODE
UPDATE STGPOOL

Examples of the new commands

Next we show some examples of the following new commands:
DEFINE COLLOCGROUP in Example 3-4, DEFINE COLLOCGROUP in Example 3-5,
QUERY COLLOCGROUP in Example 3-6; and QUERY NODEDATA in Example 3-7.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 47

 DEFINE COLLOCGROUP
Example 3-4 DEFINE COLLOCGROUP
tsm: POLONIUM1>DEF COLLOCG cg_example DESC="Example collocation group"
ANR4871I Collocation group EXAMPLE defined.

DEFINE COLLOCMEMBER
Example 3-5 DEFINE COLLOCMEMBER
tsm: POLONIUM1>q node
Node Name Platform Policy DomainDays Since Days Since Locked?
Name Last Acce- Password
ss Set
------------------------- -------- -------------- ---------- ---------- -------
CRETE AIX DOM_ITSO_UNIX <1 <1 No
CRETE1 AIX DOM_ITSO_UNIX <1 <1 No

tsm: POLONIUM1>DEF COLLOCM cg_example crete,crete1

ANR4883I Node CRETE associated to collocation group CG_EXAMPLE.
ANR4883I Node CRETE1 associated to collocation group CG_EXAMPLE.
ANR4878I DEFINE COLLOCMEMBER: 2 members defined in the collocation group
CG_EXAMPLE.

QUERY COLLOCGROUP
Example 3-6 QUERY COLLOCGROUP
tsm: POLONIUM1>q collocg
Collocation Group Name Collocation Group Description
-------------------------- ------------------------------
CG_EXAMPLE Example collocation group

QUERY NODEDATA
Example 3-7 QUERY NODEDATA
tsm: POLONIUM1>Q NODED COLLOCG=cg_example
Node Name Volume Name Storage Pool Physical
Name Space
Occupied
(MB)
---------------- ------------------------------ ---------------- --------
CRETE ABA922L1 BACKUPLTO 1,609.32
CRETE1 ABA922L1 BACKUPLTO 61.57

Note: QUERY NODEDATA lists only those collocation group members that already
have data backed up.

48 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 QUERY NODE crete F=D displays all the node information for each node, including
“Collocation Group Name: CG_EXAMPLE“, so in order to obtain a list of nodes
along with the collocation group name that they are a member of, you can use a
select statement as shown in the example in Example 3-8. (The node CRETE2
has previously been added as a member to the collocation group using DEFINE
COLLOCMEMBER and does not show up with QUERY NODEDATA because data has not
been backed up yet).

Example 3-8 SELECT statement for listing node name and collocation group name
tsm: POLONIUM1>select node_name,COLLOCGROUP_NAME from nodes
NODE_NAME COLLOCGROUP_NAME
------------------ ------------------
CRETE CG_EXAMPLE
CRETE1 CG_EXAMPLE
CRETE2 CG_EXAMPLE
POLONIUM

Table 3-1 lists the dependencies between collocation groups and storage pool
collocation.

Table 3-1 Dependencies of collocation groups and storage pool collocation

Storage pool collocation Node not defined in a Node defined in a

attributes collocation group collocation group

NO No collocation No collocation

GROUP Collocation by node Collocation by group of

nodes

NODE Collocation by node Collocation by node

FILESPACE Collocation by file space Collocation by file space

3.4.5 Database reorganization

Periodically reorganizing the server’s database can improve performance. A new
command has been added that allows administrators to determine the estimated
space saved by reorganization of the database. The process can be queried to
monitor the command’s progress and, when finished, the results can be viewed
by querying the database in detailed format as shown in Example 3-9.

Example 3-9 ESTIMATE DBREORGSTATS and detailed query of database

tsm: POLONIUM1>ESTIMATE DBREORGSTATS
ANS8003I Process number 9 started.

tsm: POLONIUM1>q db f=d

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 49

 Available Space (MB): 1,024
Assigned Capacity (MB): 1,024
Maximum Extension (MB): 0
Maximum Reduction (MB): 940
Page Size (bytes): 4,096
Total Usable Pages: 262,144
Used Pages: 16,245
Pct Util: 6.2
Max. Pct Util: 8.1
Physical Volumes: 1
Buffer Pool Pages: 65,536
Total Buffer Requests: 419
Cache Hit Pct.: 100.00
Cache Wait Pct.: 0.00
Backup in Progress?: No
Type of Backup In Progress:
Incrementals Since Last Full: 1
Changed Since Last Backup (MB): 41.25
Percentage Changed: 65.00
Last Complete Backup Date/Time: 12/03/2004 14:19:30
Estimate of Recoverable Space (MB): 12
Last Estimate of Recoverable Space (MB): 12/09/2004 10:56:48

These two lines from the above example provide the details concerning
recoverable database space by reorganizing:

Estimate of Recoverable Space (MB): 12

Last Estimate of Recoverable Space (MB): 12/09/2004 10:56:48

See the following new command:

ESTIMATE DBREORGSTATS

See the following changed commands:

CANCEL PROCESS
QUERY DB
QUERY PROCESS

See Chapter 19, “Managing the Database and Recovery Log,” on page 469 of
the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

3.4.6 Disk only backup

This is common to all platforms except z/OS.

50 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Disk-only backup has been enhanced in order to take advantage of the
inexpensive disk storage currently available on the market. These improvements
to sequential-access FILE device type and random-access DISK device class
storage include:
򐂰 The ability to create large, sequential-access FILE-type storage pools using a
single FILE device-class definition that specifies two or more directories.
򐂰 The ability to create and format FILE device type or DISK device type
volumes in a single step.
򐂰 The ability to use enhanced space trigger functionality to automatically
allocate space for private volumes in sequential-access FILE device type and
random-access DISK device class storage pools. This will reduce the
potential for disk fragmentation and maintenance overhead.

Note: There have also been improvements in the reclamation processes

allowing for better utilization of available FILE volumes (see 3.4.7,
“Enhancements for server migration and reclamation processes” on page 52).

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE DBCOPY
DEFINE DEVCLASS—FILE
DEFINE LOGCOPY
DEFINE PATH—when the destination is a drive
DEFINE SPACETRIGGER
DEFINE VOLUME
UPDATE DEVCLASS—FILE
UPDATE PATH—when the destination is a drive

The DEFINE DBCOPY and DEFINE LOGCOPY now optionally offer to format the
volumes in one operation. Previously it was only possible to format the volumes
via the DSMFMT command.

Among several other new or changed options for the DEFINE DEVCLASS -- FILE
command, one is the DIRECTORY option, which now offers to define several
directories for the files used in this device class. Since the files are created as
needed, they are created in the directories defined.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 51

 Table 3-3 gives you an overview of the characteristics on usage of
sequential-access FILE device type in comparison to random-access DISK
device class storage pools.

Table 3-2 Random vs. sequential access DISK/FILE device class storage pools
Random-access Sequential-access

Space allocation/tracking Random 4KB blocks Sequential within file volume

Tivoli Storage Manager Optional (backup overhead) Not supported

caching

Space recovery (no cache) When file is deleted/moved When volume is reclaimed

Recovery of cache space When space is needed Not applicable

Aggregate reconstruction Not supported During volume reclamation

Concurrent volume access Yes Not supported

Multi-session client restore One session for all volumes One session per volume

Target for LAN-free backup Not supported Yes, via SANergy®

Can be used for copy pools No Yes

Migration/stg pool backup By node and file space By volume

Parallel migration processes Yes Yes (beginning in 5.3)

Storage pool backup Must check every file Optimized for efficiency

Pools can span file systems Yes Yes (beginning in 5.3)

Database regression Must audit all volumes Reuse delay avoids audit

3.4.7 Enhancements for server migration and reclamation processes

Administrators can now control and schedule routine server operations by
scheduling the migration or reclamation command to run during convenient
server activity times. The number of processes for migration and reclamation is
also enhanced to allow multiple processes for the operations. These new
features allow for better utilization of available tape drives and FILE volumes.

See the following new commands:

MIGRATE STGPOOL
RECLAIM STGPOOL

52 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 See the changed commands:
DEFINE STGPOOL
QUERY STGPOOL
UPDATE STGPOOL

See “Managing Storage Pools and Volumes” in the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Administrator’s Guide for more information.

Next we show the command syntax for MIGRATE STGPOOL, in Example 3-10, and
RECLAIM STGPOOL, in Example 3-11.

MIGRATE STGPOOL
Example 3-10 MIGRATE STGPOOL
MIGrate STGpool backuppool LOwmig=0 DUration=30

The MIGRATE STGPOOL command will ignore the value of the HIGHMIG
parameter of the storage pool definition. Migration will occur regardless of the
value of the HIGHMIG parameter.

Note: The LOWMIG threshold must be lower than the percentage of the
amount of data currently in the storage pool when using the MIGRATE STGPOOL
command, otherwise migration will not be started.

RECLAIM STGPOOL
Example 3-11 RECLAIM STGPOOL
RECLaim STGpool backuplto THreshold=55 DUration=30

3.4.8 IBM 3592 WORM support

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager now supports the 3592 WORM tape device.

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE DEVCLASS—3592
DEFINE LIBRARY
UPDATE LIBRARY

See “Defining Device Classes” and “Managing Removable Media Operations” for
more information in the Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Reference
Guide.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 53

3.4.9 Improved defaults
Defaults for parameters on some commands and server options have been
improved to better match conditions in current user environments. If you have not
specified these options in the options file, new defaults will take effect
immediately. If you have specified some of these options, the value you have
already specified will be used and the default changes will have no effect.

See the following new server option:

ADMINONCLIENTPORT

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE DEVCLASS
DEFINE STGPOOL—Primary Sequential Access and Copy Sequential
Access MOVE DATA

See the following changed server options:

BUFPOOLSIZE
MOVEBATCHSIZE
MOVESIZETHRESH
TCPBUFSIZE
TCPWINDOWSIZE

See “Defining Device Classes” and “Managing Client Nodes” in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide, as well as the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager for Administrator’s Reference for more information.

Table 3-3 gives an overview of the changes to the Tivoli Storage Manager Server
defaults:

Table 3-3 Improved defaults (old/new values)

Option Old default New default Additional information

BUFPoolsize 2048 (KB) 32768 (KB)

MOVEBatchsize 40 (objects) 1000 (objects)

MOVESizethresh 500 (MB) 2048 (MB)

SELFTUNETXNsize NO N/A With the changes to MOVEB and MOVES

above, this option has been removed.
There is no ““invalid option”” message, and no
action based on the setting.

54 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Option Old default New default Additional information

TCPBufsize (AIX) 16 (KB) 32 (KB)

TCPWindowsize 63 (KB) 63KB does not require RFC1323 support to be

enabled (64 and up do) on either the client or
server.

TXNGroupmax 40 (objects) 256 (objects)

USELARGEBuffers YES N/A NO would not outperform YES, thus YES is

always set.

TCPNodelay NO (YES YES Since Tivoli Storage Manager already buffers its
for data, the extra buffer of the operating system is
stgagent) redundant.

AIXDIRECTIO YES N/A Turned on for all eligible disk volumes, and there
is no benefit in turning it off, so YES is always
set.

TCPADMINPORT 1500 value of

TCPPORT

ADMINONClientport N/A - new YES Defines whether or not the TCPPORT can be
option used by administrative sessions. If it is set to NO
and the TCPADMINPORT value is different than
the TCPPORT value, then administrative
sessions cannot use the TCPPORT. If is set to
YES, or the TCPPORT and TCPADMINPORT
are the same (the default), then administrative
sessions can use the TCPPORT.

3.4.10 Validating a LAN-free environment configuration

Enhancements have been made to allow you to quickly determine if your
LAN-free environment has been configured correctly. You can request validation
for one client node and one Storage Agent. When validation is requested, a
detailed report is generated explaining why the storage pool is or is not LAN-free
capable. As a result, you can determine if there is a setting or configuration issue
on the server preventing LAN-free data movement, as shown in Example 3-12.

See the following new command:

VALIDATE LANFREE

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 55

 Example 3-12 Validating LAN-free configuration
tsm: POLONIUM1>validate lanfree crete sa_crete
ANR0387I Evaluating node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE for LAN-free data
movement.

Node Storage Operation Mgmt Class Destination LAN-Free Explanation

Name Agent Name Name capable?
----- -------- --------- ---------- ------------ --------- --------------------
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP MC_FS_LAN- BACKUPLANFR- Yes
FREE EE
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP STANDARD BACKUPPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE MC_FS_LAN- ARCHIVELANF- Yes
FREE REE
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE STANDARD ARCHIVEPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
ANR1706I Ping for server 'SA_CRETE' was able to establish a connection.
ANR0388I Node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE has 2 storage pools capable of
LAN-free data movement and 2 storage pools not capable of LAN-free data
movement.

The output will allow you to see which management class destinations for a
given operation type are not LAN-free capable, and provide a brief explanation
about why (as can be seen in Example 3-13, “Validating LAN-free Configuration -
explanation” on page 56). It will also report the total number of LAN-free
destinations. See the VALIDATE LANFREE command in the Administrator’s
Reference and “Validating your LAN-free Configuration” in the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.

In Example 3-13, the storage pool BACKUPLANFREE has been configured for
simultaneous write. Please notice the NO in the column “LAN-Free capable” and
the explanation provided. This is because, when the operation is using LAN-free
data movement, simultaneous write takes precedence over LAN-free operations,
causing the operations to go over the LAN (see the note in the option
COPYSTGpools section for the DEFINE STGpool command in the Administrator’s
Reference).

Example 3-13 Validating LAN-free Configuration - explanation

tsm: POLONIUM1>validate lanfree crete sa_crete
ANR0387I Evaluating node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE for LAN-free data
movement.

Node Storage Operation Mgmt Class Destination LAN-Free Explanation

Name Agent Name Name capable?
----- -------- --------- ---------- ------------ --------- --------------------
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP MC_FS_LAN- BACKUPLANFR- No Destination storage

56 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 FREE EE pool is configured
for simultaneous
write.
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP STANDARD BACKUPPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE MC_FS_LAN- ARCHIVELANF- Yes
FREE REE
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE STANDARD ARCHIVEPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
ANR1706I Ping for server 'SA_CRETE' was able to establish a connection.
ANR0388I Node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE has 1 storage pools capable of
LAN-free data movement and 3 storage pools not capable of LAN-free data
movement.

Note: This information also applies to the Storage Agent functionality as

mentioned in 11.4.1, “Validating a LAN-free environment configuration” on
page 103.

This new command replaces the unsupported command SHOW LANFREE,

which was introduced in Version 5.2.2 (see 11.3.2, “SHOW LANFREE
command” on page 100).

3.4.11 NDMP operations

This function is common to all platforms except z/OS.

NDMP operations for backup of NAS file servers have been enhanced to support
the following functions:
򐂰 Directory-level backup of NAS data, which enables the division of a file
system backup operation among several NDMP backup operations as well as
several tape drives. This enhancement will reduce backup and restore times.
򐂰 NDMP Directory Level Backup will enable Tivoli Storage Manager to back up
user created snapshots that are stored as sub-directories, specifically
Network Appliance snapshots.

See the following new commands:

DEFINE VIRTUALFSMAPPING
DELETE VIRTUALFSMAPPING
QUERY VIRTUALFSMAPPING
UPDATE VIRTUALFSMAPPING

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 57

 See the following changed commands:
BACKUP NODE
QUERY FILESPACE
REMOVE NODE
RENAME FILESPACE
RESTORE NODE

See “Using NDMP for Operations with NAS File Servers” in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.

3.4.12 Network Appliance SnapLock support

Servers with data retention protection enabled can now exploit the WORM file
protection of SnapLock Compliance and Enterprise editions offered by Network
Appliance. Volumes in storage pools defined with the parameter
RECLAMATIONTYPE=SNAPLOCK are protected in NetApp NearStore storage
systems from inadvertent or malicious deletion. The retention date for files stored
in these file systems is derived from the attributes of the Tivoli Storage Manager
Archive Copy Group.

See the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE COPYGROUP
DEFINE DEVCLASS
DEFINE SPACETRIGGER
DEFINE STGPOOL
DEFINE VOLUME
DELETE VOLUME
QUERY STGPOOL
QUERY VOLUME
UPDATE COPYGROUP
UPDATE DEVCLASS
UPDATE SPACETRIGGER

58 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

3.4.13 New interface to manage servers: Administration Center
The Administration Center is a Web-based interface that can be used to centrally
configure and manage IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 servers. This
new interface replaces the administrative Web interface. The Administration
Center is installed as an IBM Integrated Solutions Console component. The
Integrated Solutions Console allows you to install components provided by
multiple IBM applications, and access them.

It makes tasks easier by grouping previously separate tasks together to make a

process simpler such as adding hardware or creating new storage pools.

See the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Installation Guide for installation information
and “Managing Servers with the New Administration Center” in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide for more information.

Note: Chapter 23., “Administration Center” on page 187 of this redbook

provides further details of this new feature.

3.4.14 Server processing control with scripts

Administrators can automate routine server operations. In server scripts,
commands can now be processed in serial and parallel. This enables multiple
processes to run concurrently, which reduces data transfer time.

See the following new commands:

PARALLEL
SERIAL

See “Automating Server Operations” - “Running Commands in Parallel or

Serially” in the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide for more
details. Also, refer to the Administrator’s Reference for more information on the
PARALLEL and SERIAL script commands. Example 3-14 shows the usage in
server scripts.

Example 3-14 Usage of PARALLEL and SERIAL in server scripts

/*run multiple commands in parallel and wait for them to complete before
proceeding*/
PARALLEL
/*back up four storage pools simultaneously*/
BACKUP STGPOOL PRIMPOOL1 COPYPOOL1 WAIT=YES
BACKUP STGPOOL PRIMPOOL2 COPYPOOL2 WAIT=YES
BACKUP STGPOOL PRIMPOOL3 COPYPOOL3 WAIT=YES
BACKUP STGPOOL PRIMPOOL4 COPYPOOL4 WAIT=YES

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 59

 /*wait for all previous commands to finish*/
SERIAL
/*after the backups complete, migrate stgpools simultaneously*/
PARALLEL
MIGRATE STGPOOL PRIMPOOL1 DURATION=90 WAIT=YES
MIGRATE STGPOOL PRIMPOOL2 DURATION=90 WAIT=YES
MIGRATE STGPOOL PRIMPOOL3 DURATION=90 WAIT=YES
MIGRATE STGPOOL PRIMPOOL4 DURATION=90 WAIT=YES
/*wait for all previous commands to finish*/
SERIAL
/*after migration completes, relcaim storage pools simultaneously*/
PARALLEL
RECLAIM STGPOOL PRIMPOOL1 DURATION=120 WAIT=YES
RECLAIM STGPOOL PRIMPOOL2 DURATION=120 WAIT=YES
RECLAIM STGPOOL PRIMPOOL3 DURATION=120 WAIT=YES
RECLAIM STGPOOL PRIMPOOL4 DURATION=120 WAIT=YES

3.4.15 Multiple Tivoli Storage Manager client nodes

Backup from multiple nodes to be stored as a single target node in the server
database is now allowed. With the consolidation of data under a single target
node on the server, directories and files can be easily found when restore
operations are necessary. It is also no longer necessary for physical machines to
share password files, because password management and Tivoli Storage
Manager server authentication is now handled by clients (independent of
relationships with other nodes).

See “Consolidating Multiple Clients under a Single Client Node Name” in the
UNIX Administrator’s Guide for more information (with an example in the section
“Shared Access Sample Configuration”).

Also see 19.4.1, “Client node proxy support [option: Asnodename]” on page 162
in this book. More details on this can be found in Appendix A, “Hints and tips”
under “Comparison of options virtualnodename/fromnode/asnodename” on
page 320.

Note: Although Windows has the capability to do this, UNIX is the only
practical environment where this function would likely be used.

See the following new commands:

GRANT PROXYNODE
REVOKE PROXYNODE
QUERY PROXYNODE

60 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 See the following changed commands:
QUERY NODE
QUERY STATUS

3.4.16 Tivoli Storage Manager scheduling flexibility

Tivoli Storage Manager schedule capability now allows for more useful
calendar-type administrative and client scheduling. There is now the flexibility to
schedule most repetitive items and even some holidays, such as:
򐂰 Run on the last Friday of every month.
򐂰 Run on the first Sunday of every quarter.
򐂰 Run on every day in the last week of year.

Here is the syntax for the advanced Scheduling command:

DEFine SCHedule schedule_name Type=Administrative SCHEDStyle=Enhanced

– MONth=ANY|JAn,Feb,…Dec
– WEEKofmonth = ANY|FIrst,Second,Third,FOurth,Last
– DAYOFMonth=ANY|Day(-31 to 31)
– DAYofweek=ANY|WEEKDay,WEEKEnd,SUnday,Monday,TUesday,Wednesday,THurs
day,Friday,SAturday

Here is an example of how to create an enhanced schedule to run on the

Wednesday and Saturday of every week.
1. In the Administration Center, open Policy Domains and Client Nodes and
click the appropriate server.
2. Click the Domain Name to display the Standard Properties and expand the
Client Node Schedules portlet.
3. Select Create a Schedule... from the drop down list
4. The Create a Schedule wizard will then start as shown in Figure 3-6. Click
Next to continue.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 61

 Figure 3-6 Advanced Schedule - Start Wizard

5. Once you have entered the Schedule name and description enter the file
types and any client options as shown in Figure 3-7. Click Next to continue.

Figure 3-7 Advanced Schedule - Select Archive Options

62 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

6. Figure 3-8 illustrates the Select Repetition options. Click Next to advance to
the next step in the process.

Figure 3-8 Advanced Schedule - Repetition Options

7. Once the repetition options have been chosen, you can then go on to the
Repeat the Schedule element of the wizard as shown in Figure 3-9. Note that
you can choose which weeks or months, thus creating a complex granularity
to your schedules which was previously not possible.

Figure 3-9 Advanced Schedule - Repeat the Schedule

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 63

 8. Next enter the Schedule priority, Schedule Expiration date if applicable
and a time limit if necessary, as shown in Figure 3-10. Click Next to proceed
to the next step.

Figure 3-10 Advanced Schedule - Advanced Schedule Options

9. You will then move on the final step, associating nodes with the Schedule as
Figure 3-11 shows. Select the nodes on the Associate Client Nodes page
by clicking the check boxes, click Next, and the wizard is completed

64 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 3-11 Advanced Schedule - Associate Nodes

10.You should be presented with the Summary window shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Advanced Schedule - Summary

11.Clicking Finish closes the completed wizard.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 65

 Another example is shown in Figure 3-13, where an incremental backup is
scheduled to run every first and third Tuesday of the month for one hour. In this
example we illustrate the entries shown in the Activity log and the page in the
Wizard used to create the schedule.

Figure 3-13 First and third Tuesday schedule

Example 3-15 shows the activity log output from the previous wizard.

Example 3-15 Entry in activity log of newly created enhanced schedule

tsm: POLONIUM1>q act s=firstand
Date/Time Message
-------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------
11/24/2004 16:02:11 ANR2017I Administrator ADMIN issued command: DEFINE
SCHEDULE STANDARD firstandthirdtuesday ACTION=INCREMENTAL
DESCRIPTION="First and third Tuesday of every month"
TYPE=CLIENT SCHEDSTYLE=ENHANCED STARTDATE=11/24/2004
STARTTIME=15:54:40 DAYOFWEEK=TUESDAY
WEEKOFMONTH=FIRST,THIRD PRIORITY=5 DURATION=1
DURUNITS=hours (SESSION: 1635)

66 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Example 3-16 shows the same schedule listed using the Format=Detailed
option.

Example 3-16 Detailed display of newly created enhanced schedule

tsm: POLONIUM1>q sched * FIRSTANDTHIRDTUESDAY f=d

Policy Domain Name: STANDARD

Schedule Name: FIRSTANDTHIRDTUESDAY
Description: First and third Tuesday of every month
Action: Incremental
Options:
Objects:
Priority: 5
Start Date/Time: 11/24/2004 15:54:40
Duration: 1 Hour(s)
Schedule Style: Enhanced
Period:
Day of Week: Tue
Month: Any
Day of Month: Any
Week of Month: First,Third
Expiration:
Last Update by (administrator): ADMIN
Last Update Date/Time: 11/24/2004 16:02:11
Managing profile:

See the Administrator’s Guide and Administrator’s Reference for more

information.

See the following changed commands:

DEFINE SCHEDULE
QUERY EVENT
QUERY SCHEDULE
UPDATE SCHEDULE

3.4.17 Licensing
Licensing in the Version 5.3.0 server has changed from previous versions.
Before upgrading from a previous version, delete or rename the nodelock file (for
all operating systems except z/OS) or remove existing LICENSE options from
the server's option file (z/OS). After installing the Version 5.3.0 server, you must
register new licenses.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 67

 The REGISTER LICENSE command has changed with this version, and its
function is currently limited:
򐂰 You can register licenses for server components. This includes Tivoli Storage
Manager (base), Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition, and Tivoli Data
Retention Protection.
򐂰 You cannot register licenses for components that are licensed on the basis of
processors (for example, Tivoli Storage Manager for Mail, Tivoli Storage
Manager for Databases, Tivoli Storage Manager for ERP, Tivoli Storage
Manager for Hardware, Tivoli Storage Manager for Space Management).

Your license agreement determines what you are licensed to use, even if you
cannot use the REGISTER LICENSE command to register all components. You
are expected to comply with the license agreement and use only what you have
purchased. Use of the REGISTER LICENSE command implies that you agree to
and accept the license terms specified in your license agreement.

Syntax (for all operating systems except z/OS)

This is the syntax for the REGISTER LICENSE command:
REGister LICense FILE=<license_file>

The following parameters apply:

򐂰 FILE - Specifies the name of the enrollment certificate file containing the
license to be registered. The specification can contain a wildcard (*). Enter
the complete file name or a wildcard in place of the file name.

Note: The file names are case-sensitive.

To register additional clients, specify the names of the following enrollment

certificate files:
򐂰 tsmbasic.lic — To license base IBM Tivoli Storage Manager.
򐂰 tsmee.lic — To license base IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition.
This includes the Disaster Recovery Manager, large libraries, and NDMP.
򐂰 dataret.lic — To license IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention. This
is required to enable Data |Retention Protection as well as Expiration and
Deletion Suspension (Deletion Hold).

68 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Examples (for all operating systems except z/OS)
Now we provide a few examples:

Task: Register Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition

Command:
register license file=tsmee.lic

Task: Register all license files using a wildcard.

Command:
register license file=*.lic

Syntax (for z/OS)

This is the syntax for the REGISTER LICENSE command for z/OS
REGister LICense <license_keyword>

Note: The REGISTER LICENSE command adds a LICENSE statement to the

end of the server options file if it completes successfully. To use this
command, ensure that the options file as specified in the server startup JCL
(OPT DD statement) is coded with a DISP=MOD parameter, and not
DISP=SHR.

The following parameters apply:

򐂰 BASICEDITION — To license base IBM Tivoli Storage Manager.
򐂰 EXTENDEDEDITION — To license base IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Extended Edition. This includes the Disaster Recovery Manager and large
libraries.
򐂰 DATARETENTION — To license IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Data
Retention for z/OS. This is required to enable Data Retention Protection as
well as Expiration and Deletion Suspension (Deletion Hold).

Examples (for z/OS)

Now we provide a few examples:

Task: Register Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition

Command:
register license EXTENDEDEDITION

License registration on z/OS can also be done by editing the server options file.
See the Administrator’s Reference for information on how to edit the options file.
The only values allowed with the LICENSE parameter for Tivoli Storage Manager
5.3.0 are BASICEDITION, EXTENDEDEDITION, and DATARETENTION.

Chapter 3. Common server enhancements 69

70 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 4

Chapter 4. AIX specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the AIX
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3, “Common
server enhancements” on page 27.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 71

4.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no AIX specific changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
between 5.1 to 5.1.5.

4.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no AIX specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
version 5.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook.

4.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2 server for
this platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no AIX specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
version 5.2.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of
this redbook.

4.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

The following are the latest AIX specific enhancements to the IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager 5.3 server.

72 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

4.4.1 Accurate SAN device mapping
Device IDs within a SAN environment change when a reset or other
environmental changes occur. With accurate SAN device mapping, Tivoli
Storage Manager can now detect SAN changes and automatically make the
appropriate processing changes to the server definitions. If a device's path is
altered due to bus resets or other environmental changes to the SAN, Tivoli
Storage Manager will perform SAN discovery using the HBA API to find the
correct path to the desired target device. Manual updates to the path information
are no longer required.

See the following new command:

QUERY SAN

4.4.2 Storage agent and library sharing failover

Failover for an AIX HACMP™ environment has been updated to include failover
in a library sharing or storage agent environment. Tivoli Storage Manager can
determine which devices need to be reset on startup of the server or storage
agent. A target reset will then be performed on only those devices.

Chapter 4. AIX specific server enhancements 73

74 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 5

Chapter 5. HP-UX specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the HP-UX
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3, “Common
server enhancements” on page 27.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 75

5.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no HP-UX specific changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager between
the 5.1 and 5.1.5 versions.

5.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no HP-UX specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Version 5.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

5.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no HP-UX specific changes to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager at the
5.2.2 level. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

5.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

76 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

No changes in this version
There were no HP-UX specific changes to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager at the
5.3 level. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

Chapter 5. HP-UX specific server enhancements 77

78 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 6

Chapter 6. Linux specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the Linux
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3, “Common
server enhancements” on page 27.

Prior to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.1.5, Linux was not an officially supported
platform.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 79

6.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

Linux was introduced to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server family at this
level, so this is the first version that was supported for the Linux server platform.

6.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

Support for new Linux platforms was introduced at the 5.2 level of IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Server.

6.2.1 Linux for pSeries

The Tivoli Storage Manager server for Linux is now supported on pSeries®
hardware.

6.2.2 Linux for zSeries

The Tivoli Storage Manager server for Linux is now supported on zSeries®
hardware.

6.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

Aside from the common changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows
5.2.2, only one Linux-specific change applies to this version.

6.3.1 Disaster Recovery Manager

With this function you can prepare a disaster recovery plan to help you recover
your Tivoli Storage Manager servers, clients, and data in the case of a disaster.
You can also use the function to manage your offsite recovery media and
automate some recovery procedures.

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

80 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

See the following new commands:
DEFINE MACHINE
DEFINE MACHNODEASSOCIATION
DEFINE RECMEDMACHASSOCIATION
DEFINE RECOVERYMEDIA
DELETE MACHINE
SET DRMCHECKLABEL
SET DRMCMDFILENAME
SET DRMCOPYSTGPOOL
DELETE MACHNODEASSOCIATION
DELETE RECMEDMACHASSOCIATION
DELETE RECOVERYMEDIA
INSERT MACHINE
MOVE DRMEDIA
PREPARE
QUERY DRMEDIA
QUERY DRMSTATUS
QUERY MACHINE
QUERY RECOVERYMEDIA
QUERY RPFCONTENT
QUERY RPFILE
SET DRMCHECKLABEL
SET DRMCMDFILENAME
SET DRMCOPYSTGPOOL
SET DRMCOURIERNAME
SET DRMDBBACKUPEXPIREDAYS
SET DRMFILEPROCESS
SET DRMINSTRPREFIX
SET DRMNOTMOUNTABLENAME
SET DRMPLANPREFIX
SET DRMPLANVPOSTFIX
SET DRMPRIMSTGPOOL

Chapter 6. Linux specific server enhancements 81

 SET DRMRPFEXPIREDAYS
SET DRMVAULTNAME
SET LRECLRECOVERYFILE
UPDATE MACHINE
UPDATE RECOVERYMEDIA

6.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

There are only two changes specific to the Linux platform in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager 5.3 Server version, as described in the following subsections.

6.4.1 Accurate SAN device mapping

Device IDs within a SAN environment change when a reset or other
environmental changes occur. With accurate SAN device mapping, Tivoli
Storage Manager can now detect SAN changes and automatically make the
appropriate processing changes to the server definitions.

See the following new command:

QUERY SAN

6.4.2 Communications options

There is now a shared memory communications option between the Tivoli
Storage Manager server for Linux and the backup-archive client for Linux on the
same machine. It can be used to perform backups, archives, restores, and
retrieves. You can also enable the shared memory communication protocol in
the Linux storage agent for communication with the Linux backup-archive client.

Note: While using shared memory, if a message queue has to be created, but
the system limit for the maximum number of message queues (MSGMNI) will
be exceeded if a message queue is created, the following message will be
issued:
ANR9999D shmcomm.c(1598): ThreadId<39> Error from msgget (2), errno = 28

To find the maximum number of message queues allowed on your system, issue
the following command:
cat /proc/sys/kernel/msgmni

82 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

To increase the maximum number of message queues on your system, issue the
following command:
sysctl -w kernel.msgmni=n

Here, n is the maximum number of message queues (MSGMNI) you want to be

allowed by the system.

See the Administrator’s Reference for more information.

Chapter 6. Linux specific server enhancements 83

84 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 7

Chapter 7. Sun Solaris specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the Sun Solaris
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3, “Common
server enhancements” on page 27.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 85

7.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no Sun Solaris specific changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
between Version 5.1 and Version 5.1.5.

7.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no Sun Solaris specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Server Version 5.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27
of this redbook for further details.

7.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no Sun Solaris specific changes to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
server.

7.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

There is only one Sun Solaris specific change in the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
5.3.

86 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

7.4.1 Accurate SAN device mapping
Device IDs within a SAN environment change when a reset or other
environmental changes occur. With accurate SAN device mapping, Tivoli
Storage Manager can now detect SAN changes and automatically make the
appropriate processing changes to the server definitions.

See the following new command:

QUERY SAN

Chapter 7. Sun Solaris specific server enhancements 87

88 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 8

Chapter 8. OS/400 PASE specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the OS/400
PASE platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
client is available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3,
“Common server enhancements” on page 27.

Prior to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.1.5, OS/400 PASE was not an officially
supported platform.

Note: Support for OS/400 PASE has been discontinued with IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager 5.3.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 89

8.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
This is the first version that was supported for the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Server OS/400 PASE server platform.

No changes in this version

No changes over the previous version have been introduced, since this is the
first time OS/400 PASE has been a supported server platform.

8.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no OS/400 PASE specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Server Version 5.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27
of this redbook for further details.

8.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no OS/400 PASE specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Version 5.2.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of
this redbook for further details.

8.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

The only change in this version is the discontinuation of PASE support.

8.4.1 PASE support discontinued

PASE is no longer supported in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager at the 5.3 level. It is
suggested that iSeries Linux is the alternative.

90 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 9

Chapter 9. Windows specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the Windows
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3, “Common
server enhancements” on page 27.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 91

9.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no Windows specific changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
between Version 5.1 and Version 5.1.5.

9.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

Among the changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2, only two were Windows
platform specific.

9.2.1 Device driver for Windows Server 2003

A new device driver, TSMSCSI, is now supported for Windows Server 2003. The
driver is available as 32–bit and 64–bit.

9.2.2 IBM Device Driver for 3570, 3590, and IBM LTO devices

Important: If you currently use 3570, 3590, or IBM LTO devices, you will need
to install the IBMTape driver that supports your device. The Tivoli Storage
Manager Device Driver will no longer recognize these devices.

9.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

Only one change is Windows specific in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2.2.
See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27. for details of
further enhancements.

9.3.1 DVD support

Tivoli Storage Manager supports DVD library technology for the Plasmon D
Series DVD library using removable file device classes.

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

92 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 See the following changed commands:
DEFINE DEVCLASS
UPDATE DEVCLASS

9.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

There are two Windows specific changes in the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3
server.

9.4.1 Communications options

There is now a shared memory communications option between the Tivoli
Storage Manager server for Windows and the backup-archive client for
Windows. It can be used to perform backups, archives, restores, and retrieves.
You can also enable the shared memory communication protocol in the Windows
storage agent for communication with the Windows backup-archive client.

See the Administrator’s Guide for more information.

See the following changed server option:

COMMMETHOD

9.4.2 Increased block size for writing to tape

The maximum transfer length for all host bus adapters has increased. The block
size used by the Tivoli Storage Manager server on Windows for writing data to
certain types of tape drives has also increased. Increasing the transfer length
increases the rate at which data is processed for backups, archives, restores,
and retrieves. The maximum supported transfer length is now 256 KB.

Chapter 9. Windows specific server enhancements 93

94 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 10

Chapter 10. z/OS specific server

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the z/OS
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 3, “Common
server enhancements” on page 27.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 95

10.1 Changes in server Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no z/OS specific changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager between
Version 5.1 and Version 5.1.5.

10.2 Changes in server Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no z/OS specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Version 5.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

10.3 Changes in server Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

There were no z/OS specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Version 5.2.2. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of
this redbook for further details.

10.4 Changes in server Version 5.3

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server for this
platform. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

96 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

No changes in this version
There were no z/OS specific changes in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Version 5.3. See Chapter 3, “Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this
redbook for further details.

Chapter 10. z/OS specific server enhancements 97

98 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 11

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent

enhancements
This chapter discusses the new features and enhancements delivered in IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Storage Agent, which are common to all
platforms.

In this chapter we also provide information on major additions to IBM Tivoli

Storage Manager Storage Agent in Version 5.1.5/5.2/5.2.2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 99

11.1 Changes in Version 5.1.5
These are the common Storage Agent enhancements for this Version.

No common enhancements for Storage Agents

Changes from IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1 to 5.1.5 were limited to
Linux. These changes are documented in their respective Platform Specific
Chapters.

11.2 Changes in Version 5.2

The changes to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2 covered many areas across
many platforms. The most obvious is the change of library sharing and LAN-free
upgrade considerations. For additional information, see the corresponding
readme file and the corresponding platform specific chapter.

11.3 Changes in Version 5.2.2

There were several changes common to all IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2.2
Storage Agents.

11.3.1 TCPPORT, TCPADMINPORT, and defaults

The TCPADMINPORT is a new server option for Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2
which defaults to the value 1500. It does NOT default to the same value as the
TCPPORT option. If multiple servers are running on a system and one of those
servers is using a TCPPORT value of 1500 and if the TCPADMINPORT option is
not specified in all of the server option files, a conflict will occur on port 1500.
Only the first server to be brought up will be able to use this port. Other servers
will fail to communicate on port 1500.

Note: The default value has been changed in Version 5.3., see 18.4.5,
“Optimized option default values” on page 155.

11.3.2 SHOW LANFREE command

The command SHOW LANFREE is available from the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
server. The syntax for this command is:

SHOW LANFREE nodename stgagentname

100 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Here:
nodename is the name of a client node.
stgagentname is the name of a storage agent.

The query will evaluate the destination storage pools for the domain to which this
client node is assigned. The policy destinations are evaluated for BACKUP,
ARCHIVE, and SPACEMANAGED operations for this node.

When the query processing begins, the following message is issued:

ANR0387I Evaluating node FRED using storage agent STA1 for LAN-free
datamovement.

When the query processing completes, the following message is issued

summarizing the number of LAN-free and non-LAN-free destinations that were
found:
ANR0388I Node FRED using storage agent STA1 has 2 storage pools
capable of LAN-free data movement and 4 storage pools not capable of
LAN-free data movement.

The SHOW LANFREE command will display a table that reports whether or not a
destination storage pool for a management class, which this node can use, is
capable of LAN-free data movement.

See Example 11-1 showing the output of the SHOW LANFREE command.

Example 11-1 Output from the command SHOW LANFREE

Node Storage Operation Mgmt Class Destination LAN-Free Explanation
Name Agent Name Name capable?
----- -------- --------- ---------- ------------ --------- --------------------
NODE1 STA1 BACKUP NOLF OUTPOOL No No available online
paths.
NODE1 STA1 BACKUP NOLF_SW PRIMARY No Destination storage
pool is configured
for simultaneous
write.
NODE1 STA1 BACKUP STANDARD SHRPOOL Yes
NODE1 STA1 ARCHIVE NOLF OUTPOOL No No available online
paths.
NODE1 STA1 ARCHIVE NOLF_SW PRIMARY No Destination storage
pool is configured
for simultaneous
write.
NODE1 STA1 ARCHIVE STANDARD SHRPOOL Yes

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent enhancements 101

 A few other messages may also be issued. The first is:
ANR0387W Node NODE1 has data path restrictions.

This message is issued if this client node has its data read path or data write path
set such that it would prevent LAN-free data movement.

Also, if this command is issued from an administrative client, the server will also
try to contact the storage agent using the SERVER PING command. If it is
successfully able to contact the storage agent, the following message is
displayed:
ANR1706I Ping for server 'STA1' was able to establish a connection.

If the server did not successfully contact the storage agent, the following
message is displayed:
ANR1705W Ping for server 'STA1' was not able to establish a
connection.

Note: SHOW LANFREE has been superseded, in the latest version of IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager, by the command VALIDATE LANFREE as described
in 3.4.10, “Validating a LAN-free environment configuration” on page 55.

11.3.3 Storage Agent compatibility and support

The Tivoli Storage Manager support for storage agents has been modified. More
versions and levels are now compatible with each other than before. Previously,
version and level had to be identical.

For further information, see the relevant readme file.

11.3.4 Changed settings no longer require Storage Agent restart

In most cases, it is no longer necessary to halt and restart a LAN-free Storage
Agent to pick up changes in the Data Manager server.

Further details on this are available in Appendix A, “Hints and tips” in the
section, “Reasons for restarting a Storage Agent” on page 327.

11.4 Changes in Version 5.3

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3 has introduced many improvements, most of
which are common to all supported storage agent platforms. See the appropriate
storage agent specific chapter for details regarding a specific platform.

102 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

11.4.1 Validating a LAN-free environment configuration
The unsupported command SHOW LANFREE, which was introduced in Version
5.2.2 (see 11.3.2, “SHOW LANFREE command” on page 100), has changed into
the official command VALIDATE LANFREE.

For more information and an example of the VALIDATE LANFREE command,

also see 3.4.10, “Validating a LAN-free environment configuration” on page 55 in
this book.

11.4.2 Limitations when using LAN-free and simultaneous write

In the Administration Center, select the server you wish to work on from the
devices menu by marking the appropriate radio button. Select View storage
pools from the drop down menu and click Go.

Select the storage pool you wish to modify by clicking in the appropriate line and
select Modify Storage Pool... from the drop down menu.

Select Advanced Options from the Menu.

Define a copy storage pool by selecting it from the Copy storage pools for
simultaneous write drop downs as shown in Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1 Storage Pool properties Advanced Options

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent enhancements 103

 Check the result with the Admin command validate lanfree as shown in
Example 11-2.

Example 11-2 Validate lanfree with copystoragepool assigned to primary pool

tsm: POLONIUM1>validate lanfree crete sa_crete
ANR0387I Evaluating node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE for LAN-free data
movement.

Node Storage Operation Mgmt Class Destination

LAN-Free Explanation
Name Agent Name Name capable?
----- -------- --------- ---------- ------------
--------- --------------------
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP MC_FS_LAN- BACKUPLANFR-
No Destination storage
FREE EE pool is configured
for simultaneous
write.
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP STANDARD BACKUPPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE MC_FS_LAN- ARCHIVELANF- Yes
FREE REE
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE STANDARD ARCHIVEPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
ANR1705W Ping for server 'SA_CRETE' was not able to establish a connection.
ANR0388I Node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE has 1 storage pools capable of
LAN-free data movement and 3 storage pools not capable of LAN-free data
movement.

You are no longer able to perform a LAN-free backup or restore with the modified
storage pool because simultaneous write support takes precedence over
LAN-free support.

11.4.3 Multiple file system support for FILE device type

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server improvements to sequential-access FILE
device type and random-access DISK device class storage requires that the
storage agent be able to access newly created FILE volumes.

See the Installing and Configuring Tape-Library and File-Device Sharing

Environments chapter in the Storage Agent User’s Guide for detailed
information.

104 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

11.4.4 Multi-session no-query restore for LAN-free path
When performing a no-query restore, the Tivoli Storage Manager server builds a
list of files to restore and sends data to the client while continuing to build the list.
This allows the restore to be restarted if interrupted.

The location of the volume, and whether or not the storage agent can access the
volume, will determine how the data is handled. When the volume can be
mounted on a shared device that the storage agent can access, the data is read
from the volume by the storage agent and sent to the client. When the volume
cannot be mounted on a shared device that the storage agent can access, the
data is read from the volume by the server and sent directly to the client.

The client then begins additional sessions: some to the storage agent for the
volumes that are LAN-free enabled, and some sessions to the server for those
volumes that are not LAN-free enabled.

11.4.5 LANFREETCPServeraddress option

The LANFREETCPServeraddress is a new client option that specifies the TCP/IP
address for a IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent. Use this option when
you specify LANFREECommmethod=TCPIP for communication between the
Tivoli Storage Manager client and Storage Agent. Overriding the default for this
option is useful when configuring LAN-free in an environment where the client
and storage agent are running on different systems. You can obtain this Storage
Agent address from your administrator.

Supported Clients
This option is valid for all UNIX and Windows clients, except the 64-bit Windows
Server 2003.

Figure 11-2 shows the components and connections that we used in our test
environment.

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent enhancements 105

 Local Area Network

Server to Server
COMMmethod TCPIP
COMMmethod SHAREDMEM
TCPport 1600 Log
TCPADMINPort 1600
SHMPort 1610 Storage
dsmsta.opt Agent Database
Client CRETE
KATHY

ENABLElanfree yes Storage Area Server POLONIUM1

LANFREETCPServer CRETE
Client Network
LANFRECommmethod tcpip
CRETE1
LANFREETCPport 1600
ENABLELanfree yes
dsm.opt
LANFREECommmethod sharedmem
LANFREEShmport 1610

dsm.sys
Tape
Shared Storage

Figure 11-2 Components and connections in our LAN-free environment

In our Example, there are two Client Nodes, KATHY and CRETE, registered on
server POLONIUM1. The Storage Agent SA_CRETE is defined as a Server on
Server POLONIUM1. Tivoli Storage Manager Client Crete 1 and Storage Agent
SA_CRETE are running on the same system and are connected via Shared
Memory. Storage Agent SA_CRETE has a SAN connection to the tape drives.
The client CRETE can send its data LAN-free via the Storage Agent to the
attached tape drives.

There is no longer a requirement for the client node and the storage agent to run
on the same system. They can run on different systems, connected via LAN with
the storage agent acting as a remote storage agent for the node. In this case it is
possible for the node KATHY to send its data via LAN to the Storage Agent which
then sends the data via SAN to the storage device. The advantage of this setup
is that it is possible to balance the workload between server and storage agent.
Example 11-3 shows the options that we put in the options file dsm.sys of our
AIX client.

Example 11-3 Configuration of the client options file (dsm.sys) for CRETE1
ENABLELanfree yes
LANFREECommmethod sharedmem
LANFREEShmport 1610

106 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

To check the definitions, use the command validate lanfree as shown in
Example 11-4.

Example 11-4 Check the LAN-free configuration for Node CRETE

tsm: POLONIUM1>validate lanfree crete sa_crete
ANR0387I Evaluating node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE for LAN-free data
movement.

Node Storage Operation Mgmt Class Destination LAN-Free Explanation

Name Agent Name Name capable?
----- -------- --------- ---------- ------------ --------- --------------------
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP MC_FS_LAN- BACKUPLANFR- Yes
FREE EE
CRETE SA_CRETE BACKUP STANDARD BACKUPPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE MC_FS_LAN- ARCHIVELANF- Yes
FREE REE
CRETE SA_CRETE ARCHIVE STANDARD ARCHIVEPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
ANR1706I Ping for server 'SA_CRETE' was able to establish a connection.
ANR0388I Node CRETE using storage agent SA_CRETE has 2 storage pools capable of
LAN-free data movement and 2 storage pools not capable of LAN-free data
movement.

Example 11-5 shows how the LAN-free functionality has to be defined, if the
Node and Storage Agents are running on different systems.

Example 11-5 Configuration in Client options file for LANFREETCPServeraddress

ENABLELANFREE YES
lanfreecommmethod tcpip
lanfreetcpserver crete
lanfreetcpport 1600

Check the correct definitions again using validate lanfree as shown in

Example 11-6.

Example 11-6 Check the LAN-free configuration for Node KATHY

tsm: POLONIUM1>validate lanfree kathy sa_crete
ANR0387I Evaluating node KATHY using storage agent SA_CRETE for LAN-free data
movement.

Node Storage Operation Mgmt Class Destination LAN-Free Explanation

Name Agent Name Name capable?
----- -------- --------- ---------- ------------ --------- --------------------
KATHY SA_CRETE BACKUP MC_FS_LAN- BACKUPLANFR- Yes
FREE EE

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent enhancements 107

 KATHY SA_CRETE BACKUP STANDARD BACKUPPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
KATHY SA_CRETE ARCHIVE MC_FS_LAN- ARCHIVELANF- Yes
FREE REE
KATHY SA_CRETE ARCHIVE STANDARD ARCHIVEPOOL No Destination storage
pool is DISK.
ANR1706I Ping for server 'SA_CRETE' was able to establish a connection.
ANR0388I Node KATHY using storage agent SA_CRETE has 2 storage pools capable of
LAN-free data movement and 2 storage pools not capable of LAN-free data
movement.

This is the result of the backup operation of node CRETE and node KATHY. See
Example 11-7 for details.

Example 11-7 Storage Agent Console Log

ANR0900I Processing options file dsmsta.opt.
ANR4726I The ICC support module has been loaded.
ANR8200I TCP/IP driver ready for connection with clients on port 1600.
ANR8285I Shared Memory driver ready for connection with clients on port 1610
ANR0408I Session 2 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for event
logging.
ANR0408I Session 3 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for library
sharing.
ANR8920I Initialization and recovery has ended for shared library TSMLIB01.
ANR0993I Server initialization complete.
ANR0916I TIVOLI STORAGE MANAGER distributed by Tivoli is now ready for use.
TSM:SA_CRETE>
ANR0400I Session 9 started for node CRETE (AIX) (ShMem).
ANR0408I Session 10 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for storage
agent.
ANR0408I Session 11 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for library
sharing.
ANR0409I Session 11 ended for server POLONIUM1 (Windows).
ANR0408I Session 12 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for library
sharing.
ANR0409I Session 12 ended for server POLONIUM1 (Windows).
ANR8337I LTO volume ABA928L1 mounted in drive DRIVE01 (/dev/rmt0).
ANR0511I Session 9 opened output volume ABA928L1.
ANR0514I Session 9 closed volume ABA928L1.
AANR0403I Session 9 ended for node CRETE (AIX).
ANR0408I Session 17 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for library
sharing.
ANR8336I Verifying label of LTO volume ABA928L1 in drive DRIVE01 (/dev/rmt0).
ANR8468I LTO volume ABA928L1 dismounted from drive DRIVE01 (/dev/rmt0) in
library TSMLIB01.
ANR0409I Session 17 ended for server POLONIUM1 (Windows).

108 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

ANR0406I Session 39 started for node KATHY (WinNT) (Tcp/Ip 9.1.38.50(1924)).
ANR0408I Session 40 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for storage
agent.
ANR0408I Session 41 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for library
sharing.
ANR0409I Session 41 ended for server POLONIUM1 (Windows).
ANR8337I LTO volume ABA928L1 mounted in drive DRIVE01 (/dev/rmt0).
ANR0511I Session 39 opened output volume ABA928L1.
ANR0514I Session 39 closed volume ABA928L1.
ANR0409I Session 40 ended for server POLONIUM1 (Windows).
ANR0403I Session 39 ended for node KATHY (WinNT).
ANR0408I Session 49 started for server POLONIUM1 (Windows) (Tcp/Ip) for library
sharing.
ANR8336I Verifying label of LTO volume ABA928L1 in drive DRIVE01 (/dev/rmt0).
ANR8468I LTO volume ABA928L1 dismounted from drive DRIVE01 (/dev/rmt0) in
library TSMLIB01.
ANR0409I Session 49 ended for server POLONIUM1 (Windows).

As shown in the previous Example 11-7, the client CRETE starts a

communication session via shared memory with the storage agent (Session 9).
The client KATHY starts a communication session via TCP/IP with the storage
agent (Session 39). The storage agent establishes many communication
sessions with the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server for library sharing.

The data from KATHY was transmitted to the remote storage agent via LAN and
from the storage agent to a storage pool LAN-free.

Chapter 11. Common Storage Agent enhancements 109

110 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 12

Chapter 12. AIX specific Storage Agent

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the AIX platform
which have not been described in Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 111

12.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

12.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

12.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

12.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

112 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 13

Chapter 13. HP-UX specific Storage

Agent enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the HP-UX
platform which have not been described in Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 113

13.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

13.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2

No changes over the previous version have been introduced with this version of
the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent for HP-UX. See Chapter 3,
“Common server enhancements” on page 27 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

13.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

13.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

114 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 14

Chapter 14. Linux specific Storage

Agent enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the Linux
platform which have not been described in Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99.

Note: The Storage Agent 5.1 for Linux first became available October 2002.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 115

14.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

Linux was introduced to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent family at
this level, so this is the first version that was supported for the Linux Storage
Agent platform.

14.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2

Support for new Linux platforms was introduced at the 5.2 level of IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Storage Agent.

14.2.1 Linux for pSeries

The Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent for Linux is now supported on
pSeries® hardware.

14.2.2 Linux for zSeries

The Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent for Linux is now supported on
zSeries® hardware.

14.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2

No changes over the previous version have been introduced with this version of
the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent for Linux.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

14.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3

In addition to the extension of the supported Linux distributions, there is only the
new support of the Shared Memory communication method.

116 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

14.4.1 Supported Linux platforms and kernel dependencies

Note: When you are in a library sharing or LAN-free environment, Version 5.3
and above of the Tivoli Storage Manager Server and Storage Agent are not
backwards compatible with Version 5.2 and below of the Server and Storage
Agent. To ensure compatibility, upgrade all Servers and Storage Agents to
Version 5.3 in a library sharing or LAN-free environment.

For the correct Linux kernel levels supported by the corresponding device driver,
see the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Web site at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager.html

for Linux environments that are supported by the Tivoli Storage Manager device
driver, and for basic install packages. At this Web Site, under Other Resources,
select Linux, then under Linux Specific Notes®, select IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Supported Linux Kernels

Attention: For requirements, supported devices, client install packages, and

fixes, go to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Web site at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager.html

After you have installed IBM Tivoli Storage Manager and before you
customize it for your use, go to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Web site.
Download and apply any applicable fixes.

For a brief overview of the supported Linux distributions, see the Storage Agent
User’s Guide.

14.4.2 Communications options

There is now a shared memory communications option between the Tivoli
Storage Manager Storage Agent for Linux™ and the backup-archive client for
Linux. Shared Memory provides better performance than the TCP/IP protocol.
See the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 for SAN for Linux Storage Agent
User’s Guide, GC23-4693-03 for more information.

Chapter 14. Linux specific Storage Agent enhancements 117

118 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 15

Chapter 15. Sun Solaris specific Storage

Agent enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the SUN Solaris
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent is available, and which have not been described in Chapter 11, “Common
Storage Agent enhancements” on page 99.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 119

15.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

15.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

15.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

15.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3

No changes over the previous version have been introduced with this version of
the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent for Sun Solaris.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

120 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 16

Chapter 16. Windows specific Storage

Agent enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the Windows
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent is available, which have not been described in Chapter 11, “Common
Storage Agent enhancements” on page 99.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 121

16.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

16.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

16.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2.2

There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage
Agent for this platform. See Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent
enhancements” on page 99 of this redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified for this platform.

16.4 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3

Only one change is Windows specific in IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3. See
Chapter 11, “Common Storage Agent enhancements” on page 99 of this
redbook for further details.

16.4.1 Communications Options

Shared Memory provides better performance than the TCP/IP protocol when the
client and Storage Agent are running on the same system. See the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager V5.3 for SAN for Windows Storage Agent User’s Guide,
GC32-0785-03 for more information.

122 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 17

Chapter 17. z/OS specific Storage Agent

enhancements
Until Version 5.2 there was no specific solution for LAN-free support of clients for
an IBM Tivoli Storage Manager running on z/OS.

Compared with other operating systems, LAN-free data movement on the z/OS
platform is more complex because it requires an additional server and a slightly
different configuration. The complexity stems largely from the lack of drive
sharing between channel attached z/OS and SAN attached Open System
platforms.

In a typical LAN-free implementation with Windows and UNIX platforms, the IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager server acts as both the data manager and library
manager. In a z/OS LAN-free configuration the server cannot act as a library
manager because it does not currently implement library sharing support as it
exists on Windows and UNIX IBM Tivoli Storage Manager servers.

For z/OS LAN-free, you must install and configure a UNIX or Windows IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager server to act as a library manager for library sharing when
using an IBM 3494. If a Library Station controlled StorageTek library and related
drives are used, then an External Library configuration is required. External
Library support uses an External Library Manager (ELM) as provided by third
party vendors.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 123

17.1 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.1.5
The Storage Agent for z/OS was not available until Version 5.2 of IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager.

No changes in this version

This feature was not available in this version.

17.2 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.2

z/OS was introduced to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager function for LAN-free
data transfer as supported server platform. There are many differences in the
way LAN-free for z/OS works.

17.3 Changes in Storage Agent Version 5.3

With the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server Version 5.3, there are several
enhancements in the usage of shared Libraries and external library manager.

17.3.1 LAN-free details

This section covers the details for the LAN-free enhancements.

z/OS Shared Library support

Limitations: If the Primary Library Manager is unavailable when a Storage Agent
is loaded with Policy applicable to LAN-free, the Storage Agent will continue the
LAN-free storage operation until the Library Client function on the Storage Agent
attempts to contact the Library Manager at which point the client operation will
complete unsuccessfully. For successful LAN-free operational support, the
Library Manager nominated as the Primary Library Manager for the shared
library must be available and properly configured.

z/OS LAN-free Volume selection

Limitations: SCRATCH tape mounts are not supported in z/OS LAN-free
configurations.

For LAN-free volume selection to satisfy a Storage Agent request for a target
volume, the volume must have first been written to by the z/OS Version 5.2 Tivoli
Storage Manager server at least once. Once a volume entry has been recorded
in the z/OS Tivoli Storage Manager server database as a Version 5.2 z/OS
volume, the volume becomes eligible for LAN-free Storage Agent use.

124 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 When volumes transition from filled or filling to empty, the volume remains
eligible for LAN-free volume selection. It becomes imperative that volumes
destined for LAN-free storage requests be DEFINEd rather than allowing the
z/OS Tivoli Storage Manager server to allocate a SCRATCH volume when
populating a LAN-free storage pool.

DEFINEd volumes remain in the storage pool when emptied thus making the
volume a candidate for LAN-free volume acquisition.

Figure 17-1 shows how the components work together in a z/OS environment.

Figure 17-1 LAN-free data movement for z/OS

Chapter 17. z/OS specific Storage Agent enhancements 125

126 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 Part 3

Part 3 IBM Tivoli Storage

Manager client
enhancements
This part of the book describes common and specific client enhancements for
UNIX, Windows, Netware, and MAC OS X.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 127

128 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 18

Chapter 18. Common client

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the new features and enhancements
delivered in each of the platforms for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager client is available.

Platform specific enhancements are described in the following chapters.

Note: Please refer to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Backup-Archive Clients
Installation and User’s Guide for each supported client platform, for more
detailed information about the changes or new features.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 129

18.1 Changes in Version 5.1.5
The following changes for 5.1.5 have been introduced on the UNIX and Windows
platforms but not on Netware or Mac OS X.

18.1.1 New option to preserve last access date of files

For backup and archive operations, you can use the preservelastaccessdate
option to specify whether the client should reset the last access dates of backed
up or archived files to their original value. The default behavior is to not reset the
last access date.

Any application that accesses a file may implicitly cause that file’s last access
date to change to the time that the application accesses it. This is a function of
the file system, not the application. Because of this, when the client backs up or
archives a file, it may trigger an update to the file’s last access date. This can
cause problems for other applications such as Storage Resource Management
(SRM), whose processing relies on accurate last access dates.

Note: This option requires extra processing time during backup and archive
for each file that is sent to the Tivoli Storage Manager server, so it should only
be enabled when necessary.

18.1.2 Enhanced domain processing

Domain processing is enhanced to allow you to include and exclude items from
the domain. Previous versions of the Tivoli Storage Manager only allowed you to
include items in the domain.

Windows
The commands listed in Example 18-1 will each process all local drives except
for the C: drive and systemobject, systemstate, or systemservices domains.

Example 18-1 Some excludes from domain option in Windows

domain ALL-LOCAL -c: -systemobject
domain ALL-LOCAL -c: -systemstate
domain ALL-LOCAL -c: -systemservices

UNIX
Example 18-2 will process all local file systems except for the /home file system:

Example 18-2 Excludes from domain option in UNIX

domain ALL-LOCAL -/home

130 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

18.1.3 Globally unique identifier (GUID)
The globally unique identifier (GUID) associates a client node with a host system.
When you install the Tivoli software, the tivguid program is run to generate a
GUID which is stored in the Windows Registry on a Windows NT system and in
the /etc/tivoli directory on UNIX and Linux systems. The GUID for a client node
on the server can change if the host system machine is corrupted, if the Windows
Registry entry or in UNIX the file entry is lost, or if a user uses the same node
name from different host systems. You can perform the following functions from
the command line:
򐂰 Create a new GUID
򐂰 View the current GUID
򐂰 Write a specific value
򐂰 Create another GUID even if one exists.

The globally unique identifier can be displayed with the administrative command
query node f=dv as shown in Example 18-3.

Example 18-3 Output of the command query node

tsm: POLONIUM1>q node crete f=d

Node Name: CRETE

Platform: AIX
Client OS Level: 5.2
Client Version: Version 5, Release 3, Level 0.0
.
.
Globally Unique ID: ed.a0.a5.8c.3e.3a.11.d9.86.e4.08.63.09.01.27.bf
.
.

18.1.4 Enhanced query backup and query archive commands

If you use the detail option with the query archive or query backup commands,
the client displays the following additional information:
򐂰 Last modification date
򐂰 Last access

Next, Example 18-4 and Example 18-5 show lists of all files backed up or
archived, and using the detail option, they display the last modification date and
the last access date of each file.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 131

 Example 18-4 List backed up files with last modification and last access date
tsm> q backup -detail /opt/*
Size Backup Date Mgmt Class A/I File
---- ----------- ---------- --- ----
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/
Modified: 11/23/04 17:37:20 Accessed: 11/23/04 17:37:42
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/IBMinvscout
Modified: 06/23/04 10:37:11 Accessed: 06/23/04 10:37:11
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/Tivoli
Modified: 11/23/04 13:31:49 Accessed: 11/23/04 15:58:53
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/csm
Modified: 11/23/04 17:37:25 Accessed: 11/23/04 17:37:42
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/diagnostics
Modified: 07/07/04 18:30:20 Accessed: 07/07/04 18:30:20
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/freeware
Modified: 11/23/04 13:49:34 Accessed: 11/23/04 15:58:53
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/hsc
Modified: 11/23/04 17:37:20 Accessed: 11/23/04 17:37:20
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/lost+found
Modified: 11/23/04 13:30:16 Accessed: 11/23/04 15:58:53
512 B 11/24/04 09:11:37 MC_FS A /opt/pssp_to_csm
Modified: 07/07/04 18:31:02 Accessed: 07/07/04 18:31:02

Example 18-5 List archived files with last modification and last access date
tsm> q archive -detail /tmp/*
Size Archive Date - Time File - Expires on - Description
---- ------------------- -------------------------------
2,048 B 11/25/04 15:35:09 /tmp/ 11/25/05 archive before
installation of isc
Modified: 11/25/04 15:31:37 Accessed: 11/25/04 15:33:23
512 B 11/25/04 15:35:09 /tmp/.X11-unix 11/25/05 archive
before installation of isc
Modified: 11/25/04 09:30:46 Accessed: 11/25/04 15:33:23
512 B 11/25/04 15:35:09 /tmp/.oslevel.datafiles 11/25/05
archive before installation of isc
Modified: 11/25/04 14:20:58 Accessed: 11/25/04 15:33:23
512 B 11/25/04 15:35:09 /tmp/ISC_TEMP 11/25/05 archive
before installation of isc
Modified: 11/25/04 14:21:47 Accessed: 11/25/04 15:33:23
512 B 11/25/04 15:35:09 /tmp/aaah3y_ya 11/25/05 archive
before installation of isc
Modified: 11/24/04 08:23:03 Accessed: 11/25/04 15:33:24
512 B 11/25/04 15:35:09 /tmp/aaalbrzUa 11/25/05 archive
before installation of isc

132 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

18.2 Changes in Version 5.2
The following common changes for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2
Clients have been introduced.

18.2.1 Backing up files from one or more file spaces

You can use the backup group command to create and back up a group
containing a list of files from one or more file spaces to a virtual file space on the
Tivoli Storage Manager server. A group backup allows you to create a consistent
point-in-time backup of a group of files that are managed as a single logical
entity.
򐂰 All objects in the group are assigned to the same management class.
򐂰 Existing exclude statements for any files in the group are ignored.
򐂰 All objects in the group are exported together.
򐂰 All objects in the group are expired together as specified in the management
class. No objects in a group are expired until all other objects in the group are
expired, even when another group they belong to gets expired.
򐂰 If you are performing full and differential group backups to a sequential
device, during a restore the data will be in no more than two locations. To
optimize restore time, perform periodic full backups to back up the data to one
location on the sequential media.
򐂰 During a full group backup, all objects in the filelist are sent to the server.
During a differential group backup, only data that has changed since the last
full backup is sent to the server. Objects in the filelist that have not changed
since the last full backup are assigned as members of the differential group
backup. This data is not resent to the server, reducing backup time.

Tip: Using the filelist does not allow for wildcards. You can ease the pain of
defining a filelist by creating it in Windows, for example, by using the dir
command:

dir c:\lotus /B /S > c:\temp\dsmfilelist.txt

One scenario, where group backups can be used, is backing up several

directories and/or filesystems that have dependencies and need to be restored in
a consistent state. This could be necessary for an application with data and
configuration files that need to be in a consistent state.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 133

 Another example, useful for creating group backups, is using a filelist in
conjunction with a backup set. By using a filelist and limiting the backup to only
the files really needed, a compact backup set can be created that is small
enough to fit on a single CD or DVD.

Table 18-1 compares differential and incremental backup grouping differences.

Table 18-1 Overview of backup grouping differences

Differential backup/restore Incremental backup/restore

Full and Differential are separate object Not applicable.

types that can be queried and restored.

Query group, and restore with the –pick Query file and restore with the –pick
option, will show multiple active entries option, will show a single active instance
(FULL and DIFF) because the two object of a file.
types are independent; one does not
expire the other.

All changes since the last full backup are Just changes since the last full OR
added to the differential. incremental backup are sent.

Unchanged files are assigned to the

differential.

Just the volumes containing the last full All the volumes containing the last full
backup and the last differential backup are backup and all subsequent incremental
needed for a full restore. backups are needed for a full restore.

Commands used to manage a backup group

The following commands can be used:
򐂰 QUERY GROUP
򐂰 DELETE GROUP
򐂰 RESTORE GROUP
򐂰 QUERY FILESPACE

Note: If any file in the group backup fails, the entire group backup will fail.

18.2.2 External snapshot provider support

Use the snapshotroot option with the incremental, selective, or archive
commands in conjunction with a third-party application that provides a snapshot
of a logical volume, to associate the data on the local snapshot with the real file
space data that is stored on the Tivoli Storage Manager server. The
snapshotroot option does not provide any facilities to take a volume snapshot,
only to manage data created by a volume snapshot.

134 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

18.2.3 Enhancements to the Web client interface
The following functions are now supported in the Tivoli Storage Manager Web
client interface:
Access Another Node Displays the backup versions and archive copies of
another node. You can then restore the backup
versions or retrieve the archives from the other user
to your workstation. You must have authorization to
access the stored data of another node.
Node Access List Allows you to authorize other users to access your
backup versions and archive copies.
View Policy Information Displays storage management policy information for
your node.

Tip: Examples of the use of Access Another Node and Node Access List are
shown in Appendix A, “Hints and tips”, in the section “Perform a restore of
another node on your own client” on page 333 of this book.

View Policy Information

In order to view the policy information of the current node, select Utilities →
View Policy Information from the Web client interface, which then displays the
policy information as shown Figure 18-1.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 135

 Figure 18-1 Viewing Policy Information

18.2.4 Enhanced firewall security

Security for backup and restore operations and Tivoli Storage Manager
administrative functions is enhanced to allow the Tivoli Storage Manager server
to control whether the server or client initiates sessions through a firewall.
Use the sessioninitiation option to control whether the server or client initiates
sessions through a firewall. The default is that the client initiates sessions. You
can use this option with the schedule command.

Both the server and client can specify a separate TCP/IP port number which the
server can poll for requests for administrative client sessions, allowing secure
administrative sessions within a private network. Use the tcpadminport option to
achieve this.

Note: The tcpadminport defaults to port 1500.

Starting with Version 5.3, if this option is not specified, the default value is the
value of the tcpport option (see 18.4.5, “Optimized option default values” on
page 155).

136 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

18.2.5 Displaying options and settings via the command line
Use the QUERY OPTIONS command to display all or part of your options and their
current settings. This command accepts an argument to specify a subset of
options. The default is to display all options, as shown in Example 18-6.

Example 18-6 QUERY OPTIONS

tsm> q opt
ACTIVATEKEY: YES
AFSBACKUPMNTPNT: YES
ALLOWWILDCARDCH: NO
ARCHSYMLINKASFILE: YES
ASNODENAME:
AUTOFSRENAME: PROMPT
AUTOMOUNT:
BACKUPREGISTRY: YES
CANDIDATESINTERVAL: 1
CASESENSITIVEAWARE: NO
CHANGINGRETRIES: 4
CHECKFORORPHANS: NO
CHECKTHRESHOLDS: 5
CLUSTERDISKSONLY: YES
CLUSTERNODE: NO
COMMMETHOD: TCP/IP
COLLOCATEBYFILESPEC: NO
COMMRESTARTDURATION: 60
COMMRESTARTINTERVAL: 15
COMPRESSALWAYS: YES
COMPRESSION: NO
DATEFORMAT: 1
DEFAULTSERVER:
DFSBACKUPMNTPNT: YES
DIRMC: DEFAULT
DISKBUFFSIZE: 32768
DOMAIN:
\\klchl2m\c$
DOMAIN.IMAGE:
DOMAIN.NAS:
DOMNODE:
DSMTRACELISTEN: NO
EDITOR: YES
ENABLEARCHIVERETENTIONPROTECTION: NO
ENABLELANFREE: NO
ENABLESERVERFREE: NO
ENABLECLIENTENCRYPTKEY: NO
ENCRYPTIONTYPE: DES56
ENCRYPTKEY: SAVE
ERRORLOGMAX: 0

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 137

 ERRORLOGNAME: c:\program files\tivoli\tsm\baclient\dsmerror.log
ERRORLOGRETENTION: 7, D
ERRORPROG:
EVENTLOGGING: NO
FASTQUERYBACKUP: NO
FOLLOWSYMBOLIC: NO
FRSPRIMARYRESTORE: NO
GROUPS:
GUITREEVIEWAFTERBACKUP: NO
HTTPPORT: 1581
IMAGEGAPSIZE: 32
INCRTHRESHOLD: 0
JOURNALPIPE: \\.\pipe\jnlServer
KERNELMESSAGES: YES
LANGUAGE: dscenu.txt
LANFREECOMMMETHOD: Named Pipe
LANFREESHMPORT: 1
LANFREETCPPORT: 1500
LANFREETCPSERVERADDRESS: 127.0.0.1
LARGECOMMBUFFERS: NO
LOCALBACKUPSET: NO
MAILPROG:
MAKESPARSEFILE: YES
MANAGEDSERVICES: WEBCLIENT
MAXCANDPROCS: 5
MAXCMDRETRIES: 2
MAXMIGRATORS: 1
MAXRECALLDAEMONS: 20
MAXRECONCILEPROC: 3
MAXTHRESHOLDPROC: 3
MEMORYEFFICIENTBACKUP: NO
MIGFILEEXPIRATION: 7
MIGRATESERVER:
MINMIGFILESIZE: 0
MINRECALLDAEMONS: 3
NAMEDPIPENAME: \\.\pipe\Server1
NASNODENAME:
NFSTIMEOUT: 0
NODENAME: KAILOU
NUMBERFORMAT: 1
NWEXITNLMPROMPT: 0
NWIGNORECOMPRESSBIT: NO
NWIPCPORT: 0
NWPWFILE: YES
OPTFILE:
OPTIONFORMAT: 0
OVERLAPRECALL: NO
PASSWORDACCESS: GENERATE
PASSWORDDIR:

138 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 POSTNSCHEDULECMD:
POSTSCHEDULECMD:
POSTSNAPSHOTCMD:
PRENSCHEDULECMD:
PRESCHEDULECMD:
PRESERVELASTACCESSDATE: NO
PRESNAPSHOTCMD:
PROCESSORUTILIZATION: 0
QUERYSCHEDPERIOD: 12
QUIET/VERBOSE: VERBOSE
RECONCILEINTERVAL: 24
REPLACE: YES
RESETARCHIVEATTRIBUTE: NO
RESOURCEUTILIZATION: 0
RESTOREMIGSTATE: YES
RETRYPERIOD: 20
RUNASSERVICE: NO
SCHEDCMDDISABLED: NO
SCHEDLOGMAX: 0
SCHEDLOGNAME: c:\program files\tivoli\tsm\baclient\dsmsched.log
SCHEDLOGRETENTION: 7, D
SCHEDMODE: POLLING
SCROLLLINES: 20
SCROLLPROMPT: NO
SERVERNAME: DSMSERV
SESSIONINITIATION: 1
SHMPORT: 1
SHMQUEUENAME: \QUEUES\ADSM\DSMSERV
SKIPNTPERMISSIONS: NO
SKIPNTSECURITYCRC: NO
SNAPSHOTCACHELOCATION:
SNAPSHOTCACHESIZE: 1
SNAPSHOTFSIDLERETRIES: 10
SNAPSHOTFSIDLEWAIT: 5S,500MS; MINSET: 1
SUBDIR: YES
SUBFILEBACKUP: NO
SUBFILECACHEPATH:
SUBFILECACHESIZE: 10
TAPEPROMPT: NO
TCPADMINPORT: 1500
TCPBUFFSIZE: 32768
TCPCLIENTADDRESS:
TCPCLIENTPORT: 1501
TCPNODELAY: YES
TCPPORT: 1500
TCPRECVDELAY: 0
TCPSENDDELAY: 0
TCPSERVERADDRESS: POLONIUM.ALMADEN.IBM.COM
TCPWINDOWSIZE: 64512

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 139

 TESTFLAGS: Not yet implemented
TIMEFORMAT: 1
TRACEFILE:
TRACEFLAGS:
TRACEMAX: 0
TRACESEGSIZE: 0
TXNBYTELIMIT: 26214400
USEDIRECTORY: NO
USERS:
USEUNCNAMES: NO
VIRTUALMOUNTPOINT:
VIRTUALNODENAME: KAILOU
WASEXPHOME:
WASHOME:
WASNDHOME:
WASOFFLINE: NO
tsm>

18.2.6 NDMP file-level restore

NDMP support is enhanced to allow you to restore individual files from your
Network Attached Storage (NAS) file system image backups. Use the toc option
with the include.fs.nas option in your client options file (dsm.opt) to specify
whether Tivoli Storage Manager saves Table of Contents (TOC) information
during a NAS file system image backup. If you save TOC information, you can
use the Web client or the Tivoli Storage Manager server restore node command
to restore individual files or directory trees from the NAS file system image that
you specify.

Note: NDMP support is available only on IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

Extended Edition.

18.2.7 Processing EMC Celerra NAS file system images

Through support of NDMP, Tivoli Storage Manager Windows, AIX, and Solaris
servers can efficiently back up and restore Network Attached Storage (NAS) file
system images to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to Network
Appliance and EMC Celerra NAS file servers.

Note: NDMP support is available only on IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

Extended Edition.

140 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

18.2.8 Backup and restore of the WebSphere Application Server
If you installed the Data Protection for WebSphere Application Server, you can
use Tivoli Storage Manager to back up the Version 5.0 WebSphere Application
Server Network Deployment Manager (containing setup, application files, and
configuration information) or the Application Server. You can restore this
information from the Tivoli Storage Manager server and use it to recover a
corrupted node application or an entire node (or nodes) in the event of an
accident or disaster.

18.2.9 Enhancements for command line image restore operations

You can use the verifyimage option with the restore image command to specify
that you want to enable detection of bad sectors on the destination target
volume. If bad sectors are detected on the target volume, Tivoli Storage Manager
issues a warning message on the console and in the error log.

If bad sectors are present on the target volume, you can use the imagetofile
option with the restore image command to specify that you want to restore the
source image to a file. Then you can use the dd utility (available on UNIX and
provided in the \baclient directory of the Windows client) to copy data from this
file to a logical volume. Use of the dd command is shown in Example 18-7.

Example 18-7 “dd” command provided with the Windows client

C:\Program Files\Tivoli\TSM\baclient>dd --help

Usage: dd [if=FILE] [of=FILE] [bs=BYTES] [ibs=BYTES] [obs=BYTES]

[skip=BLOCKS] [seek=BLOCKS] [count=BLOCKS]

Copy a file/device.

bs=BYTES force ibs=BYTES and obs=BYTES

count=BLOCKS copy only BLOCKS input blocks
ibs=BYTES read BYTES bytes at a time
if=FILE read from FILE instead of stdin
obs=BYTES write BYTES bytes at a time
of=FILE write to FILE instead of stdout
seek=BLOCKS skip BLOCKS obs-sized blocks at start of output
skip=BLOCKS skip BLOCKS ibs-sized blocks at start of input
--help display this help and exit
--version display version information and exit

BLOCKS and BYTES may be followed by the following multiplicative suffixes:

b - 512, k - 1024, m - 1,048,576, g - 1,073,741,824.

Examples:

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 141

 dd if=e:\x.img of=\\.\x: bs=1m
copies the file e:\x.img to the volume X: using 1MB buffer

dd if=\\.\z: of=z.img
copies the volume Z: to the file z.img using the default buffer (512 bytes)

More information on the dd options can be obtained from the Internet by

searching for “man dd”.

18.2.10 Gathering Tivoli Storage Manager system information

Use the query systeminfo command to gather information on one or more of the
following items and output this information to a file name that you specify:
򐂰 DSMOPTFILE — The contents of dsm.opt file
򐂰 ENV — Environment variables
򐂰 ERRORLOG — The Tivoli Storage Manager error log file
򐂰 FILE — Attributes for the file name that you specify
򐂰 INCLEXCL — Compiles a list of include-exclude in the order in which they are
processed during backup and archive operations
򐂰 OPTIONS — Compiled options
򐂰 OSINFO — Name and version of the client operating system
(includes ULIMIT information for UNIX and Linux)
򐂰 POLICY — Policy set dump
򐂰 DSMSYSFILE — The contents of the dsm.sys file
򐂰 CLUSTER — AIX/Windows cluster information
򐂰 MSINFO — Windows system information (output from MSINFO32.EXE)
򐂰 REGISTRY — Windows Tivoli Storage Manager-related registry entries
򐂰 SYSTEMOBJECT — Windows system object information

Note: More items for use with the query systeminfo have been added in later
releases. For a complete list, please refer to the latest Backup-Archive Clients
Installation and User’s Guide.

18.2.11 Enhancements for the query filespace command

The query filespace command is enhanced to allow you to query a single file
space on the Tivoli Storage Manager server.

142 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Querying a single filespace was previously not possible. The output of this
command is shown in Figure 18-8

Example 18-8 Display a single file space

tsm> Query Filespace
# Last Incr Date Type File Space Name
--- -------------- ---- ---------------
1 11/25/04 12:41:27 JFS /
2 11/25/04 12:41:17 JFS /var
tsm> q fi /var -detail
# Last Incr Date Type fsID Unicode File Space Name
--- -------------- ---- ---- ------- ---------------
1 11/25/04 12:41:17 JFS 1 No /var
tsm>

18.2.12 Separately installable language packs available

Language packs are separately installable packages that contain only
language-specific files (such as message catalog, resource file, help files, etc.).
You can now install these additional language packs on top of your Tivoli
Storage Manager client base install. To change your language preferences,
specify the language option in your client options file (dsm.opt) or use the
Preferences editor.

18.3 Changes in Version 5.2.2

The following common changes for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2.2
Clients have been introduced.

18.3.1 Removal of operand limits for backup and archive operations

The removeoperandlimit option specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager removes
the 20-operand limit for UNIX-family and Macintosh OS X platforms. If you
specify the removeoperandlimit option with the incremental, selective, or
archive commands, the 20-operand limit is not enforced and is restricted only by
available resources or other operating system limits.

The removeoperandlimit option can be useful if you generate scripts which may
invoke the command line client with a large number of operands. For example,
you may prescan a directory tree looking for files to back up. As each eligible file
is discovered, it is added to the operand list of a selective command. Later, this
selective command is submitted by a controlling script. In this case, specifying
the removeoperandlimit option removes the 20-operand limit for UNIX-family and
Macintosh OS X platforms.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 143

 Note: The removeoperandlimit is not available for Windows and Netware.

18.3.2 Multi-session backup session enhancements

Use the collocatebyfilespec option to specify whether the Tivoli Storage Manager
client uses only one server session to send objects generated from one file
specification.

Setting the collocatebyfilespec option to yes eliminates interspersing of files from

different file specifications, by limiting the client to one server session per file
specification. Therefore, if you store the data to tape, files for each file
specification are stored together on one tape (unless another tape is required for
more capacity).

Attention: Use the collocatebyfilespec option only if the storage pool is going
directly to tape. If you use this option going to a disk storage pool, you could
affect some load balancing, and therefore, performance.

18.3.3 WebSphere Application Server (WAS) security support

If WebSphere Application Server security is enabled, user name and password
validation for Data Protection for WebSphere Application Server is required. If
you do not set the WebSphere Application Server password for security, the
backup will failover to an offline backup. It is recommended to set this password
to perform consistent backups. Use the set waspassword command to set the
user name and password for each installation of WebSphere Application Server
on your machine. You only need to perform this task once, unless you change
your WebSphere Application Server user name or password. You can only
perform this task on the Tivoli Storage Manager command line.

18.3.4 Language support enhanced

Tivoli Storage Manager client language packs are available in Russian,
Hungarian, Polish, and Czech language locales.

18.4 Changes in Version 5.3

The following common changes for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3
Clients have been introduced.

144 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

18.4.1 Include-exclude enhancements
A preview function shows the objects to be backed up or archived according to
the include-exclude list, prior to sending any data to the server. The Tivoli
Storage Manager Client Java GUI directory tree shows detailed information of
included and excluded objects.

The Client Configuration Wizard and the directory tree in the Tivoli Storage
Manager Client Java GUI allow you to select files and directories to include or
exclude. This is shown later in the three screen captures in Figure 18-6 on
page 149, Figure 18-7 on page 150, and Figure 18-8 on page 151.

Preview function
The preview of the objects to be backed up or archived according to the
include-exclude list can be started by selecting Utilities → Preview
Include-Exclude from the client interface.This brings up the Preview
Include-Exclude dialog box shown in Figure 18-2.

Figure 18-2 Web client: Preview Include-Exclude

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 145

 The output file from the preview function is tab-delimited and can thus easily be
opened and viewed with a spreadsheet program as shown in Figure 18-3.

Figure 18-3 Preview Include-Exclude file in a spreadsheet application

146 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Detailed information of included and excluded objects
The Tivoli Storage Manager Client GUI directory tree shows detailed information
of included and excluded objects, by selecting View → File details... from the
Web or Java client interface.This brings up the Information Window shown in
Figure 18-4.

Figure 18-4 Client Web/Java GUI: Details of included and excluded objects

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 147

 More options are available for include/exclude by clicking Advanced, as can be
seen in Figure 18-5.

Figure 18-5 Client Web/Java GUI: Advanced options, include/exclude of objects

Selection of files and directories to include/exclude in the Wizard

The Client Configuration Wizard allows you to select files and directories to
include or exclude, as shown in the following screen captures (Figure 18-6,
Figure 18-7 and Figure 18-8).

148 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 18-6 Client Configuration Wizard: Recommended Include/Exclude List

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 149

 Figure 18-7 Client Configuration Wizard: Common File Exclusion Selection

150 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 18-8 Client Configuration Wizard: Selection of Domain for Backup

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 151

 Selection of files and directories to include/exclude from the GUI
The Tivoli Storage Manager Client Java GUI allows you to select files and
directories to include or exclude by selecting Edit → Include Item(s) or Edit →
Exclude Item(s) from the Web and Java client interface. This brings up the
resultant Backup window shown in Figure 18-9.

Figure 18-9 Client Web/Java GUI: Include/Exclude files or directories

18.4.2 Enhancements to query schedule command

To more accurately determine the status of scheduled events, the query
schedule command on a Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 and above client
reports new fields relating to the enhanced scheduling now possible as shown in
Example 18-9.

152 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Example 18-9 Querying scheduled events: new fields
tsm> query schedule
Schedule Name: FIRSTANTHIRDTUESDAY
Description: First and third Tuesday of every month
Schedule Style: Enhanced
Action: Incremental
Options:
Objects:
Priority: 5
Next Execution: 118 Hours and 48 Minutes
Duration: 1 Hour
Period:
Day of Week: Tuesday
Month: Any
Day of Month: Any
Week of Month: First, Third
Expire: Never

18.4.3 Tivoli Storage Manager Administration Center

Despite the manual stating that the hyperlink from the new Java based IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Administration Center to an IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client
machine provides the administrator ID and encrypted password to the Web client
through a Java portlet, it currently does not. This should enable the launching of
the Web client GUI without the administrator signing on again. The IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Version 5.3 or higher Web client is required for this support.

Security issues may be resolved in future releases but, as of the current 5.3
release, a password is still required.

18.4.4 Deleting individual backups from a server file space

If your administrator has given you authority, you can delete individual backup
copies from the Tivoli Storage Manager server without deleting the entire file
space. This may be useful in situations where you need to delete:
򐂰 Sensitive files that were mistakenly backed up
򐂰 A subset of backup files that were inadvertently backed up
򐂰 Files that are found to contain viruses

Delete Backup from the client command line

Example 18-10 shows how a backup can be deleted using the client command
line.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 153

 Example 18-10 DELETE BACKUP using the client command line
#delete backup -subdir=yes -pick {\\polonium1\c$}\

TSM Scrollable PICK Window - Backup Delete

# Backup Date/Time File Size A/I File

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 100 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\apiver
2. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 1.53 KB A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\bluepa
3. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 107 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\c4ebcu
4. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 247 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\cbpdon
x 5. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 147 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\imgpla
6. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 94.41 KB A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\issimo
7. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 43 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\monset
8. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 1.88 KB A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\MRF.IN
9. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 1.34 KB A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\mtm.in
x 10. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 3.25 KB A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\remove
11. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 1.22 KB A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\web.in
12. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 109 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\binw32
13. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 109 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\binwin
14. | 11/22/2004 17:36:52 109 B A \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\binwin
|
|
0---------10--------20--------30--------40--------50--------60--------7
<U>=Up <D>=Down <T>=Top <B>=Bottom <R#>=Right <L#>=Left
<G#>=Goto Line # <#>=Toggle Entry <+>=Select All <->=Deselect All
<#:#+>=Select A Range <#:#->=Deselect A Range <O>=Ok <C>=Cancel
pick>

Backup files will be deleted. Do you wish to proceed? (Yes (Y)/No (N)) y
Backup Delete-> 147 \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\imgplat.ini [Sent]
Backup Delete-> 3,329 \\polonium1\c$\Sdwork\removenis.ini [Sent]

Total number of objects deleted: 2

Total number of objects failed: 0
Total number of bytes transferred: 0 B
Data transfer time: 0.00 sec
Network data transfer rate: 0.00 KB/sec
Aggregate data transfer rate: 0.00 KB/sec
Objects compressed by: 0%
Elapsed processing time: 00:01:35

You have the choice to delete active and inactive versions of files and images. A
variety of options also support this task, so you can use filelist, specify fromdate
and fromtime. With the pick option, you can select the files you wish to delete.

154 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Delete Backup from the client GUI
Figure 18-10 shows how a backup can be deleted using the client GUI.

Figure 18-10 Client Web/Java GUI: Delete Backup Data from the Utilities menu

18.4.5 Optimized option default values

These are the new option default values and some recommendations:
diskbuffsize Allows you to specify I/O buffer size (in kilobytes) that the
client may use to optimize backup, archive, or HSM client
performance.
Recommendation: Use the default value instead of
specifying the diskbuffsize option.
largecommbuffers This option has been replaced by the diskbuffsize option.
At this time, largecommbuffers will continue to be
accepted by the Tivoli Storage Manager client in order to
ease the transition to the new option. However, the value
specified by largecommbuffers will be ignored in favor of
the diskbuffsize setting.
Recommendation: Discontinue the use of
largecommbuffers because future releases of Tivoli
Storage Manager might not accept this option.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 155

 tcpadminport Specifies a separate TCP/IP port number on which the
server is waiting for requests for administrative client
sessions, allowing secure administrative sessions within a
private network. If this option is not specified, the default
value is the value of the tcpport option.
Note: This option does not apply for Netware clients.
tcpbuffsize The default value was changed from 31 kilobytes to 32
kilobytes.
tcpnodelay The default value was changed from no to yes. tcpnodelay
yes disables the TCP/IP Nagle algorithm. This algorithm
is used to reduce the number of small segments sent
across the network, but in some environments this might
negatively impact Tivoli Storage Manager performance.
Recommendation: Use the default of yes, unless you
fully understand the effects of the TCP Nagle algorithm on
network transmissions and how its use affects the
performance of Tivoli Storage Manager in your
environment.
tcpwindowsize The default value was changed from 32 kilobytes to 63
kilobytes.

18.4.6 Weblinks: Links from the backup-archive client Java GUI

From the backup-archive client GUI and Web client, you can now directly access
the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Web site, the IBM Tivoli Web site, the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Support Web site, and the Tivoli Storage Manager Publications
Web site.

From the backup-archive command line interface help menu window, the Web
site address is displayed. You can enter the Web site address in a browser to
access the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Support Web site for technical support
on Tivoli Storage.

18.4.7 New options: Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax, and DSM_LOG

The environment variable DSM_LOG is only available to UNIX and Windows
clients, thus the information concerning DSM_LOG does not apply to Netware
clients.

156 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 New options Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax
Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax are new options for controlling log size.
Errorlogmax specifies the maximum size for the error log, in megabytes.
Schedlogmax specifies the maximum size for the scheduler log, in megabytes.

DSM_LOG environment variable changes

DSM_LOG environment variable changes have been made to prevent a security
or data integrity problem. Logs will no longer be created in the installation
directory. In addition, if the client is unable to open a required log for writing, the
client process will terminate. The Tivoli Storage Manager command line client,
the Web client acceptor and agent will not run without a writable dsmerror.log.

Note: The environment variable DSM_LOG does not apply to the Netware
clients.

18.4.8 Enhanced encryption

Tivoli Storage Manager now supports AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
128-bit data encryption to encrypt data during backup and archive operations
using the include.encryption option.

Caution: You can encrypt the data that is sent to the server during a backup
or archive operation using standard encryption. If you use the encryption
feature to encrypt your data during backup or archive, you must have the
encryption key, in order to restore or retrieve the data. If the encryption key is
not available on the client machine (via the encryptkey option) and you forgot
the encryption key, then the data cannot be restored or retrieved under any
circumstances.

18.4.9 Dynamic client tracing

A new command line utility, dsmtrace, is available to enable tracing, disable
tracing, or change trace flags while the client is running. See the Problem
Determination Guide for information about using this utility.

Note: Tracing is an advanced diagnostic feature intended for use only at the
recommendation of IBM support and development, or as outlined in the
Problem Determination Guide.

Chapter 18. Common client enhancements 157

18.4.10 Web client enhancements (plus: Java GUI in UNIX)
This section describes the Web client enhancements.

Web client enhancements

You can now perform the following functions from the Web client:
򐂰 Find files in the backup, restore, archive or retrieve window
򐂰 Back up, restore, archive, or retrieve your files by filtering file names or
filtering the directory tree
򐂰 Restore your data from backup sets without a server connection

Finding files in the backup, restore, archive, or retrieve window

Figure 18-11 shows how to find files in these various windows.

Figure 18-11 Finding files in the backup, restore, archive or retrieve window

Back up, restore, archive, or retrieve your files by filtering file names or filtering
the directory tree. This is done in the same window as the search as seen in
Figure 18-11, but clicking Filter instead of Search.

Java GUI and Web client enhancements

In addition to the enhancements listed above, there is one enhancement only
available in the UNIX environment:
򐂰 You can archive the file or directory where the symbolic link points.

158 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 19

Chapter 19. UNIX specific client

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced on the UNIX
platform, for which a current version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client is
available, and which have not been described previously in Chapter 18,
“Common client enhancements” on page 129.

The different UNIX derivatives are documented in one manual (TSM 5.3 UNIX
and Linux Backup-Archive Clients Installation and User’s Guide, GC32-0789-05).

They include the following versions:

򐂰 AIX
򐂰 HP-UX
򐂰 Linux
򐂰 Solaris

Note: The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client Version 5.3 for Solaris will be
released at a later point in time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 159

19.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5
These are the UNIX specific client enhancements for this version.

19.1.1 LAN-free data movement support on linux86 client

Tivoli Storage Manager supports LAN-free data movement in a storage area
network (SAN) environment for the Linux86 client. LAN-free data movement
allows client data to move directly from the client to a SAN-attached storage
device. Shifting the client data movement from the communications network to a
SAN decreases the load on the server. This allows the server to support a
greater number of simultaneous client connections.

19.1.2 Linux86 client support for the GPFS

Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup and restore of the General Parallel File
System (GPFS) on the Linux86 client.

19.1.3 Storage Agent now available for Linux

The Storage Agent 5.1 for Linux became available October 2002.

19.1.4 64-bit support for the Storage Manager HP-UX client

The Tivoli Storage Manager 32-bit HP-UX client can perform backup, restore,
archive, and retrieve functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager 64-bit server with the
Shared Memory communication method.

19.2 Changes in client Version 5.2

These are the UNIX specific client enhancements for this version.

19.2.1 Veritas file systems, ACLs, and Veritas Volume Manager

Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup, restore, archive, and retrieve of Veritas
file systems (VxFS) including ACLs on the AIX (32-bit and 64-bit) clients. Image
backup and restore of Veritas Volume Manager logical volumes is also
supported.

160 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

19.2.2 Automounter support for Linux86 and Linux390 clients
The Tivoli Storage Manager Linux86 and Linux390 clients now support the
backup of automounted NFS and loopback file systems. Use the automount
option with the domain option to specify all automounted file systems the Tivoli
Storage Manager client tries to mount at the following points in time:
򐂰 When Tivoli Storage Manager client starts
򐂰 When the back up is started
򐂰 When the Tivoli Storage Manager client has reached an automounted file
system during backup

19.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2

These are the UNIX specific client enhancements for this version.

19.3.1 Support for controlling symbolic link processing

Tivoli Storage Manager treats symbolic links as actual files and backs them up.
However, the file referenced by the symbolic link is not backed up. In some
cases symbolic links can be easily recreated and need not be backed up. In
addition, backing up these symbolic links can increase backup processing time
and occupy a substantial amount of space on the Tivoli Storage Manager server.
You can use the exclude.attribute.symlink option to exclude a file or a group of
files that are symbolic links from backup processing. If necessary, you can use
the include.attribute.symlink option to include symbolic links within a broad
group of excluded files for backup processing.

19.3.2 Backup and restore for SAN File System for AIX
Backup and restore for IBM TotalStorage SAN File System is supported on the
AIX 5.1 client.

19.3.3 Backup-archive client Linux on iSeries

The Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client supported features on Linux
for iSeries are the same as those supported by the Linux for pSeries client.

Chapter 19. UNIX specific client enhancements 161

19.3.4 Backup-archive client for Linux on Intel Itanium
The Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client for Linux on Intel Itanium
(Linux IA64 client) supports these file systems and their ACLs: xfs, ext2, and
ext3. As with the Linux for X86 client, the Linux IA64 client supports the ReiserFS
file system, but not its ACLs.

The Tivoli Storage Manager Linux IA64 client supports the same functions as the
Linux86 client, except the following:
򐂰 Backup-archive Native Graphical User Interface (Motif GUI)
򐂰 LAN-free data transfer
򐂰 Cluster support

19.4 Changes in client Version 5.3

These are the UNIX specific client enhancements for this version.

Note: The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client Version 5.3 for Solaris will be
released at a later point in time.

19.4.1 Client node proxy support [option: Asnodename]

Backup time can be reduced and clustered configurations can store data with
client node proxy support. Tivoli Storage Manager nodes, when authorized
(grant proxynode, see 3.4.15, “Multiple Tivoli Storage Manager client nodes” on
page 60) as agent nodes, can be directed to back up or restore data on behalf of
another node (the target node). This enables concurrent operations from multiple
nodes to store data to the same target node and file space in parallel.

The concurrent operations can reduce backup and restore times in environments
such as IBM GPFS. Client nodes can also be configured with proxy node
authority to support many of the systems that can be configured to support
clustering failover. The asnodename option also allows data to be restored from a
different system than the one which performed the backup.

More details on this can be found in Appendix , “Comparison of options

virtualnodename/fromnode/asnodename” on page 320.

162 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

19.4.2 Backup-archive client for HP-UX Itanium 2
The Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client supported features on HP-UX
Itanium 2 are the same as those supported by the existing HP-UX client.

19.4.3 Linux for zSeries offline image backup

You can now perform offline image backups on Linux zSeries, including native
zSeries® volumes and partitions created by Logical Volume Manager.

Chapter 19. UNIX specific client enhancements 163

164 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 20

Chapter 20. Windows specific client

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes which have been introduced in
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client for Windows, and which have not been
described previously in Chapter 18, “Common client enhancements” on
page 129.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 165

20.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5
These are the Windows specific client enhancements for this version.

20.1.1 Excluding specific system objects from backup processing

You can use the exclude.systemobject option in the client options file (dsm.opt) to
exclude specific system objects from backup processing.

Note: This excludes individual system objects from backup services. Excluded
system object types that you backed up previously are not expired during
subsequent backups. This option only excludes the system object types that
you specify from subsequent backups.

This option is valid for Windows 2000 and Windows XP clients only.

20.1.2 Ignore NTFS compression attribute

During an incremental backup, if the only change to a file is the compression
attribute, the client will send the attribute update to the Tivoli Storage Manager
server without backing up the entire contents of the file. This enhancement does
not apply to files residing on journalled file systems.

20.1.3 Enhanced image backup and restore processing

This enhancement only effects Windows 2000 clients. If bad disk sectors are
detected on the source drive during a LAN-free or LAN-based image backup,
data corruption may occur. In this case, bad sectors are skipped when sending
image data to the Tivoli Storage Manager server. If bad disk sectors are detected
during the image backup, a warning message is issued after the image backup
completes.

20.1.4 Support for monitoring or cancelling server-free operations

This enhancement effects only Windows 2000 clients.You can use the monitor
process and cancel process commands to monitor or cancel a server-free image
backup or restore process.

166 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

20.1.5 DBCS installation path on Unicode-enabled clients
You may install the following Tivoli Storage Manager services under a
double-byte character set (DBCS) path on Windows NT, 2000, and XP
Unicode-enabled clients:
򐂰 Backup-Archive Scheduler Service
򐂰 Client Acceptor Service (CAD)
򐂰 Remote Client Agent Service
򐂰 Journal Engine Service

20.2 Changes in client Version 5.2

These are the Windows specific client enhancements for this version.

20.2.1 Open file support for backup and archive operations

This feature affects only Windows 2000 and Windows XP. If the Logical Volume
Snapshot Agent (LVSA) is installed and configured for open file support via the
setup wizard, by default, Tivoli Storage Manager performs a snapshot backup or
archive of files that are open (or locked) by other applications. The snapshot
allows the backup or archive to be taken from a point-in-time copy that matches
the file system at the time the snapshot is taken. Subsequent changes to the file
system are not included in the backup or archive operation. You can use the
include.fs option to specify whether a drive uses open file support.

20.2.2 Microsoft Volume Shadowcopy Service (VSS)

This feature affects only Windows 2003 Server. Tivoli Storage Manager supports
the Microsoft Volume Shadowcopy Service (VSS) on Windows Server 2003.
Tivoli Storage Manager uses VSS to back up all Windows Server 2003 system
state components as a single object, to provide a consistent point-in-time
snapshot of the system state. System services components can be backed up
individually.

20.2.3 Microsoft Automated System Recovery (ASR)

This feature affects only Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP. Microsoft
Automated System Recovery (ASR) is a restore feature of Windows XP
Professional and Windows Server 2003 that provides a framework for saving and
recovering the Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 operating state, in the
event of a catastrophic system or hardware failure. Tivoli Storage Manager
supports the bare metal restore by participating in the ASR restore framework.

Chapter 20. Windows specific client enhancements 167

 Tivoli Storage Manager creates the files required for ASR recovery and stores
them on the Tivoli Storage Manager server. You can restore these files to a
diskette for use during ASR recovery.

See the TSM 5.3 Windows Backup-Archive Client Installation and User's Guide
for further information about backing up Automated System Recovery (ASR) files
(Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) and the ASR preparation procedure.

20.2.4 Command line and GUI display actual image size

Because image backup allows you to back up only used blocks in a file system,
the stored image size on the Tivoli Storage Manager server could be smaller
than the volume size. For online image backups, the stored image can be larger
than the file system based on the size of the cache files. The Tivoli Storage
Manager command line and GUI now display the actual image size stored on
Tivoli Storage Manager server.

20.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2

These are the Windows specific client enhancements for this version.

20.3.1 Support for Veritas Cluster Server cluster environment

You can install the Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client and scheduler
service on Veritas Cluster Server cluster nodes to back up and restore shared
volumes in a Veritas Cluster Server cluster environment.

20.3.2 Backup and restore support for SAN File System

Backup and restore for IBM TotalStorage SAN File System are now supported
on the Windows 2000 client.

20.4 Changes in client Version 5.3

These are the Windows specific client enhancements for this version.

20.4.1 Journal based backup enhancements

There are several significant improvements to the journal based backup, which
come with Version 5.3.

168 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Functional overview
The following sections present a functional overview of these enhancements.

Improved journal database

򐂰 A BTREE based journal database has been implemented in this release to
replace the previous ISAM based database.
򐂰 The new database removes the 2-gigabyte database size limitation and is
also more reliable than the previous database.
򐂰 Each entry in the new database is approximately 4K so the size of journal
databases may be easily estimated for file systems with a known amount of
change activity.
򐂰 The new database also has the advantage of reclaiming occupied disk space
when all entries in the database have been deleted (as is done during a full
incremental/journal based backup).

Multiple session support

򐂰 Multiple concurrent journal based backup sessions are supported in this
release.
򐂰 Multiple backup sessions are created by a single backup client via the
ResourceUtilization option, or by running multiple instances of a backup
client.

Improved file system monitor

򐂰 The journal daemon file system monitor has been rewritten to fix problems
described in APAR IC40140 and to better accommodate high levels of file
system change activity.
򐂰 The new file system monitor should significantly reduce the likelihood of
notification buffer overflows generated as a result of high file system activity.
򐂰 The new default aggregate size of the notifications buffers for each journal file
system is 3 megabytes should be sufficient for most environments.

Running multiple journal services on the same machine

򐂰 Multiple journal services may be installed on the same machine by using the
new JournalPipe client option and Journal service configuration setting.

Note: Journaling the same file system with multiple journal services may
produce unpredictable results; each journal service should be configured to
journal different file systems.

Chapter 20. Windows specific client enhancements 169

 Improved command line client status messages
The command line client status messages have been improved by providing
additional information, as can be seen in Example 20-1 and Example 20-2.

Example 20-1 Improved command line client status messages - example 1

D:\tsm530c\debug\bin\winnt_unicode>dsmc incr x:
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Command Line Backup/Archive Client Interface
Client Version 5, Release 3, Level 0.0 a14
Client date/time: 04/28/2004 13:10:35
(c) Copyright by IBM Corporation and other(s) 1990, 2004. All Rights Reserved.

Node Name: GSHLAGER3

Session established with server GSHLAGER2_SERVER1: Windows
Server Version 5, Release 2, Level 0.0
Server date/time: 04/28/2004 13:10:33 Last access: 04/28/2004 13:10:16

Incremental backup of volume 'x:'

Querying Journal for '\\gshlager3\x$'
Processing 2 Journal entries for '\\gshlager3\x$'
Normal File--> 5,383 \\gshlager3\x$\testfile1 [Sent]
Normal File--> 5,383 \\gshlager3\x$\testfile2 [Sent]
Successful incremental backup of '\\gshlager3\x$'

Total number of objects inspected: 2

Total number of objects backed up: 2
Total number of objects updated: 0
Total number of objects rebound: 0
Total number of objects deleted: 0
Total number of objects expired: 0
Total number of objects failed: 0
Total number of bytes transferred: 4.21 KB
Data transfer time: 0.00 sec
Network data transfer rate: 0.00 KB/sec
Aggregate data transfer rate: 1.03 KB/sec
Objects compressed by: 63%
Elapsed processing time: 00:00:04

D:\tsm530c\debug\bin\winnt_unicode>

170 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Example 20-2 Improved command line client status messages - example 2
D:\tsm530c\debug\bin\winnt_unicode>dsmc incr x:\dira
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Command Line Backup/Archive Client Interface
Client Version 5, Release 3, Level 0.0 a14
Client date/time: 04/28/2004 13:17:23
(c) Copyright by IBM Corporation and other(s) 1990, 2004. All Rights Reserved.

Node Name: GSHLAGER3

Session established with server GSHLAGER2_SERVER1: Windows
Server Version 5, Release 2, Level 0.0
Server date/time: 04/28/2004 13:17:21 Last access: 04/28/2004 13:17:19

Incremental backup of volume 'x:\dira'

Querying Journal for '\\gshlager3\x$\dira'
Another Journal Based Backup is currently in progress for '\\gshlager3\x$\dira'
Waiting for other Journal Based Backup to complete
Processing 0 Journal entries for '\\gshlager3\x$\dira'
Successful incremental backup of '\\gshlager3\x$\dira'

D:\tsm530c\debug\bin\winnt_unicode>

New options and configuration settings

JournalPipe
This setting/option is used in conjunction with backup client option of the same
name to specify the pipe name of the journal daemon session manager which
backup client initially connect to when establishing a journal based backup
session.

Note that the same pipename must be specified for the client JournalPipe option.

The primary purpose of this setting is to allow running multiple instances of the
journal daemon. Each journal daemon must specify a different pipename.

The default pipename is \\.\pipe\jnlServer

Example in tsmjbbd.ini:

[JournalSettings]
JournalPipe= \\.\pipe\jnlServer1

Example in dsm.opt:

JournalPipe \\.\pipe\jnlServer1

Chapter 20. Windows specific client enhancements 171

 Useful documentation and utilities
Useful documentation and utilities are available from the IBM Knowledge Base
under “TSM Journal Based Backup FAQ”, which can be found under the
following URL:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=203&context=SWI00&context=SWJ00&c
ontext=SWK00&q1=Journal+Based+Backup&uid=swg21155524&loc=en_US&cs=utf-8&lan
g=en+en

This page can be found by going to the IBM Support page and then searching for
“journal based backup”:
http://www.ibm.com/support

Usage of the resourceutilization option

Because multiple journal based backup sessions are now possible, here is some
additional information about usage of the resourceutilization option.

Use the resourceutilization option in your client options file dsm.opt to regulate
the level of resources the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client can use
during processing.

Regulating backup and archive sessions

When you request a backup or archive, the client can use more than one session
to the server. The default is to use a maximum of two sessions; one to query the
server and one to send file data. The client can use only one server session if
you specify a resourceutilization setting of 1.

A client can use more than the default number of sessions when connecting to a
server that is Version 3.7 or higher. For example, resourceutilization=10 permits
up to eight sessions with the server. Multiple sessions may be used for querying
the server and sending file data.

Note: As of the time of the writing of this book, only Tivoli Storage Manager
Versions 5.1.5 or above are supported Tivoli Storage Manager server
versions.

172 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Multiple query sessions are used when you specify multiple file specifications
with a backup or archive command. For example, if you enter this command:

inc filespaceA filespaceB

And if you also specify resourceutilization=5, the client may start a second
session to query files on file space B. Whether or not the second session starts
depends on how long it takes to query the server about files backed up on file
space A. The client may also try to read data from the file system and send it to
the server on multiple sessions.

20.4.2 Single drive support for OFS or online image backups

You can now perform open file support (OFS) or online image backups on
machines with a single NTFS-based C: drive. You can also easily verify if the
LVSA is functioning properly or find the root cause of any failure by checking the
Windows event log, without turning on any trace facilities.

Note: Windows 2003 LVSA for OFS has delayed availability.

Chapter 20. Windows specific client enhancements 173

174 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 21

Chapter 21. Netware specific client

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced in IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager client for Netware, which have not been described previously
in Chapter 18, “Common client enhancements” on page 129.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 175

21.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5
These are the Netware specific client enhancements for this version.

21.1.1 Support for Novell Cluster Services

You can install Tivoli Storage Manager locally on each NetWare server in an NCS
environment cluster. You can also install and configure the Tivoli Storage
Manager backup-archive scheduler for each cluster node to manage all local
disks and each cluster group containing physical disk resources.

More information can be found in Appendix C. “Configuring the backup-archive

client in a Novell Cluster Services (NCS) environment” of the TSM 5.3 NetWare
Backup-Archive Clients Installation and User's Guide, GC32-0786-05.

21.2 Changes in client Version 5.2

These are the Netware specific client enhancements for this version.

21.2.1 Enhanced ALL-LOCAL domain processing (NDS replica)

If the local NetWare server contains a master NDS replica, then NDS will now be
processed as a part of the ALL-LOCAL domain.

21.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2

These are the Netware specific client enhancements for this version.

21.3.1 Support for Novell NetWare 6.5 operating system

Beginning with Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2.2, the Novell NetWare 6.5
operating system is supported.

Information on the software requirements: Novell NetWare 5.1, 6.0, and 6.5.
These Novell NetWare server levels are required for local or remote Tivoli
Storage Manager operations. See the readme file that is shipped on the product
installation media for information on supported patches from Novell.

176 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

21.4 Changes in client Version 5.3
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client for this
platform. See Chapter 18, “Common client enhancements” on page 129 of this
redbook for further details.

No Netware specific changes

No features have been added or modified specifically for this platform.

Chapter 21. Netware specific client enhancements 177

178 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 22

Chapter 22. Mac OS X specific client

enhancements
This chapter provides information on the changes introduced in IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager client for Mac OS X, which have not been described previously
in Chapter 18, “Common client enhancements” on page 129.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 179

22.1 Changes in client Version 5.1.5
There were no changes specific to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client for this
platform. See Chapter 18, “Common client enhancements” on page 129 of this
redbook for further details.

No changes in this version

No features have been added or modified specifically for this platform.

22.2 Changes in client Version 5.2

These are the Mac OS specific client enhancements for this version.

22.2.1 Migrating to the Unicode-enabled client

Information on the benefits, how to migrate to the Unicode-client and on the
necessary considerations for Unicode-enabled clients is provided in the IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager for Macintosh Backup-Archive Clients Installation and
User’s Guide Version 5 Release 2, GC32-0787-04.

Beginning with IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2, the Macintosh client is
Unicode enabled. The Unicode-enabled client supports Unicode for file,
directory, and file space names.

22.2.2 The inclexcl option

The inclexcl option to use an include-exclude options file was introduced with
this version.

22.2.3 The autofsrename option

With the introduction of support for Unicode, the option autofsrename allows
preservation of non-Unicode filespaces.

The autofsrename option renames an existing file space on a server so that a

Unicode-enabled file space with the original name can be created for the current
operation.

Note: Be aware that a filespace rename will behave like a full backup,
incurring a longer backup time and extra storage capacity.

180 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

22.3 Changes in client Version 5.2.2
These are the Mac OS specific client enhancements for this version.

22.3.1 Enhanced firewall security

Security for back up and restore operations and Tivoli Storage Manager
administrative functions is enhanced to allow the Tivoli Storage Manager server
to control whether the server or client initiates sessions through a firewall.
Use the sessioninitiation option to control whether the server or client initiates
sessions through a firewall. The default is that the client initiates sessions. You
can use this option with the schedule command.

Both the server and client can also specify a separate TCP/IP port number on
which the server is waiting for requests for administrative client sessions,
allowing secure administrative sessions within a private network.
Use the tcpadminport option to specify a separate TCP/IP port number on which
the server is waiting for requests for administrative client sessions, allowing
secure administrative sessions within a private network.

Note: This has already been introduced in Version 5.2 for all the other
platforms.

22.3.2 Encrypting data during backup or archive operation

Tivoli Storage Manager supports the encryption of data that is sent to the server
during a backup or archive operation using standard 56-bit encryption.

Caution: You can encrypt the data that is sent to the server during a backup
or archive operation using standard 56-bit encryption. If you use the 56-bit
encryption feature to encrypt your data during backup or archive, you must
have the encryption key in order to restore or retrieve the data. If the
encryption key is not available on the client machine (via the encryptkey
option) and you forgot or lost the encryption key, then the data cannot be
restored or retrieved under any circumstances.

22.3.3 Displaying options and their settings via the command line
This feature was available since IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1.5 for all
other clients. Use the query options command to display all or part of your
options and their current settings. This command accepts an argument to specify
a subset of options. The default is to display all options.

Chapter 22. Mac OS X specific client enhancements 181

22.3.4 Gathering Tivoli Storage Manager system information
This feature was available since IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1.5 for all
other clients. Use the query systeminfo command to gather Tivoli Storage
Manager system information and output this information to a file or the console.

22.3.5 Tivoli Storage Manager command line interface

Beginning with Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2.2, the Macintosh client
provides a command line interface. As with the traditional Macintosh client
graphical user interface, you can perform all backup, archive, restore, and
retrieve tasks locally or remotely through the native client command line
interface.

22.3.6 Tivoli Storage Manager as a background scheduler

The Tivoli Storage Manager Macintosh client can now be configured as a startup
item to handle scheduled events without requiring a user to be logged in.

22.3.7 Non-administrators can manage their own data

The system administrator is responsible for enabling non-administrators to use
Tivoli Storage Manager to manage their own data.

22.3.8 Tivoli Storage Manager administrative client

Beginning with Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.2.2, the Macintosh client
supports an administrative command line interface. The administrative command
line interface permits a Tivoli Storage Manager administrator to control and
monitor server activities, define storage management policies for backup,
archive and space management services, and set up schedules to perform those
services at regular intervals.

22.3.9 Controlling symbolic link and alias processing

Tivoli Storage Manager treats symbolic links and aliases as actual files and
backs them up. However, the file referenced by the symbolic link is not backed
up. In some cases symbolic links and aliases can be easily recreated and need
not be backed up. In addition, backing up these symbolic links or aliases can
increase backup processing time and occupy a substantial amount of space on
the Tivoli Storage Manager server.

182 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 You can use the exclude.attribute.symlink option to exclude a file or a group of
files that are symbolic links or aliases from backup processing. If necessary, you
can use the include.attribute.symlink option to include symbolic links or aliases
within a broad group of excluded files for backup processing.

22.4 Changes in client Version 5.3

This version of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager client for Mac OS X is due for
release at a later date.

Chapter 22. Mac OS X specific client enhancements 183

184 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 Part 4

Part 4 Important new

features in detail
This part of the book describes new features for the Administration Center and
Operational Reporting.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 185

186 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 23

Chapter 23. Administration Center

This chapter describes the newly introduced Administration Center in detail.

This interface is all new and replaces the Web interface available up to the
previous version.

For frequently asked questions regarding the Administration center, please refer
to Appendix E, “Frequently asked questions: Administration Center” on
page 371.

For a list of available Administration Center Wizards, please refer to Appendix D,

“Administration Center Wizards” on page 363.

Administration Center videos and tutorials: We created two short videos

that give an example of how to work with the new Administration Center. We
show how to access the command line and how to unlock a client node;
please refer to Appendix G-1, “Additional material” on page 394 on how to
download the videos. In addition, you can download Macromedia Flash based
tutorials that provide an introduction to the new Administration Center.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 187

23.1 Introduction
This version of IBM Tivoli Storage Manager uses components from IBM’s
Autonomic Computing Technology Integration suite. Autonomic computing takes
technology another step closer to “self-healing” systems. Autonomic computing
is a phrase IBM uses to describe the set of technologies and tools that enable
applications, systems, and entire networks to become more self-managing.

Self-management involves four qualities — self-configure, self-heal,

self-optimize, and self-protect — which are often referred to as Self-CHOP
characteristics. The word autonomic is borrowed from physiology; as a human
body knows when it needs to breathe, software is being developed to enable a
computer system to know when it needs to repair itself, configure itself, and so
on. Further details regarding Autonomic Computing are available here:
http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/autonomic/newto/

Note: The Tivoli Storage Manager Server and the Administrations Center can
be installed on the same machine. The Administration Center requires at a
minimum 512 MB RAM in addition to the RAM required for the Tivoli Storage
Manager Server.
For the latest recommendation on the Administration Center installation, use
keyword TSMADMINCENTER when you visit:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager.html

23.1.1 What is the Integrated Solutions Console?

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager’s new user interface consists of a number of
different components which will assist the administrator in managing multiple
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager servers within a single, integrated console.

23.1.2 Integrated Solutions Console Infrastructure

The ISC builds on top of the WebSphere Application Server and WebSphere
Portal base and includes lightweight versions of both in the ISC runtimes. It looks
for common problems, actions, and subtasks across the range of ISC
components in order to provide reusable services. Basing the ISC on a
lightweight portal infrastructure provides the ability to aggregate independent
tasks and information into a single organized presentation.

188 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.1.3 Console components
An instance of an Integrated Solutions Console consists of the ISC framework
hosting a set of console components, built by the Storage Group, in the case of
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. The framework can also host console components
from other IBM ISC framework aware applications such as DB2.

23.2 Integrated Solutions Console installation

The installation of the Tivoli Storage Manager Administration Center depends on
the installation of the IBM Integrated Solutions Console. The IBM Integrated
Solutions Console must be installed before the Administration Center can be
installed.

Here is a detailed example of the ISC installation, beginning with the Java Install
shown in Figure 23-1.

Figure 23-1 Java install

Chapter 23. Administration Center 189

 First, the InstallShield Wizard will update the Java version installed on your
machine. Next, the initial Welcome window is displayed, as shown in Figure 23-2.

Figure 23-2 Initial Welcome window for ISC Install

190 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

A more detailed Welcome window is then displayed with a brief overview and
version information, as shown in Figure 23-3. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-3 Second Welcome window

Chapter 23. Administration Center 191

 The next step is to accept the International Program License Agreement as in
Figure 23-4. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-4 International Program License Agreement window

192 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

The next window allows the CD installation path to be entered or confirmed, as
shown in Figure 23-5. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-5 Location of Installation CD

Chapter 23. Administration Center 193

 The next step is to point to the installation destination, as shown in Figure 23-6.
Then click Next to continue.

Figure 23-6 Install destination

194 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

The installation continues with the next step, which is to confirm the iscadmin
userid and password. The default userid is iscadmin but this can be changed if
required. Note that the password must be entered twice, as shown in
Figure 23-7. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-7 Create ISC administrator userid and password

Chapter 23. Administration Center 195

 The next window, Figure 23-8, shows the ports used for the ISC. Again, these are
the defaults, but you can change them if you need to. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-8 Select ports for ISC to use

196 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Click Next to start the installation proper, as shown in Figure 23-9. The 1 to 2
hours of completion time was determined from an earlier Beta version of the
installation. This has been improved for the GA version.

Figure 23-9 Installing the ISC

Chapter 23. Administration Center 197

 Once the installation has completed, you should see the window in Figure 23-10.
Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-10 Installation completed successfully

The next window, shown again in Figure 23-11, confirms the installation and
shows the address of the console and then prompts for the installation of the
Administration Center. Click Next to continue.

198 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 23-11 Installation summary and login details

Note the default address of your ISC server: http://servername:8421/ibm/console

The servername is the network name of the machine you installed the ISC on.

Once the installation completes, clicking Next will launch the Integrated
Solutions Console. Figure 23-12 shows the ISC Welcome window.

Figure 23-12 Automatically launched ISC Login page

Chapter 23. Administration Center 199

23.3 Administration Center installation
Installation of the Administration Center is a similar process to the ISC install. It
also begins with a Java installation, as shown in Figure 23-13.

Figure 23-13 Java Virtual Machine preparation

Next, the InstallShield Welcome window is displayed. This is displayed in

Figure 23-14.Click Next to continue the installation.

Figure 23-14 Welcome to InstallShield Wizard for Administration Center

200 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

You are then presented with the Administration Center detailed Welcome
window, as shown in Figure 23-15.

Figure 23-15 Second Welcome with further details

Chapter 23. Administration Center 201

 To continue with the installation, click Next. Accept the International Program
License Agreement, as shown in Figure 23-16, and again click Next to continue.

Figure 23-16 International Program License Agreement window

202 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Once the agreement is accepted, the option to change the installation path and
Web Administration Port is provided, as shown in Figure 23-17.

Figure 23-17 Review install path, Admin port and user ID

Chapter 23. Administration Center 203

 If you have checked that the installation path, Administration port, and userid are
correct, you will proceed to the next window, shown in Figure 23-18 below. Click
Next to continue.

Figure 23-18 Enter ISC password

204 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

The ISC password is the password assigned during the ISC install. Once
entered, you will proceed to the Installation CD window to confirm its location, as
shown in Figure 23-19.

Figure 23-19 Select location of installation CD

Click Next to show a final review of your chosen installation options before the
installation can continue. The review window is shown in Figure 23-20.

Important: Once the final review has been displayed, clicking Next starts the
installation, which cannot be stopped, once it is underway.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 205

 Figure 23-20 Final review of selected installation option

Figure 23-21 shows the installation beginning.

Figure 23-21 Installation commences

206 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 23-22 shows that the installation has completed successfully. Click Next
to continue.

Figure 23-22 Installation successful

Chapter 23. Administration Center 207

 Figure 23-23 shows the installation summary.

Figure 23-23 Installation summary

As with the ISC installation, the ISC is automatically launched, as shown in

Figure 23-24, when you click Next.

Figure 23-24 ISC Login automatically appears following install

208 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Figure 23-25 shows the first view of the expanded Tivoli Storage Manager plugin.

Figure 23-25 First login showing expanded Tivoli Storage Manager component

23.3.1 Administering Tivoli Storage Manager server(s)

See “Managing Servers with the New Administration Center” in the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager Installation Guide for further details. See the following table for
commands that are supported with some restrictions or are not yet supported:

Current restrictions in the Administration Center

Table 23-1 lists the current restrictions in the Administration Center as of the date
of publication of this redbook. Running these commands from the command line
does not restrict their functionality.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 209

 Table 23-1 Restricted or unsupported commands
Command Supported in the Administration Server

AUDIT LIBRARY No

CLEAN DRIVE No

DEFINE COPYGROUP TYPE=ARCHIVE Supported except for these parameters:

RETINT
RETMIN
These parameters are needed only to
support Tivoli Storage Manager for Data
Retention

DEFINE DATAMOVER TYPE =SCSI No

This command is only needed to support

configuration of server-free data
movement on Windows servers

DEFINE STGPOOL Supported except for the

RECLAMATIONTYPE parameter

This parameter is only required for EMC

Centera devices

DELETE DATAMOVER No

DISABLE SESSION No

Event Logging commands (BEGIN No

EVENTLOGGING, END
EVENTLOGGING, ENABLE EVENTS, Some SNMP options can be viewed in the
DISABLE EVENTS) interface, in a server’s properties
notebook

ENABLE SESSIONS No

ESTIMATE DBREORG No‘

MIGRATE Use the Server Maintenance work item to

create a maintenance script that includes
this action, or use the migration thresholds
on storage pools

RESTORE VOLUME Yes, except use the command line to

restore random-access storage pool
volumes

SET ACTLOGRETENTION No

210 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Command Supported in the Administration Server

SET QUERYSCHEDPERIOD No

SET RETRYPERIOD No

SET SCHEDMODES No

SET SERVERNAME No

SET SUMMARYRETENTION No

SET TAPEALERTMSG No

SET TOCLOADRETENTION No

VALIDATE LANFREE Use the Enable LAN-free Data Movement

wizard to get this function

Note: Server options that can be modified by using the SETOPT command can
be modified in the Administration Center. Other options can be viewed in the
interface

Integrated Solutions Console considerations

The first step in administering Tivoli Storage Manager servers using the
Integrated Solutions Console is to ensure that separate ISC Administrative user
accounts are created.This is vital to the efficient running of the ISC Server.

Creating multiple users for both your ISC and Tivoli Storage Manager Server
administrators is also useful for establishing which administrator performed a
given command.

Important: Having multiple iscadmin users logged in using the same

credentials will put a high CPU and memory load on your ISC server.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 211

 The new interface consists of new elements which are illustrated in Figure 23-26.

Figure 23-26 Layout of new interface

The Tivoli Storage Manager plugin should be displayed when you open the ISC
for the first time. Clicking the Tivoli Storage Manager icon expands the view, as
shown in Figure 23-27.

Figure 23-27 Tivoli Storage Manager plug-in expanded view

212 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

From the expanded view, clicking the Getting Started link displays the Welcome!
window shown in Figure 23-28.

Figure 23-28 Getting Started window in ISC

The Welcome window in the work area gives you some instructions on how to
perform some basic tasks. The View Tutorial links will open the relevant Flash
Demo for that task. The tasks listed in this window are:
򐂰 Add a server connection
򐂰 Add storage devices
򐂰 Setup automatic data migration
򐂰 Create a server maintenance script
򐂰 Register client nodes
򐂰 Create a client node schedule
򐂰 Setup database and recovery log space triggers

Important: Notice the View Tutorial links on the Welcome page. The tutorials
provide vital instruction in performing the tasks listed in the Welcome page. It
is strongly advised that the Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator follow these
tutorials before using the new Administration Center.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 213

 The Administration Center provides several other features that can help you
monitor and manage your storage management environment:
򐂰 To centrally manage multiple Tivoli Storage Manager servers from a single
server, click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
򐂰 To monitor Tivoli Storage Manager server status, click Health Monitor in the
Work Items list.
򐂰 To generate usage and security reports for your Tivoli Storage Manager
servers, click Reporting in the Work Items list.

For more screen “real estate”, the Navigation window can be contracted using
the icon shown in Figure 23-29.

Figure 23-29 Contract navigation frame

214 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Figure 23-30 shows the Navigation window contracted to give the portlet more
space on the screen.

Figure 23-30 Navigation frame contracted

23.4 Quick start tips

Information similar to the following sections, without illustrations, can be found in
the Administrator’s Guides for each platform in the chapter, Getting Started with
Tivoli Storage Manager. A section entitled Quick paths to creating Tivoli Storage
Manager objects details many other useful tasks.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 215

23.4.1 Creating multiple ISC Admin login accounts
For the optimum performance of your ISC server, you need to create multiple
Administrative login accounts. The following steps show how this is done.
1. Click the Settings tab from the Navigation Tabs pane shown in Figure 23-31.

Figure 23-31 Click Settings in the Navigation Tab

216 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 2. Click User and Group Management in the Navigation Tree, as shown in
Figure 23-32.

Figure 23-32 Manage Users and Groups portlet

Chapter 23. Administration Center 217

 3. Click “all authenticated portal users”, as shown in Figure 23-33.

Figure 23-33 All authenticated users view

4. Click the New user button, as shown in Figure 23-34.

Figure 23-34 New user button

218 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 5. Enter the details of the new ISC administrator, as shown in Figure 23-35.

Figure 23-35 ISC Admin user details

6. You can change the group and role assignments of an existing user using the
icons in the Manage Users and Groups portlet, which is shown in
Figure 23-36.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 219

Figure 23-36 All authenticated portal users Icons

The icons illustrated are:

1. View membership
2. Duplicate group assignments
3. Duplicate role assignments
4. Edit
5. Delete
Duplicating the group and role assignments of an existing user will give the target
user the authority of the source user selected.

23.4.2 Creating multiple Administrator accounts

Creating multiple Tivoli Storage Manager Administrator accounts gives
accountability with the ability to track which Administrator performed which
action. This can be helpful when troubleshooting. Follow these steps to create
multiple accounts:
1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Server Properties, and click Go.
4. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Administrators tab.
5. In the table, click Select Action, select Add Administrator, and click Go.

220 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.4.3 Creating a Tivoli Storage Manager Server link
A link has to be created for each Tivoli Storage Manager server you wish to
administer. The ability to manage multiple servers depends on the service name
chosen for your servers. The default server service name Server1 must be
changed for multiple servers to be addressed. Note that the Tivoli Storage
Manager installation wizard does not allow this service name to be changed
during the installation of the first server.

These are the steps you follow to create a Tivoli Storage Manager Server link:
1. Open the Integrated SC and expand the Tivoli Storage Manager Group View
in the Navigation Tree.
2. Click Enterprise Management.
3. In the Enterprise Management portlet, select Add Server Connection from
the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 23-37.

Figure 23-37 Enter server name and admin details

4. Notice the check box, “Unlock the ADMIN_CENTER administrator on the

server to allow the health monitor to report server status”.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 221

23.4.4 Creating a library
Follow these steps to create a Tivoli Storage Manager Library:
1. Select Storage Devices in the Navigation Tree of the Work Items Navigation
Tab
2. Choose Add a Storage Device from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the server that will use the Storage Device. (This will be the server you
previously created in the Server Link section) and click the Add a Storage
Device button.
4. The Add Storage Device wizard will then be displayed, as shown in
Figure 23-38 to step you through the setup process.

Figure 23-38 Add Storage Device wizard

222 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

5. Click Next to start the wizard and the initial window will be shown as seen in
Figure 23-39.

Figure 23-39 Select Device Type

Chapter 23. Administration Center 223

 6. Enter the local or shared device type in the appropriate selection box. Clicking
Next will then display the Define the Library page, as shown in Figure 23-40.

Figure 23-40 Define Library

224 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 7. Enter the library name and type and click Next to display the SCSI library
settings window illustrated next in Figure 23-41.

Figure 23-41 Define SCSI settings

Chapter 23. Administration Center 225

 8. Enter the SCSI address of the library and optionally check the box if shared.
Click Next to display the Library Defined window shown in Figure 23-42.

Figure 23-42 Library successfully defined

9. To continue the wizard and define drives, click Next.

226 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 10.Open the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 23-43, select Add Drive...
and click Go.

Figure 23-43 Add Drive

Chapter 23. Administration Center 227

 11.The Create a library wizard continues, showing the Add Device Information
page as displayed in Figure 23-44. Enter the Drive name and Device name
in the relevant fields. Enter the Drive element address if required (in most
cases this can be automatically detected). Click the Add Another button to
add more drives if required, or OK to stop adding drives.

Figure 23-44 Add drive detail

228 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 12.]The window shown in Figure 23-45 is displayed once all the drives have been
added.

Figure 23-45 Drive added

13.Click Next to proceed to the Library Created Successfully page shown in

Figure 23-46.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 229

Figure 23-46 Wizard completed

14.The Library Created Successfully page shows the library and drive details
that have been defined. Click Finish to close the wizard.

23.4.5 Creating an additional storage pool

To create an additional storage pool, you use the Add a Storage Device
wizard.This wizard helps you create the objects that the server needs to use a
new device, including a library, drives, paths, a device class, and storage pools.

To launch the wizard, follow these steps:

1. Choose Storage Devices in the Navigation Tree.
2. Select the server you wish to add the Device Class to (if you have more than
one server defined).
3. Choose Add a Storage Device from the drop-down menu, as shown in
Figure 23-47, and click Go.

230 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 23-47 Add a Storage Device drop-down menu

The Wizard should now be displayed as seen in Figure 23-48.

Figure 23-48 Add a Storage Device Wizard

Chapter 23. Administration Center 231

 4. Click the Next button to start the Wizard process.
5. Choose the storage device type from the drop-down menu lists shown in
Figure 23-49. Notice the ability to use a device on another Tivoli Storage
Manager Server for virtual volume definitions.

Figure 23-49 Choose device type and location

232 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 6. Define the volume, as shown in Figure 23-50.

Figure 23-50 Create or Add volume

Chapter 23. Administration Center 233

 7. Figure 23-51 shows the Add Storage Device window during new storage pool
creation.

Figure 23-51 Add to existing or new storage pool

8. Click Next to complete the creation of the new storage pool and new storage
pool volume and the window shown in Figure 23-52 will be displayed.

234 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 23-52 Successful completion of wizard

23.4.6 Adding drives to an existing library

Follow these steps to add drives to an existing library:
1. Click Storage Devices to display the Libraries for All Servers portlet.
2. Select the library you wish to add the drives to using the Select radio button.
3. Open the drop-down menu, select Modify Library as seen in Figure 23-53
and click Go.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 235

Figure 23-53 Modify Library drop-down selected

4. In the Library properties portlet, click Drives to open the portlet as seen in
Figure 23-54.

Figure 23-54 Library properties portlet

236 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 5. Choose Add a Drive from the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 23-55,
and click Go.

Figure 23-55 Add drive drop-down menu

Chapter 23. Administration Center 237

 6. Enter the drive details, including element number and cleaning regime. A
screen capture of this process is illustrated in Figure 23-56.

Figure 23-56 Enter drive details

238 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 7. Notification is given when the drive is added successfully, as shown in
Figure 23-57.

Figure 23-57 Drive successfully added

23.4.7 Creating or modifying an option set

A client node connects with the server by using the information in a client options
file (dsm.opt). This file, located in the client directory, contains client options that
control processing and connections with the server. The most important option is
the network address of the server, but you can add many other client options at
any time.

Administrators can also control client options by creating client option sets on the
server that are used in conjunction with client option files on client nodes.
1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Navigation Tree.
2. Click the Server name icon or select View Policy Domains from the
drop-down menu.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 239

 3. In the Server Policy Domains portlet, click the appropriate Policy Domain in
which to create your option set, as shown in Figure 23-58.

Figure 23-58 Policy Domain properties during option set creation

4. The drop-down menu offers several choices: Create an Option Set, Create
Like Option Set, Modify Option Set... or Delete Option Set.
5. Create an Option Set starts a wizard to create your option set and Create
Like Option Set will also start a wizard if an option set already exists.
6. The wizard will step through the process of creating an option set providing
pertinent choices with regard to option set name and operating system.
7. Once these have been chosen the options and their values can be chosen
relevant to the operating system or environment — for example, DOMAIN
statements or Pre-Schedule or Post-Schedule commands.
8. Include or Exclude filters can also be applied and relevant values are
checked.
9. Any number of client nodes can be assigned to the option set.
10.The summary of the information entered is displayed before the option set
creation is complete.

240 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Note: Be aware that selecting more than one option set for deletion will result
in all selected option sets being deleted.

23.4.8 Unlocking a client node

Follow these steps to unlock a client node:
1. In the Navigation Tree, click Policy Domains and Client Nodes.
2. Select the appropriate server using the Select radio button.
3. Choose Search for Client Node from the drop-down menu, as shown in the
upper pane in Figure 23-59.
4. Enter the name or part of the name, the node type — Client, Server, or NAS,
for example — of the node you wish to unlock.
5. Select the node using the Select radio button, choose the Modify Client
Node option from the drop-down menu shown in the lower pane in
Figure 23-59, and click Go.

Figure 23-59 Search for client node

Chapter 23. Administration Center 241

 6. Choose Security in the Client Properties portlet and you will be presented
with the window shown in Figure 23-60.

Figure 23-60 Uncheck the Refuse actions check box

7. Uncheck the Refuse actions from the client node check box.
8. Click the Apply button to successfully unlock the node.

The node is now successfully unlocked.

23.4.9 Check-in and label volumes

To check in and label volumes, follow these steps:
1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Item list.
2. In Libraries for all Servers, click the library name you require.

242 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure 23-61 Library properties portlet

3. In the library’s properties portlet displayed in Figure 23-61, click the Volumes
option in the navigation list on the left hand side.
4. In the Volumes portlet, click the Select Action drop-down as seen in
Figure 23-62, select Add Volumes from the drop-down menu and click Go.

Figure 23-62 Add volumes drop-down

Chapter 23. Administration Center 243

 5. The Add volumes wizard is then launched, as shown in Figure 23-63.

Figure 23-63 Add volumes wizard

244 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 6. Select whether volumes are already labelled or not labelled.
7. Choose how the library should search for the volumes using the Volume
Search Options element of the wizard shown in Figure 23-64.

Figure 23-64 Add volumes labelling details

Chapter 23. Administration Center 245

 8. Choose how to label and check in the volumes. Note that overwrite is not
enabled by default, as shown in Figure 23-65.

Figure 23-65 Label and check in volumes

246 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 9. Accept or change the value for waiting for a volume to be mounted. The
default value is 60 minutes, as seen in Figure 23-66. More details regarding
the Wait time value can be found in 3.4.3, “Check-in and check-out
enhancements” on page 43.

Figure 23-66 Set waittime for mounts

10.The wizard process is completed once the Finish button is clicked, and the
final window is displayed, as shown next in Figure 23-67.
11.After that, clicking the Server Processes navigation option will allow you to
check the process status to ensure that the process has been completed. The
image in Figure 23-68 illustrates this.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 247

Figure 23-67 Discovery process started

Figure 23-68 Server process status

248 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.4.10 Tivoli Storage Manager Client remote access
Tivoli Storage Manager Client remote access is a useful tool that allows Tivoli
Storage Manager Administrators to restore or retrieve data on a remote node
without the need for the local user to be present.
1. Open the Policy Domains and Client Nodes portlet from the Navigation
Tree, as shown in Figure 23-69.

Figure 23-69 Policy Domains and Client Nodes

2. Select the server whose client you wish to access by clicking the appropriate
radio button.

Figure 23-70 Choose appropriate policy domain

Chapter 23. Administration Center 249

 3. Select the client’s policy domain by checking the radio button, as shown in
Figure 23-70.

Figure 23-71 Expand Client Nodes

250 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 4. Expand the Client Nodes element of the Domain properties portlet at the
bottom of the window, as shown in Figure 23-71.

Figure 23-72 Select node

5. Once the node is displayed, select its radio button, as shown in Figure 23-72.

Figure 23-73 Open drop-down menu

Chapter 23. Administration Center 251

 6. Scroll down the drop-down menu, select Launch Backup-archive Client...
as shown in Figure 23-73, and click Go.

Figure 23-74 Prompt for client password

252 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 7. The login dialog box will be presented for your requested client, as can be
seen in Figure 23-74. Enter the password if prompted and the Web client will
be opened, as shown in Figure 23-74.

Figure 23-75 Web client launched from Administration Center

Chapter 23. Administration Center 253

23.4.11 Creating a Management Class
This subject is covered as a part of Section 23.5, “Setting up LAN-free
operations” on page 254, and is also documented in the Administrator’s Guide in
the section entitled Quick paths to creating Tivoli Storage Manager objects.

23.4.12 Creating a Policy Domain

This subject is covered as a part of Section 23.5, “Setting up LAN-free
operations” on page 254 and is also documented in the Administrator’s Guide in
the section entitled Quick paths to creating Tivoli Storage Manager objects.

23.5 Setting up LAN-free operations

Setting up LAN-free operations is a complex task. This section documents the
manual tasks required to achieve this. There is also a wizard available which
guides you through this complex process.

23.5.1 Enable LAN-free Data Movement wizard

The steps required to reach the wizard are:
1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes.
2. Click the Server whose policy domain you wish to administer.
3. Click the Domain Name you wish to use for LAN-free operations which will
open the domainname Properties portlet.
4. Expand the Client Nodes element of the portlet to show a list of clients.
5. Select the client node for which you wish to use LAN-free data movement
using the Select radio button.
6. Open the drop-down menu, scroll down to Enable LAN-free Data
Movement... and click Go.

254 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 7. This launches the Enable LAN-free Data Movement wizard, as shown in
Figure 23-76.

Figure 23-76 Enable LAN-free Data Movement wizard

8. Stepping through the wizard performs all the Server-side tasks to enable
LAN-free data movement.

Note: On the final Summary window, as shown in Figure 23-77, the wizard
shows which supplemental tasks need to be performed on the client node to
complete the process.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 255

 Figure 23-77 Wizard summary

23.5.2 Manually enabling LAN-free data movement

With the Administration Center, you can perform the tasks necessary to set up
LAN-free data transfer between Server and Client. The phases on the Server
side are as follows:
򐂰 Prepare the server for enterprise management.
򐂰 Define the Storage Agent as a server.
򐂰 Define paths to the storage devices.
򐂰 Set up the storage pool.
򐂰 Define the policy and point to the LAN-free storage pool.
򐂰 Create a new Management Class.
򐂰 Validate your LAN-free setup.

256 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.5.3 Prepare the server for enterprise management
To prepare the Server for enterprise management, follow these steps:
1. Click Enterprise Management in the Navigation Tree of the Work Items
Navigation tab shown in Figure 23-78.

Figure 23-78 Setup the Enterprise Configuration

2. Select the server you wish to set up enterprise configuration on.

3. Choose Set Up Enterprise Configuration... from the drop-down menu
shown in Figure 23-79, and click Go.

Figure 23-79 Select Set Up Enterprise Configuration...

4. The Setup Enterprise Configuration wizard portlet will then be displayed to

step you through the setup process. The first page of the wizard is shown in
Figure 23-80. Click Next to start the wizard.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 257

 Figure 23-80 Enterprise Configuration Wizard

5. Verify the data shown in the fields in Figure 23-81 and fill in the necessary
entries. Much of the setup may have already been done during the initial
server setup process.

Figure 23-81 Enterprise Configuration Wizard - General

258 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

6. Check the summary and click Next. The Summary will be displayed, as
shown in Figure 23-82.

Figure 23-82 Enterprise Configuration Wizard - Summary

Having completed the wizard, there are a couple of checks required to complete
this task.
7. To check or configure server-to-server communications, select
Server-to-Server Communication Settings... from the drop-down list, as
shown in Figure 23-83.

Figure 23-83 Enterprise Configuration - Server-to-Server Communication Settings

Chapter 23. Administration Center 259

 8. The Server-to-Server settings are shown, as shown in Figure 23-84.Clicking
in the Enable cross-definition check box means that if your server is defined
on another server, the other server will also be defined on yours.

Figure 23-84 Enterprise Configuration - Enable Cross Definition

9. Clicking OK will close the portlet.

You have now completed the first phase, Prepare the server for enterprise
management, and can continue to the next phase, which is Define the Storage
Agent as a server.

23.5.4 Define the Storage Agent as a server

Now you can define the Storage Agent as a server on your IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager server. In our case, the server is called POLONIUM1 and the Storage
Agent is called SA_CRETE.

260 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

To define the Storage Agent as a server, follow these steps:
1. Click Enterprise Management in the Navigation Tree of the Work Items
Navigation tab.
2. Click Enterprise Management to display the page shown in Figure 23-85.

Figure 23-85 Setup the Enterprise Configuration

3. Click the Server name or select View Enterprise Properties from the
drop-down menu to display the Servers and Server Groups Defined to
servername portlet.

Figure 23-86 Select the server for Enterprise Configuration

Chapter 23. Administration Center 261

 4. Click Servers in the Server and Server Groups Defined to servername
portlet shown in Figure 23-86.
5. Select Define Server ... from the drop-down menu shown in Figure 23-87,
and click Go.

Figure 23-87 Show all defined servers and select Define Servers

262 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 6. The Define Server wizard portlet will then be displayed to step you through
the setup process to define the Storage Agent as a server. The first page of
the wizard is shown in Figure 23-88.

Figure 23-88 Define Server Wizard introduction

Chapter 23. Administration Center 263

 7. Click Next to start the Wizard and the page shown in Figure 23-89 will be
displayed.

Figure 23-89 Define Server Wizard - General

264 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 8. Enter the Server name and Server password for the Storage Agent in the
appropriate fields. Confirm the password in the Verify password field. You
can also enter a description of your choice.

Figure 23-90 Define Server Wizard - Communications

Chapter 23. Administration Center 265

 9. The next step in the wizard shown in Figure 23-90 requires you to enter the
Communications parameters TCP/IP address and TCP/IP port. These ports
must match the defined TCP/IP address and port defined on the Storage
Agent.

Figure 23-91 Define Server Wizard - Virtual Volumes

266 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 10.Do not mark the check box Configure this server to store data for server
SERVERNAME using virtual volumes shown in the Figure 23-91. The
Storage Agent cannot perform this function.

Figure 23-92 Define Server Wizard - Summary

11.The Summary Pane shows that the wizard has successfully set up a server
definition, as shown in Figure 23-92. Click Next to complete the definition of
the new Server.

The phase, Define the Storage Agent as a server, has now been completed.
The next phase is Define the drive paths to the Storage Agent.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 267

23.5.5 Define paths to the storage devices
In order to define the paths for the storage devices in your LAN-free environment
follow these steps:
1. Click Storage Devices to display the Libraries for All Servers portlet.
2. Click in the Select radio button to select the library you wish to add the drive
paths to.
3. Select Modify Library from the drop-down menu as displayed in
Figure 23-93, and click Go.

Figure 23-93 Modify Library drop-down selected

268 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 4. In the Library properties portlet, click the Drive Paths tab to open the portlet,
as shown in Figure 23-94.

Figure 23-94 Library properties portlet

Chapter 23. Administration Center 269

 Choose Add Path ... from the drop-down menu illustrated in Figure 23-95 and
click Go.

Figure 23-95 Add path drop-down menu

5. Enter the Path details, device name, or special file of the device as it is known
to the Storage Agent, as shown in Figure 23-96. The drive name must
represent the drive the device name points to. The Source name is the name
of the Storage Agent you have already defined.

Figure 23-96 Enter path details

270 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 6. Check your input; the path must be online. Note the check indicating this in
the Online column shown in Figure 23-97.

Figure 23-97 Path successfully added

You have successfully completed the Define paths to the storage devices
phase. The next step in your task is to define a storage pool with a LAN-free
capable device class.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 271

23.5.6 Set up the storage pool
To create an additional storage pool, you use the Create a Storage Pool wizard.
To launch this wizard, follow these steps:
1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items List.
2. Click the Select radio button for the server you wish to add the storage pool
to.
3. Choose View Storage Pools ... from the drop-down menu, as shown in
Figure 23-98, and click Go.

Figure 23-98 View Storage Pools drop-down

272 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 4. You see a list of all defined storage pools, as shown in Figure 23-99. Choose
Create a Storage Pool...from the drop-down menu and click Go.

Figure 23-99 Create a Storage Pool drop-down

Chapter 23. Administration Center 273

 5. Enter a storage pool name and a description of your choice, as shown in
Figure 23-100. Choose the type of storage pool using the radio buttons. For
LAN-free data transfer, you can only use a primary sequential access storage
pool, so that option should be selected. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-100 Choose Storage pool name and type

274 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 6. Select a Device class from the Device class name drop-down list shown in
Figure 23-101. Ensure that this device class has LAN-free capability. Enter a
value for Maximum number of scratch volumes. Notice that there is the
option to define a Next storage pool, but this would be inappropriate in this
situation. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-101 Select a Device Class

Chapter 23. Administration Center 275

 7. Click Next to display the summary page of the Create a Storage Pool wizard,
as shown in Figure 23-102.

Figure 23-102 Successful completion of wizard

8. Clicking Finish will close the Summary page of the wizard.

You have successfully created a new storage pool for your LAN-free backups,
but this storage pool has no integrity checking, so you should enable CRC
checking. The next steps will achieve this:
9. In the Storage Devices portlet, you should still be able to see the Server you
have been modifying. Ensure that it is still selected by using the Select radio
button, and choose View Storage Pools... from the drop-down menu.

276 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

10.To update the LAN-free storage pool, select the storage pool using the Select
radio button, open the drop-down menu shown in Figure 23-103, select
Modify Storage Pool... and click Go, or click the storage pool shortcut.

Figure 23-103 Modify Storage Pool

Chapter 23. Administration Center 277

 11.Click the Advanced options tab of the storage pool properties
(servername) and activate CRC checking for this storage pool by clicking the
check box, Enable data validation using a cyclic redundancy check, as
shown in Figure 23-104.

Figure 23-104 Enable CRC checking for Storage Pool

You have now completed the Set Up the storage pool phase. The next phase is
Define the LAN-free policy.

23.5.7 Define the LAN-free policy

The next phase in your task is to define storage policies with a management
class that points to the LAN-free storage pool.

To create an additional storage pool, you use the Create a Storage Pool wizard
and follow these steps:
1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Item List.
2. Select View Policy Domains in the drop-down list and click Go.

278 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 3. Select Create a Policy Domain... from the drop-down menu, as shown in
Figure 23-105, and click Go.

Figure 23-105 Define Policy Domain

4. The wizard should now be displayed. The first page of the wizard is shown in
Figure 23-106.

Figure 23-106 Define Policy Domain Wizard

Chapter 23. Administration Center 279

 5. Enter a policy domain name and a description of your choice. Enter Backup
retention and Archive retention values. In most cases the default values
should suffice.
6. Choose your LAN-free storagepool either Storage pool for backup data or
Storage pool for archive data or both from the drop-down lists, as shown in
Figure 23-107.

Figure 23-107 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Storage pools

280 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 7. Select the Yes radio button to assign clients to the policy domain
immediately, as shown in Figure 23-108.

Figure 23-108 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Assign client nodes

Chapter 23. Administration Center 281

 8. When assigning client nodes that use the Storage Agent, you can View all
client nodes or use the search facility in the View client nodes that match
your conditions radio button. This field supports wildcards, as shown in
Figure 23-109.

Figure 23-109 Define Policy Domain Wizard - View client nodes

282 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 9. You are then presented with a list of all clients that match your wildcard
definition as displayed in Figure 23-110. Select the node you wish to add to
the policy domain using the check box and click Next.

Figure 23-110 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Select client nodes

Chapter 23. Administration Center 283

 10.In the Summary you will be provided with an overview of all definitions
created, as shown in Figure 23-111. Confirm and close by clicking the Finish
button.

Figure 23-111 Define Policy Domain Wizard - Summary

You have now successfully defined a new policy domain and assigned nodes to
it. You have also created a management class with the name standard, as well
as standard attributes for backup, archive, and space management.

This management class is assigned as the default management class. You can
decide whether to use this as the default, or define a new management class
with different values.

284 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.5.8 Create a new management class
You define a new management class by using the Create Management Class
wizard as detailed in the following steps:
1. From the Policy Domains portlet opened during the previous phase, select
the policy domain you wish to add the Management Class to.
2. Choose Management Classes from the Policy Domains Properties portlet
by clicking the expansion icon shown at the bottom of Figure 23-112.

Figure 23-112 Policy Domains Properties - Define a new Management Class

Chapter 23. Administration Center 285

 3. Choose Create Management Class... from the drop-down menu and click
Go, as shown in Figure 23-113.

Figure 23-113 Create a Management Class drop-down

286 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 4. The Create Management Class wizard appears, as shown in Figure 23-114.
Enter a Name for your new management class and a Description in the
appropriate fields. If the description spreads across several lines, you can use
the up and down buttons to scroll this field. Click Next to continue.

Figure 23-114 Create Management Class Wizard

Chapter 23. Administration Center 287

 5. The wizard then provides you with the Backup Settings page, shown in
Figure 23-115, to enter the appropriate values. From the pull-down menu, you
can select the destination storage pool for LAN-free data transfer. Click Next
to continue.

Figure 23-115 Create Management Class Wizard - Backup settings

288 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 6. The Backup Versions page, shown in Figure 23-116, provides you with the
ability to control how many versions of a backup file to keep in storage, and
how to manage versions for files deleted from their original location on the
node. Click Next to continue the wizard.

Figure 23-116 Create Management Class Wizard - Backup versions

Chapter 23. Administration Center 289

 7. You enter the appropriate archive settings in the Archive Settings page of
the wizard. From the drop-down menu select the destination storage pool for
your LAN-free archives, as shown in Figure 23-117. Once the settings are
entered, click Next to continue.

Figure 23-117 Create Management Class Wizard - Archive settings

290 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 8. You can also enter the settings for space management, if the HSM
component is installed and activated on your IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Clients, and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Space Management is licensed.
This page is shown in Figure 23-118. Click Next to display the Summary
Page of the wizard.

Figure 23-118 Create Management Class Wizard - HSM Settings

Chapter 23. Administration Center 291

 9. On the Summary page, shown below in Figure 23-119, you are provided with
an overview of all the settings you have entered. To confirm and close the
wizard, click the Finish button.

Figure 23-119 Create Management Class Wizard - Summary

You have successfully finished the steps required to define a new management
class. Your final phase in the process is Validating your LAN-free setup.

292 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.5.9 Validating your LAN-free setup
To confirm that the LAN-free capability is working, there is a new Tivoli Storage
Manager Version 5.3 command:
validate lanfree

The first result of this command may look like Figure 23-120.

Figure 23-120 Validate LAN-free configuration with command

The result shows an error. In this case the Library is not LAN-free enabled
because it was not defined with shared=yes.

In order to enable LAN-free capability on your Tivoli Storage Manager Server,

follow these steps:
1. Open the Storage Devices portlet by clicking it in the Navigation Tab.
2. Click your library to view the libraryname Properties portlet.
3. In the General tab, ensure that the check box Share this Library is checked,
as shown in Figure 23-121, then click Apply and OK.
4. You have successfully enabled the LAN-free capability for your library.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 293

Figure 23-121 Library Properties - enable library sharing

If you check your definitions again, by entering the command validate lanfree,
you should see the following successful output, as shown in Figure 23-122.

Figure 23-122 Validate LAN-free after activation of library sharing

294 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 In our example, only management class MC_FS_LANFREE can perform a
LAN-free backup or archive. To use this Management class you can either
assign it as the default or insert an appropriate include statement in the client’s
option file, as shown in Figure 23-1.

Example 23-1 Select a Management class - include/exclude statement in dsm.opt

include *:/.../* MC_FS_LANFREE

23.5.10 Enabling Health Monitoring

Health Monitoring depends on the Tivoli Storage Manager Server Administrator
account ADMIN_CENTER. This account is locked by default and needs to be
unlocked and enabled to ensure that Health Monitoring works.

Important: The ADMIN_CENTER account should be administered by only

one Tivoli Storage Manager administrator. Using multiple Administration
Center users allows the ADMIN_CENTER password to be changed by any of
those users. Ensure that the password is known to all of your Administrators
so that it does not become locked.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 295

 Ensure that the ADMIN_CENTER account is enabled by checking the
Administrator account:
1. Open a view of your IBM Tivoli Storage Manager server that allows the use of
the drop-down menu option Server Properties, as shown in Figure 23-123.

Figure 23-123 Server Properties view showing Administrators

2. In the Server Properties portlet, select Administrators.

3. Check the check box adjacent to the ADMIN_CENTER account and select
the Modify Administrator from the drop-down menu.
4. Update the password if necessary and ensure that the Lock check box is
NOT checked, as shown in Figure 23-124.

296 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Figure 23-124 Ensure account is not locked

Enabling Health Monitoring:

1. Open the Administration Center in the ISC.
2. Click Health Monitoring in the Navigation Tree.
3. Select Configure Health Monitoring in the drop-down menu in the Health
Monitor portlet, as shown in Figure 23-125.

Figure 23-125 Configure Health Monitor

Chapter 23. Administration Center 297

 4. Enter the password and refresh interval to enable the Health Monitor, as
shown in Figure 23-126.

Figure 23-126 Enter password and refresh interval

5. Click OK to complete.
6. The status of your Tivoli Storage Manager Server is displayed, as shown in
Figure 23-127 by clicking Health Monitor in the Navigation Tree.

Figure 23-127 Health monitor drop-down selection

298 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 7. Select the Health Monitor drop-down to display more details, as shown in
Figure 23-128.

Figure 23-128 Health monitor details

The expanded view of the Health Monitor as seen in Figure 23-129 provides
further access to Schedule Information events, Server database, and Recovery
log management functions, Activity log viewer with date and message type filters
and Storage Device status.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 299

Figure 23-129 Expanded view of Health Monitor Details

300 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

23.5.11 Favorites
Adding pages to the Favorites drop-down allows quick access to pages or
portlets which are most often used.

Using Favorites allows a meaningful view of your Tivoli Storage Manager

Servers to be displayed. This is useful for monitoring large environments or
complex installations. See Figure 23-130.

Figure 23-130 Favorites drop-down list

Favorites can also be managed using the Organize Favorites drop-down menu
item. Items can be edited to provide more meaningful names or deleted as
required. See Figure 23-131.

Figure 23-131 Organize Favorites

Restriction: Some portlets can only be accessed by using drop-down and

selection combinations, so they do not display if added to the Favorites list.

Chapter 23. Administration Center 301

 Managing open pages
The maximum number of page links displayed in the Administration Center is
five. If you have more pages open, you can jump to those pages using the
navigation buttons on the Navigation Bar. See Figure 23-132.

Figure 23-132 Zoomed view of navigation buttons

These pages can also be managed using the right-hand button in Figure 23-133.

Figure 23-133 Manage pages in Page Navigation Bar

The pages can be closed using the Close page tab removing them from the page
cache bar or navigated to using the Display page tab.

Note: Only five pages are displayed on the page bar at a time. More pages
can be displayed and navigated to using the direction arrows but there may be
a performance hit as well as making navigation between pages more complex.

23.5.12 Protecting the ISC Server

It is recommended that you back up your ISC server in order to protect your IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager environment from disaster.

You should treat the ISC Server as if it were another IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
server, since it provides the Administrative interface to control your Tivoli Storage
Manager Server installation. More detail is provided in the Integrated Solutions
Console and Administration Center readme documentation.

302 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 24

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting

This chapter describes Operational Reporting, which was introduced with the
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.2.2 Server code.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 303

24.1 Introduction
The IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting feature automates some
of the monitoring tasks you typically perform manually. By generating reports and
monitors, Operational Reporting notifies you if a server requires attention.

Operational reports can be scheduled to run daily and are generated even if
there are no problems. Operational monitors are special types of reports, and
can be scheduled to run hourly. The monitors will send you a notification only if
there are issues. Operational Reporting does not maintain a separate database
of information and is not a trending tool.

Operational Reporting is included as part of the Tivoli Storage Manager for

Windows server and is also available as a stand-alone package for a Windows
server. For information on installing the stand-alone package, see “Installing the
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting Stand-alone Package” in the
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Administrator’s Guide.

24.1.1 Functions
Operational Reporting is administered through the Microsoft Management
Console on a Windows machine. All platforms of IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
servers, Version 5.1.8 or Version 5.2.2 and later, are supported. Operational
Reporting runs as a service and supports multiple Tivoli Storage Manager
servers running on a single machine.

An operational report consists of the following parts: a standard report, a

customized summary, and optional extensions that you can create. You can
select which sections to include in the report. The Operational Reporting
installation package contains two default custom summary templates: one for a
report and one for a monitor.

Default e-mail messages will notify you if the server is running smoothly, or if
there are issues such as failed or missed schedules. You can also link to a Web
summary page to check operational reports about your server. An operational
monitor will notify you either through e-mail or by sending an instant message to
your Windows desktop. Operational Reporting can write data to a file which can
be read by a Tivoli Enterprise™ Console log file adapter. The log file adapter
reads the information and forwards it to the Tivoli Enterprise Console®.

304 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

24.1.2 Using IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting
A Tivoli Storage Manager server must be running in order to generate reports
and monitors. These can be sent to multiple users such as server administrators
or managers. If there are problems, they appear at the beginning of the report
along with recommendations on how to fix them. Any issues in the report are
followed by the standard section, custom summary, a timing section, and any
optional extensions. Monitors do not contain standard sections and typically run
more quickly and frequently.

Reports and monitors have default values. Reports and monitors can run
simultaneously and can either be scheduled or run as needed. They allow you to
flag issues by specifying notification rules in the custom summary section. If a
threshold in a notification rule is met, you will be notified.

Reports and monitors include a timing section, which can help you determine
performance problems. For example, if a report or monitor seems to be running
slowly, you can use the timing section to identify where the time is being spent,
and you can eliminate or optimize a section accordingly.

24.1.3 MMC Plugin

Operational Reporting is administered using the Microsoft Management Console
plugin interface, as shown in Figure 24-1.

Figure 24-1 MMC View showing Operational Reporting elements

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting 305

 A default report can be created by right-clicking the Operational Reports icon and
clicking New from the menu. Selecting all sections for the report means a large
amount of detail will be gleaned from your IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server.
You can add e-mail recipients for the whole report and/or automatic notification
recipients for failed or missed schedules.

24.1.4 Creating a default Daily Report

Creating a default Daily Report is a straightforward process of following the steps
below, where the defaults have been chosen. Further information can be
obtained by selecting all Report Sections in the Report Details section of the
Properties box.
1. Open the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Management Console and expand the
Tivoli Storage Manager Server icon, as shown in Figure 24-2.

Figure 24-2 MMC view of Tivoli Storage Manager Server - Reports

306 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

2. Right-clicking the Operational Reports icon after expanding the MMC view
produces a menu as shown in Figure 24-3.

Figure 24-3 Right click menu

3. Click New to open the dialog box shown in Figure 24-4.

Figure 24-4 Enter Report name

4. Accept the default name or enter a new one.

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting 307

 5. Choose the Report Sections for the report. The Select all button can be used
to ensure that all sections will be reported on. See Figure 24-5.

Figure 24-5 Select Report Sections for report

6. Once you have selected all the Report Sections, you could click OK and use
this standard report without forwarding it to any recipients. It would then only
be accessible to anyone with access to the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
Administration Console.

308 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

7. Figure 24-6 shows the dialog box with the E-mail Recipients tab active. Here
you can add e-mail recipients as required.

Figure 24-6 Add E-mail recipients

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting 309

 8. You can choose recipients to automatically notify for specific nodes. This is
useful if certain node backups are managed by other members of your IBM
Tivoli Storage Manager administration team. The interface is illustrated in
Figure 24-7.

Figure 24-7 Choose Automatic Notification recipients for specific nodes

9. Clicking OK completes the process.

310 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 The top of a daily report is shown in Figure 24-8: Further information is provided
further down on the page, but the most important details are shown at the top,
using different colors to highlight any issues.

Figure 24-8 Top part of Daily Report with highlighted errors

24.1.5 Creating a default Hourly Monitor

Creating a default Hourly Report is also a straightforward process of following the
steps below where the defaults have been chosen. Further information can be
obtained by selecting all Report Sections:
1. Right-click the Operational Monitors icon and select New from the menu.
2. Enter a name or accept the default and click OK as shown in Figure 24-9.

Figure 24-9 Create new Hourly Monitor

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting 311

 3. The default selection is shown in Figure 24-10 and will give a general
overview of your Server, showing:
– Client Schedules Missed
– Percentage Database Utilization
– Percentage Maximum Recovery Log Utilization
– Percentage Disk Pool Utilization
– Number of offline drives
– Number of scratch volumes

Figure 24-10 Monitor details

312 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

4. Add E-mail recipients as shown in Figure 24-11.

Figure 24-11 E-mail recipient information

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting 313

 5. Further recipients can be informed using the Net Send Recipients tab for
instant notification of any issue reported by the hourly report as shown in
Figure 24-12.

Figure 24-12 Net send recipients

Note: Using the Net Send Recipients option relies on the Messenger service
to work. Many Windows administrators have disabled this service.

Once all of these steps have been completed, you should have a quick glance
view of your IBM Tivoli Storage Manager environment’s health using either the
Hourly Monitor or Daily Report. You can modify what information is provided in
these reports, so check if the information in the default reports, or those where all
Report Sections have been selected, is relevant. You may find the reports run
more quickly and provide less complex views of your environment if you deselect
some of the sections, but be aware that this will also mean that less of your
environment will be monitored.

314 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Further information on Operational Reporting can be obtained from the following
sources:

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3 for Windows Administrator’s Guide:

See the following sections:

򐂰 “Generating a Comprehensive Report at Regular Intervals”
򐂰 “Generating a Comprehensive Monitor at Regular Intervals”
򐂰 “Completing the Set Up” IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows:
Administrator’s Guide
򐂰 “Installing the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting Stand-alone
Package”
򐂰 “Generating Reports and Monitors from the Command Line”

Integrating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting with Event

Management - REDP-3850-00:
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/redp3850.html

Note: With the new Accurate SAN Device Mapping enhancement, there are
new messages now reported, relating to device serial number changes.

The following number ranges are for messages related to serial numbers:

ANR8952 through ANR8958

ANR8961 through ANR8967

See 3.2.1, “Accurate SAN device mapping” on page 28.

Chapter 24. Operational Reporting 315

316 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 Part 5

Part 5 Appendixes
This part of the book provides helpful hints and tips, quick paths, wizards,
frequently asked questions, and tables summarizing changes and
enhancements for the various versions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 317

318 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 A

Appendix A. Hints and tips

This appendix provides several useful hints and tips.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 319

Comparison of options
virtualnodename/fromnode/asnodename
Here we describe the differences between the client options virtualnodename,
fromnode, and asnodename. Table A-1 illustrates the different functions available
with each option.

For more details for each option, please see the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5.3
UNIX and Linux Backup-Archive Clients Installation and User's Guide.

Table A-1 Functions available - virtualnodename, fromnode, and asnodename

Function virtualnodename fromnode asnodename

Backup X X

Archive X X

Restore X X X

Retrieve X X X

Password required or not

With each option, authentication is handled differently:
virtualnodename When the virtual node name is accepted by the server, a
password is required (assuming authentication is on), even if
the passwordaccess option is generate.
The advantage of using the virtualnodename option over
changing the nodename is that the password prompted for is
not saved on the system.
fromnode The fromnode option permits one node to perform
commands for another node. A user on another node must
use the set access command to permit you to query,
restore, or retrieve files or images for that other node.
Because access has to be granted to a given node, you are
not prompted for a password. You limited to the query,
restore, and retrieve operations which are non-destructive to
the original node data.
asnodename Use the asnodename option to allow agent nodes to back up
or restore data on behalf of another node (the target node).
Your client node must be granted access to the target node
by the Tivoli Storage Manager server grant proxynode
command. Authentication is then based on the nodename
using the asnodename option.

320 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Example scenarios of when to use which option
To help you identify in which situation which option is appropriate, we now
describe some scenarios for which you might want to use the various options.

virtualnodename
Before selectively restoring data of another node on a workstation, or backing up
data under a different node name, it was common practice to edit the
dsm.opt/dsm.sys file and change the nodename. After performing the operation,
the nodename was changed back. The downside to this is, that the password for
that node is saved locally (when passwordaccess generate is defined). So this is
when virtualnodename should be used, because it prompts you for a password
without saving it.

fromnode
A scenario where you might use the fromnode option is when giving several
nodes access to your data, by using the set access command, and not having to
worry about anything, because they only have the right to query, restore or
retrieve the data.

In a way, this could also be used as a vehicle to perform software distribution. In

combination with a script, you could start the setup after the restore.

asnodename

Attention: Ensure that local filesystems of different systems are not

accidentally merged when using the ASNODENAME option. This would lead
to unpredictable results when restoring a system.

The following examples are also included in the UNIX documentation. Please
note that this multi-node design can only be exploited as described in a UNIX
environment. The virtualmountpoint client option is not available to Windows or
NetWare clients, and their filespace naming includes the UNC name of the
machine making asnodename less practical in a Windows/Netware environment.

Scheduling example for backing up a GPFS filesystem:

An illustration of a GPFS cluster is shown in Figure A-1. The GPFS team has
written a routine which performs the following functions on a GPFS file system: It
scans the entire file system for inode changes, creates a list of files that have
changed, and then parcels out the list of files to (1 - n) IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Backup-Archive client nodes to move the data.

Appendix A. Hints and tips 321

 node_1 node_2 node_3

ASNODE:
node_gpfs

/fs1
/fs2
/fs3

GPFS /fs1
/fs2
/fs3

GPFS-Cluster IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

Figure A-1 Cluster using GPFS and ASNODENAME

Each client node authenticates with the server as the same node name, for
example, node_gpfs. This is done by having a dsm.sys file on each machine with
an entry:
nodename node_gpfs

The problem with this solution is that the password expiration cannot be
managed automatically. If there are three nodes in the GPFS cluster, each node
knows the password to node_gpfs. If the server expires the password, then one
node will reset the password and the other two will no longer be able to
authenticate. The only solution to this is to either turn node authentication off at
the Tivoli Storage Manager server or to manually reset the password and
manually update all three nodes with the new password.

The Tivoli Storage Manager scheduler is not currently used in this solution but it
can be easily seen that there could be a single schedule for node_gpfs which
executes the file system scan / workload creating from one client machine via a
macro. This schedule would be associated with one of the three nodes only, for
example, node_1.

A better solution can be realized with multi-node support. Using the example of
three nodes in the GPFS cluster which would participate in the backup:

322 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

1. Define four nodes on the Tivoli Storage Manager server: node_1, node_2,
node_3 and node_gpfs. node_1, node_2 and node_3 are only used for
authentication; all filespaces are stored with node_gpfs.
REGISTER NODE node_1 mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE node_2 mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE node_3 mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE node_gpfs mysecretpw
2. Define a proxynode relationship between the nodes:
GRANT PROXYNODE TARGET=node_gpfs AGENT=node_1, node_2, node_3
3. Define the node name and asnode name for each of the machines in their
respective dsm.sys files:
nodename node_1
asnodename node_gpfs
4. Optionally define a schedule for only node_1 to do the work:
DEFINE SCHEDULE STANDARD GPFS_SCHEDULE ACTION=MACRO
OBJECTS="gpfs_script"
DEFINE ASSOCIATION STANDARD GPFS node_gpfs
5. On node node_gpfs, execute the schedule:
DSMC SCHED

Another way to back up GPFS is to use Tivoli Storage Manager to look for the
incremental changes. The GPFS file system can be divided into three branches
and each branch statically assigned to each node using the virtualmountpoint
option. Assume a file system called /gpfs with three branches /gpfs/branch_1,
/gpfs/branch_2, and /gpfs/branch_3:
1. Define four nodes on the Tivoli Storage Manager server: node_1, node_2,
node_3 and node_gpfs. node_1, node_2 and node_3 are only used for
authentication; all filespaces are stored with node_gpfs.
REGISTER NODE node_1 mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE node_2 mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE node_3 mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE node_gpfs mysecretpw
2. Define a proxynode relationship between the nodes:
GRANT PROXYNODE TARGET=node_gpfs AGENT=node_1,node_2,node_3
3. Define the node name (not the asnodename!), virtualmountpoint, and domain
for each of the three machines in their respective dsm.sys files:
nodename node_1
virtualmountpoint /gpfs/branch_1
domain /gpfs/branch_1

Appendix A. Hints and tips 323

 Note: The user does not want to define asnodename in the options file. In
this case the asnodename must come on the schedule so that each one of
the nodes can have it's own schedule associated with its real node name.

4. Define a schedule for all nodes: node_1, node_2 and node_3

DEFINE SCHEDULE STANDARD GPFS_SCHEDULE
OPTIONS="-asnode=node_gpfs"
DEFINE ASSOCIATION STANDARD GPFS node_1,node_2,node_3
5. Start the scheduler on the three nodes:
DSMC SCHED

Scheduling example for backing up an HACMP cluster

Consider an example where HACMP is configured for two AIX hosts, host_a and
host_b. Along with their own local data, the hosts are sharing SSA storage which
has two filespaces: /ssa1 and /ssa2.

The CLUSTERNODE example shows how the CLUSTERNODE option is used

in a current HACMP environment (this is informational only to contrast the
example of using ASNODENAME below):
1. Define three nodes on the Tivoli Storage Manager server: host_a, host_b,
cluster_group
REGISTER NODE host_a mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE host_b mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE cluster_group mysecretpw
2. Define a dsm.opt file on host_a and host_b (note that the opt files are different
on each host):
NODENAME host_a (option can be left as default)
DOMAIN /home /usr ... etc.
3. Define a dsm.opt file located somewhere on one of the cluster disk groups,
for example, /ssa1/tsm/dsm.opt,
NODENAME cluster_group
DOMAIN /ssa1 /ssa2
CLUSTERNODE YES
4. Define a schedule on the Tivoli Storage Manager server:
DEFINE SCHEDULE STANDARD CLUSTER_BACKUP
5. Define associations for each of the three nodes:
DEFINE ASSOC STANDARD CLUSTER_BACKUP host_a,host_b,cluster_group

324 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

6. At any one time, there are three instances of the Backup-Archive client
schedule running (with the scheduler for cluster_group being part of the
cluster resources that will failover whenever the cluster group disk resources
failover. Thus, it would be running on either host_a or host_b but not both
simultaneously)
7. All three node names will contain data on the Tivoli Storage Manager server

The ASNODE example shows how this can be configured without the use of
CLUSTERNODE; this is a generic solution which could be applied to UNIX
cluster solutions, for example, Veritas Cluster Server for Solaris.
1. Define 3 nodes on the Tivoli Storage Manager server: host_a, host_b,
cluster_group
REGISTER NODE host_a mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE host_b mysecretpw
REGISTER NODE cluster_group mysecretpw
2. Define a proxy node relationship between host_a and host_b to cluster_group
GRANT PROXYNODE TARGET=cluster_group AGENT=host_a,host_b
3. Define a dsm.opt file on host_a and host_b to handle the local file systems:
NODENAME host_a (option can be left as default)
DOMAIN /home /usr ... etc.

NODENAME host_b (option can be left as default)

DOMAIN /home /usr ... etc.
4. Define a dsm.opt file on the cluster resource to handle the backup of the
clustered resources, for example, /ssa1/tsm/dsmcluster.opt (note the
nodename will be the default nodename which will either be host_a or host_b
depending on which machine contains the cluster group at any given time):
DOMAIN /ssa1 /ssa2
ASNODE cluster_group
5. Define a schedule on the Tivoli Storage Manager server:
DEFINE SCHEDULE STANDARD CLUSTER_BACKUP
6. Define associations for each one of the 3 nodes.
DEFINE ASSOC STANDARD CLUSTER_BACKUP host_a,host_b,cluster_group
7. At any one time, there are three instances of the Backup-Archive client
schedule running with the scheduler for node hacmp_cluster running on
either host_a or host_b but not both (it is included in the cluster resources that
would failover). This scheduler would point to the dsmcluster.opt that is
defined on each host. The three instances would be started as:

Appendix A. Hints and tips 325

 [host_a] dsmc sched
[host_b] dsmc sched
[cluster_group] dsmc sched -optfile=/ssa/tsm/dsmcluster.opt
8. All three node names will contain data on the Tivoli Storage Manager server

Note: The multiple node design as described above can only be exploited in a
UNIX environment and not on Windows and Netware Systems. The
asnodename option is available on Windows systems, but there is not as much
benefit in using this because of the filespace naming limitations inherent in
Windows systems.

Installation of the new Java GUI

With Version 5.3 of the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client for UNIX the old
Graphical User Interface (GUI), which was started with dsm, has been replaced
by the common Java GUI, which is started with dsmj.

Requirements:
򐂰 JRE 1.4.1 or higher
򐂰 Mozilla 1.4 with Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.4.1 or higher
(only for the Web Client)
򐂰 Set the system ulimit values to unlimited (-1) if restoring very large (2 GB) files
with HSM or the backup-archive client.
The Tivoli Storage Manager code can restore these large files with enough
system resources. There may be restore failures, though, if the ulimits are set
to lower values.

After the installation of the client code and setup for Backup-Archive Client, do
the following.
򐂰 Add the java binary directory to your PATH variable to /etc/environment.
export PATH=$PATH:<JAVA_BIN_DIR>
where JAVA_BIN_DIR is the path to the “java” executable, as shown in
Example A-1.

Example: A-1 Example of a PATH

PATH=/usr/bin:/etc:/usr/sbin:/usr/ucb:/usr/bin/X11:/sbin:/usr/java14_64/jre/bin
:/usr/java14_64/bin

From a UNIX shell prompt, start the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Java GUI by
typing dsmj. The command dsm no longer exists.
If you wish to use this command for compatibility reasons, you can perform the

326 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 following: create a symbolic link in /usr/bin which points from dsm to dsmj, as
shown in Example A-2.

Example: A-2 Creating symbolic link to dsm

#cd /usr/bin
#ln -s /usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmj dsm
#ls -lisa dsm*
6978 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 34 Nov 24 10:19 dsm ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmj
6970 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 37 Nov 24 08:55 dsmadmc ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmadmc
6968 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 38 Nov 24 08:55 dsmagent ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmagent
6969 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 34 Nov 24 08:55 dsmc ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmc
6967 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 36 Nov 24 08:55 dsmcad ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmcad
6975 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 33 Nov 24 09:49 dsmfmt ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/server/bin/dsmfmt
6972 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 41 Nov 24 08:55 dsmgpfs.drv
-> /usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmgpfs.drv
6533 0 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root system 34 Nov 24 08:55 dsmj ->
/usr/tivoli/tsm/client/ba/bin/dsmj

Reasons for restarting a Storage Agent

In most cases, it is no longer necessary to halt and restart a LAN-free Storage
Agent to pick up changes in the Data Manager server.

For example:

Changing the ExternalManager attribute of the path definition for an External

Library it is not necessary to stop and restart the Storage Agent.

For each new client session, the Storage Agent refreshes the Library and
associated path information on the Storage Agent. For Shared Libraries,
changes to the designated Primary Manager are reflected on the Storage Agent
when the next client session begins.

There are times, however, when the Storage Agent must be restarted to obtain
changes.

If the Server attributes of the Primary Library Manager for a Shared Library
change, restarting the Storage Agent is required to recognize these changes.
This would be necessary if the password or highlevel/lowlevel address of the

Appendix A. Hints and tips 327

 server definition were changed on the Data Manager server and the Storage
Agent is using that specific Library. The Storage Agent must also be restarted if
authorization is turned off on the Primary Library Manager.
򐂰 If the REName STGpool command is used on a LAN-free storage pool,
restarting the Storage Agent is required to discern this change.
򐂰 Deleting or deleting and redefining a LAN-free storage pool with the same
name but different attributes will not be reflected on the Storage Agent without
halting and restarting it.
򐂰 Updating storage pool attributes are not reflected on the Storage Agent.
Stopping and restarting the Storage Agent is required to pick-up the changes.

The effects on LAN-free storage pools outlined above are not critical enough to
cause serious problems. Storage pools, libraries, and device classes stored in
core memory on Storage Agents are used to determine potential LAN-free
destinations. Final arbitration and target volume selection occurs on the Data
Manager Server. Certain storage pool attribute updates may result in a failed
request rather than the desired LAN failover by the Storage Agent. If the Storage
Agent accurately predicts a LAN-free destination, the LAN-free operation will
most likely be successful. However if the Storage Agent inaccurately predicts
that a LAN-free destination exists and the server is unable to substantiate the
request the operation has advanced past the point where LAN failover will occur
and the storage request is unsuccessful.

Device driver on Windows 2003 Servers

Previous implementations of the Tivoli Storage Manager Device driver allowed a
wizard interface to be run to install the driver. With the latest implementation of
the Tivoli Storage Manager Device driver and Windows 2003 Servers this is no
longer the method employed to connect your devices.

Storage devices are automatically recognized by the Operating System and

Windows installs its own device drivers for this. These are not the correct Tivoli
Storage Manager drivers. Before installing your devices ensure that the
Removable Storage Service is disabled on your system.

To install the correct drivers, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Manager, locate the device to update and right-.click
2. Select Update Driver from the menu.

328 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Figure A-2 Install from specific location

3. Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next, as
shown in Figure A-2.
4. Select Don’t search, I will choose the driver to install and click Next again
as per Figure A-3

Figure A-3 Do not search for driver

5. Choose Tape Drives or Medium Changers as appropriate from the

hardware type list shown in Figure A-4and click Next

Appendix A. Hints and tips 329

 Figure A-4 Select device driver

6. In our example we are adding a Benchmark DLT1 Tape Drive so we chose

Benchmark in the Manufacturer pane and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for
Tape Drives in the Model pane.

Figure 24-13 First certification warning

7. Ignore the Windows logo testing warning shown in Figure 24-13 as this is not
a Microsoft driver
8. The Update Driver Warning is displayed again as this is an IBM driver but can
still be ignored. The warning is shown in Figure A-5 below.

Figure A-5 Final warning

330 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 9. Your device should now be successfully installed. If you have installed a tape
driver, all of your tape devices should be updated to ensure they are using the
correct Tivoli Storage Manager Device driver.
10.Repeat the above process for the Medium Changer using the IBM Tivoli
Storage Manager for Medium Changers version of the driver.

Tivoli Storage Manager should now correctly identify and access your devices.

Command line access

With the new Administration Center interface the ability to display the Command
Line prompt still exists but the steps to implement it are a little more complex.

Open a view of your Tivoli Storage Manager server in the Administration Center
such as the Enterprise Management view.

Select the server you wish to administer with the command line by clicking the
select radio button.

Appendix A. Hints and tips 331

 Click the Select Action drop down list and scroll down to Use Command Line.

Click Go to display the command line as a portlet, as shown in Figure A-6.

Figure A-6 Administration Center showing Command Line

332 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Perform a restore of another node on your own client
Here are examples of Node Access List, Access Another Node and View Policy
Information.

Node Access List

In order to allow other users access to your backup versions and archive copies,
you must first grant authority by selecting Utilities → Node Access List... from
the Web client interface. The window shown in Figure A-7 is displayed.

Figure A-7 Web client: Node access list

Appendix A. Hints and tips 333

 Then add a node for which you wish to grant access to your backed up or
archived filesystem or directory, as shown in Figure A-8.

Figure A-8 Web client: Granting access to another node for filespace or directory

334 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Having granted another node access to your filesystem or directory, this node is
added to the Node Access List illustrated in Figure A-9.

Figure A-9 Web client: Node access list with added node

Granting another node access to your filesystem or directory can also be

performed from the client command line. An example is shown in Example A-3.

Example: A-3 SET ACCESS and QUERY ACCESS

tsm> Set Access Backup \\klchl2m\c$\* CHICO
ANS1148I 'Set Access' command successfully completed
tsm> Set Access Backup \\klchl2m\c$\*\* CHICO
ANS1148I 'Set Access' command successfully completed
tsm> q ac
Type Node User Path
---- ----------------------------
Backup SARAH \\klchl2m\c$\*
Backup SARAH \\klchl2m\c$\*\*
Backup CHICO * \\klchl2m\c$\*
Backup CHICO * \\klchl2m\c$\*\*

ANS1148I 'Query Access' command successfully completed

tsm>

Appendix A. Hints and tips 335

 Now that node SARAH has been granted access by node RAPHAEL to his
filesystem, node SARAH can now restore or retrieve data with Access Another
Node... as described in the next section.

Access Another Node

In order to access information on the backup versions and archive copies of
another node and also to restore the backup versions or retrieve the archives
from the other user to your workstation, select Utilities → Access Another
Node... from the Web client interface. The dialog box is shown in Figure A-10.

Figure A-10 Web client: Access another node

You can then verify access to the data of another node by selecting File →
Connection Information, as shown in Figure A-11.

Figure A-11 Web client: checking Connection Information: Accessing As Node

336 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

When accessing another node’s data using the As Node functionality, clicking
Backup or Archive results in a warning message seen in Figure A-12. This is
because it only allows you to restore or retrieve data.

Figure A-12 Web client: Access another node: warning message

By clicking Restore, you can then restore the files of the other node, as shown in
Figure A-13.

Figure A-13 Access Another Node: Restore file list

Appendix A. Hints and tips 337

338 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 B

Appendix B. Quick paths to performing

tasks
This appendix contains tables giving you quick paths to performing common
tasks.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 339

Administrator
Table B-1 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning an administrator.

Table B-1 Administrator

Task Path

Add an administrator 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrators tab.
4. In the Administrators table, click Select Action, select
Add Administrator, and click Go.

Remove an 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

administrator 2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrators tab.
4. In the Administrators table, select an administrator.
5. Click Select Action, select Remove Administrator, and
click Go.

Grant an administrator 1. Click the Settings tab above the Work Items list.
access to the 2. In the Settings list, click User and Group Management.
Administration Center 3. In the Root table, click •all portal user groups•.
4. In the •all portal user groups• table, click
TSM_AdminCenter.
5. In the TSM_AdminCenter portlet, click New user.

Lock/unlock an 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

administrator 2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrators tab.
4. In the Administrators table, select an administrator.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Administrator, and
click Go.

Rename an 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

administrator 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrators tab.
4. In the Administrators table, select an administrator.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Administrator, and
click Go.

340 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Client node
Table B-2 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a client node.

Table B-2 Client node

Task Path

Lock/unlock a client 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work
node Items list.
2. In the Policy Domains table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Search for Client Node, and
click Go.
4. Click Update Table
5. In the Client Nodes table, click the name of a client node.
6. In the node’s properties notebook, click the Security tab.

Query the activity log 1. Click Health Monitor in the Work Items list.
for all messages about 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
a particular client node 3. In the server’s health information portlet, click Activity
Log.
4. In the Filter list, click No filter and select Client Node
Name.
5. In the Search string field, type the name of the client node.
6. Click Update Table.
The activity log can also be displayed from the server’s
properties notebook.

Database and database volumes

Table B-3 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning the database and
database volumes.

Table B-3 Database and database volumes

Task Path

Display overall status of 1. Click Health Monitor in the Work Items list.
the database 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s health information portlet, click Database
and Recovery Log Information.

Appendix B. Quick paths to performing tasks 341

 Task Path

Display details about 1. Click Health Monitor in the Work Items list.
database volumes, 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
including the status of 3. Click Select Action, select Server Properties, and click
mirror volumes Go.
4. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Database
and Log tab.
5. In the Database table, click the name of a volume.

Specify the size of the 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
database buffer pool 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Database
and Log tab.
4. In the Database table, select a database volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Database Properties, and
click Go.

Disk drives
Table B-4 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning disk drives.

Table B-4 Disk drives

Task Path

Vary disk drives online 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
and offline 2. In the Libraries table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties notebook, click the Drives tab.
4. In the Drives table, select a drive.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Drive, and click Go.

Expiration processes
Table B-5 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning the expiration
processes.

Table B-5 Expiration processes

Task Path

Specify the amount of 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
time between automatic 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
expiration processes 3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the General tab.

342 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

LAN-free data movement
Table B-6 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning LAN-free data
movement.

Table B-6 LAN-free data movement

Task Path

Enable LAN-free data 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work
movement Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains table, click the name of a
domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, select a client node.
6. Click Select Action, select Enable LAN-free Data
Movement, and click Go.

Library volumes
Table B-7 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning library volumes.

Table B-7 Library volumes

Task Path

Check in and label 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
volumes for a library 2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties notebook, click the Volumes tab.
4. In the Volumes table, click Select Action, select Add
Volumes, and click Go.

Check out volumes 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
from a library 2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties notebook, click the Volumes tab.
4. In the Volumes table, click Select Action, select Check
Out Volumes, and click Go.

Network-attached storage (NAS) file server

Table B-8 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a network-attached
storage (NAS) file server.

Appendix B. Quick paths to performing tasks 343

 Table B-8 Network-attached storage (NAS) file server
Task Path

Protect a 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

network-attached 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
storage (NAS) file 3. Click Select Action, select View Data Movers, and click
server Go.
4. In the server’s data movers table, click Select Action,
select Create NAS Data Mover, and click Go.

Schedule NDMP 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

backups for NAS file 2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
servers 3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrative Schedules tab.
4. Click Select Action, select Create a Schedule, and click
Go.

Restore session
Table B-9 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a restore session.

Table B-9 Restore session

Task Path

Specify the maximum 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
life of a restartable 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
restore session 3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the General tab.

Script
Table B-10 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a script.

Table B-10 Script

Task Path

Create a server script 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Scripts tab.
4. In the Scripts table, click Select Action, select Create
Script, and click Go.

344 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Task Path

Modify a server script 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Scripts tab.
4. In the Scripts table, select a script.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Script, and click Go.

Create a script that 1. Click Server Maintenance in the Work Items list.
performs key 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
maintenance tasks 3. Click Select Action, select Create a Maintenance Script,
and click Go.

Run a script 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Scripts tab.
4. In the Scripts table, select a script.
5. Click Select Action, select Run Script, and click Go.

Server
Table B-11 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a server.

Table B-11 Server

Task Path

Rename a server 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Remove Server Connection,
and click Go.
4. Click Select Action, select Add Server Connection, and
click Go.

Create a schedule for a 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
server (administrative 2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
schedule) 3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrative Schedules tab.
4. In the Schedules table, click Select Action, select Create
a Schedule, and click Go.

Modify a schedule for a 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
server (administrative 2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
schedule) 3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrative Schedules tab.
4. In the Schedules table, select a schedule.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Schedule, and click
Go.

Appendix B. Quick paths to performing tasks 345

 Task Path

Issue a command to a 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

server from the 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
command line 3. Click Select Action, select Use Command Line, and click
Go.
The command line is also available from the Servers tables
that are displayed by clicking the following items in the Work
Items list:
- Health Monitor
- Enterprise Management
- Policy Domains and Client Nodes
- Server Maintenance

Set up one server as 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
the configuration 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
manager for other, 3. Click Select Action, select Set Up Enterprise
managed servers Configuration, and click Go.

Set up server-to-server Part A:

communication 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Server-to-Server
Communication Settings, and click Go.
Part B:
1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the servers and server groups portlet, click Servers.
4. In the Servers table, click Select Action, select Define
Server, and click Go.

Server group
Table B-12 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a server group.

Table B-12 Server group

Task Path

Create a server group 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the servers and server groups portlet, click Server
Groups.
4. In the Server Groups table, click Select Action, select
Create a Server Group, and click Go.

346 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Storage device
Table B-13 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a storage device.

Table B-13 Storage device

Task Path

Add a new storage 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
device for the server to 2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
use 3. Click Select Action, select Add a Storage Device, and
click Go.
The wizard helps you to create a library, drives, paths, a
device class, and storage pools for the device.

View the status of a 1. Click Health Monitor in the Work Items list.
storage device 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s health information portlet, click Storage
Device Status.

Storage pool
Table B-14 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning a storage pool.

Table B-14 Storage pool

Task Path

Display information 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

about a storage pool 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
volume 3. Click Select Action, select View Storage Pools, and click
Go.
4. In the server’s Storage Pools table, click the name of a
storage pool.
5. In the storage pool’s properties notebook, click the
Volumes tab.

Rename a storage pool 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Storage Pools, and click
Go.
4. In the server’s Storage Pools table, select a storage pool.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Storage Pool, and
click Go.

Appendix B. Quick paths to performing tasks 347

Volume history
Table B-15 shows quick paths to performing tasks concerning volume history.

Table B-15 Volume history

Task Path

Display volume history 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Volume History, and
click Go.

Modify volume history 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Volume History, and
click Go.
4. In the Volumes table, select a volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Volume History, and
click Go.

Backup volume history 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Volume History, and
click Go.
4. In the Volumes table, select a volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Backup Volume History, and
click Go.

348 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 C

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM

Tivoli Storage Manager
objects
This appendix contains convenient path references for quickly creating and
modifying objects.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 349

Administrator
Table C-1 shows the quick paths for the administrator.

Table C-1 Administrator

Task Path

Create 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Server Properties, and click Go.
4. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Administrators tab.
5. In the table, click Select Action, select Add Administrator, and click
Go.

View and modify 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Server Properties, and click Go.
4. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Administrators tab.
5. In the table, select an administrator.
6. Click Select Action, select Modify Administrator, and click Go.

Backup Set
Table C-2 shows the quick paths for the Backup Set.

Table C-2 Backup Set

Task Path

Create 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s policy domains table, click a name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, click the name of a node.
6. In the node’s properties notebook, click the Backup Sets tab.
7. In the Backup Sets table, click Select Action, select Generate
backup set, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s policy domains table, click a name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, click the name of a node.
6. In the node’s properties notebook, click the Backup Sets tab.
7. In the Backup Sets table, select a backup set.
8. Click Select Action, select Modify Backup set, and click Go.

350 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Client node (including its file spaces)
Table C-3 shows the quick paths for the client node and its file spaces.

Table C-3 Client node including file spaces

Task Path

Create 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click a domain name.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client Nodes.
5. In the table, click Select Action, select Create a Client Node, and
click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click a domain name.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client Nodes.
5. In the table, select a node name.
6. In the table, click Select Action, select Modify Client Node, and click
Go.

Data Mover
Table C-4 shows the quick paths for the Data Mover.

Table C-4 Data Mover

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. Click Select Action, select View Data Mover, and click Go.
4.In the server’s data movers portlet, click Select Action, select Create
NAS Data Mover, and click Go.

View and modify 1.Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Data Mover, and click Go.
4. In the server’s data movers portlet, select a data mover.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Data Mover, and click Go.

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects 351
Database space trigger
Table C-5 shows the quick paths for the database space trigger.

Table C-5 Database space trigger

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Database table, click Select Action, select Create Space
Trigger, and click Go.

View and modify 1.Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3.In the server’s properties notebook, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Database table, select a database volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Space Trigger, and click Go.

Database volume
Table C-6 shows the quick paths for the database volume.

Table C-6 Database volume

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Database and Log tab.
4.In the Database table, click Select Action, select Add Volume, and
click Go.

View and modify 1.Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Database table, select a database volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Extend or Reduce, and click Go.

352 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Device class
Table C-7shows the quick paths for the device class.

Table C-7 Device class

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. Click Select Action, select View Device Class, and click Go.
4. In the server’s device classes portlet, click Select Action, select
Create a Device Class, and click Go.

View and modify 1.Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Device Class, and click Go.
4. In the server’s device classes portlet, select a device class.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Device Class, and click Go.

Drive
Table C-8 shows the quick paths for the drive.

Table C-8 Drive

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click the name of a library.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Drives tab.
4. In the table, click Select Action, select Add a Drive, and click Go.

View and modify 1.Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click the name of a library.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Drives tab.
4. In the table, select a drive.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Drive, and click Go.

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects 353
Library
Table C-9 shows the quick paths for the Library.

Table C-9 Library

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click Select Action, select Create
a Library, and click Go.
3. In the Select a Server table, select a server and click Create a Library.

View and modify 1.Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, select a library.
3. Click Select Action, select Modify Library, and click Go.

Management class (including copy groups)

Table C-10 shows the quick paths for the management class.

Table C-10 Management class including copy groups

Task Path

Create 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click the name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Management Classes.
5. In the table, click Select Action, select Create Management Class,
and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click the name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Management Classes.
5. In the table, select a management class.
6. Click Select Action, select Modify Management Class, and click Go.

354 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Option set
Table C-11 shows the quick paths for the option set.

Table C-11 Option set

Task Path

Create 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click the name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Option Sets.
5. In the table, click Select Action, select Create an Option Set, and
click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click the name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Option Sets.
5. In the table, select an option set.
6. Click Select Action, select Modify Option Set, and click Go.

Path for a drive

Table C-12 shows the quick paths for the path for a drive.

Table C-12 Path for a drive

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Drive Paths tab.
4. In the table, click Select Action, select Add Path, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Drive Paths tab.
4. In the table, select a drive path.
5.Click Select Action, select Modify Path, and click Go.

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects 355
Path for a library
Table C-13 shows the quick paths for the path for a library.

Table C-13 Path for a library

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Library Paths tab.
4. In the table, click Select Action, select Add Path, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Library Paths tab.
4. In the table, select a library path.
5.Click Select Action, select Modify Path, and click Go.

Policy Domain
Table C-14 shows the quick paths for the Policy Domain.

Table C-14 Policy domain

Task Path

Create 1. Click Policies and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3.In the server’s policy domains notebook, click Select Action, select
Create a Policy Domain, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Policies and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, select the name of a domain.
4. Click Select Action, select Modify Policy Domain, and click Go.

The role of policy sets

Experienced administrators of Tivoli Storage Manager are probably familiar with
policy sets, which contain the management classes within a policy domain. The
Administration Center eliminates the need to validate or activate a policy set
when you make changes to management classes. In the Administration Center,
you work only with the active policy set. Any changes that you make to
management classes are immediately activated, without additional effort on your
part.

356 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Profile (for a configuration manager server)
Table C-15 shows the quick paths for the profile.

Table C-15 Profile for a configuration manager server

Task Path

Create 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server that is a configuration
manager.
3. In the server’s profiles table, click Select Action, select Create
Profile, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server that is a configuration
manager.
3. In the server’s profiles table, select a profile.
4. Click Select Action, select Modify Profile, and click Go.

Recovery log space trigger

Table C-16 shows the quick paths for the recovery log space trigger.

Table C-16 Recovery space log trigger

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s properties notebook, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Recovery Log table, click Select Action, select Create Space
Trigger, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Recovery Log table, select a recovery log.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Space Trigger, and click Go.

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects 357
Recovery log volume
Table C-17 shows the quick paths for the recovery log volume.

Table C-17 Recovery log volume

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Recovery Log table, click Select Action, select Add Volume,
and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Database and Log tab.
4. In the Recovery Log table, select a recovery log volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Extend or Reduce, and click Go.

Schedule for client nodes

Table C-18 shows the quick paths for the schedule for client nodes.

Table C-18 Schedule for client nodes

Task Path

Create 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click the name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Node Schedules.
5. In the table, click Select Action, select Create a Schedule, and click
Go.

View and modify 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s policy domains notebook, click the name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Node Schedules.
5. In the table, select a schedule.
6. Click Select Action, select Create a Schedule, and click Go.

358 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Schedule for a server (administrative schedule)
Table C-19 shows the quick paths for the schedule for a server.

Table C-19 Administrative schedule for a server

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Administrative Schedules
tab.
4. In the table, click Select Action, select Create a Schedule, and click
Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Administrative Schedules
tab.
4. In the table, select a script.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Schedule, and click Go.

Server (other Tivoli Storage Manager servers) Task

Table C-20 shows the quick paths for the server tasks.

Table C-20 Add or modify Server

Task Path

Create 1.Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.

2. In the table, click Select Action, select Add Server Connection, and
click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Modify Server Connection, and click Go.

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects 359
Server group
Table C-21 shows the quick paths for the server group.

Table C-21 Server group

Task Path

Create 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the servers and server groups portlet, click Server Groups.
4. In the Server Groups table, click Select Action, select Create a Server
Group, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the servers and server groups portlet, click Server Groups.
4. In the Server Groups table, select a server group.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify a Server Group, and click Go.

Server script
Table C-22 shows the quick paths for the server script.

Table C-22 Server script

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Scripts tab.
4. In the table, click Select Action, select Create Script, and click Go.

To get help in creating a script that performs key maintenance tasks:

1. Click Server Maintenance in the Work Items list.
2. In the table, click Select Action, select Create a Maintenance Script,
and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click a server name.
3. In the server’s properties portlet, click the Scripts tab.
4. In the table, select a script.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Script, and click Go.

To modify a maintenance script:

1. Click Server Maintenance in the Work Items list.
2. In the table, select a maintenance script.
3. Click Select Action, select Modify Maintenance Script, and click Go.

360 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Storage pool
Table C-23 shows the quick paths for the storage pool.

Table C-23 Storage pool

Task Path

Create 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Storage Pools, and click Go.
4. In the server’s storage pools portlet, click Select Action, select Create
a Storage Pool, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Storage Pools, and click Go.
4. In the server’s storage pools portlet, select a storage pool.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Storage Pool, and click Go.

Subscription to a profile (for a managed server)

Table C-24 shows the quick paths for the subscription to a profile.

Table C-24 Subscription to a profile

Task Path

Create 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work Items list.

2. In the Servers table, click the name of a managed server.
3. In the server’s Subscriptions table, click Select Action, select Create
Subscription, and click Go.

Appendix C. Quick paths to creating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager objects 361
Volumes in a library
Table C-25 shows the quick paths for volumes in a library.

Table C-25 Volumes in a library

Task Path

Create (check in, or check in 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
and label) 2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Volumes tab.
4. In the table, click Select Action, select Add Volumes, and click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Libraries for all Servers table, click a library name.
3. In the library’s properties portlet, click the Volumes tab.
4. In the table, select a volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Modify Volume, and click Go.

Volumes in a storage pool

Table C-26 shows the quick paths for volumes in a storage pool.

Table C-26 Volumes in a storage pool

Task Path

Create (check in, or check in 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
and label) 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Storage Pools, and click Go.
4. In the server’s storage pools portlet, click a storage pool name.
5. In the storage pool’s properties notebook, click the Volumes tab.
6. In the volumes table, click Select Action, select Add Volume, and
click Go.

View and modify 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Storage Pools, and click Go.
4. In the server’s storage pools portlet, click a storage pool name.
5. In the storage pool’s properties notebook, click the Volumes tab.
6. In the table, select a volume.
7. Click Select Action, select Modify Volume or View Contents, and
click Go.

362 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 D

Appendix D. Administration Center

Wizards
This appendix contains tables giving you information about the wizards in the
Administration Center that help guide you through common configuration tasks.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 363

Enterprise management
Table D-1 shows the descriptions and paths of the wizards concerning enterprise
management.

Table D-1 Enterprise management

Wizard Description Path

Set up enterprise Used to set up a configuration 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work
configuration manager and managed Items list.
servers. You must set up the 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
configuration manager server 3. Click Select Action, select Set Up Enterprise
before setting up its managed Configuration, and click Go.
servers.

Define a server Used to enable 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work

server-to-server Items list.
communications. 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the Servers and Server Groups portlet, click
Servers.
4. In the Servers table, click Select Action,
select Define Server, and click Go.

Create a server Used to create a group of 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work
group defined servers, which can be Items list.
used to facilitate command 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
routing. 3. In the Servers and Server Groups portlet, click
Server Groups.
4. In the Server Groups table, click Select
Action, select Create a Server Group, and click
Go.

Create a profile Used to create new profiles 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work
for configuration manager Items list.
servers. 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server
defined as a configuration manager.
3. In the server’s Profiles table, click Select
Action, select Create Profile, and click Go.

Create a Used to create new profile 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work
subscription subscriptions for managed Items list.
servers. 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server
defined as a managed server.
3. In the server’s Profiles table, click Select
Action, select Create Subscription, and click
Go.

364 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Wizard Description Path

Import or export a Used to import or export 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work
server server definitions. Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select either Import
Server or Export Server, and click Go.

Create Used to set up a schedule to 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work

administrative perform administrative tasks. Items list.
schedule 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Server
Properties, and click Go.
4. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrative Schedules tab.
5. In the Administrative Schedules table, click
Select Action, select Create a Schedule, and
click Go.

Import or export Used to import or export 1. Click Enterprise Management in the Work
administrator administrator definitions. Items list.
2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Server
Properties, and click Go.
4. In the server’s properties notebook, click the
Administrators tab, select the name of the
administrator, click Select Action, select either
Import Administrator or Export Administrator
and click Go.

Storage devices
Table D-2 shows the descriptions and paths of the wizards concerning storage
devices.

Table D-2 Storage devices

Wizard Description Path

Add storage device Used to create a library, 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
drives, paths, a device class, 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
and storage pools for a 3. Click Select Action, select Add a Storage
storage device. Device, and click Go.

Create a library Provides a fast way to define 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
a library and its drives. 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select Create Library,
and click Go.

Appendix D. Administration Center Wizards 365

 Wizard Description Path

Create a device Used to create a device class, 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
class which represents a set of 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
storage devices with similar 3. Click Select Action, select View Device
characteristics. Classes, and click Go.
4. In the server’s Device Classes table, click
Select Action, select Create a Device Class,
and click Go.

Create a storage Used to set up a primary or 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
pool copy storage pool for use. 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
3. Click Select Action, select View Storage
Pools, and click Go.
4. In the server’s Storage Pools table, click Select
Action, select Create a Storage Pool, and click
Go.

Protect a NAS file Used to create a complete 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
server configuration so that the 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
server can back up a 3. Click Select Action, select View Data
network-attached storage Movers, and click Go.
(NAS) file server using 4. In the server’s Data Movers table, click Select
network data management Action, select Create NAS Data Mover, and
protocol (NDMP). click Go.

Create a collocation Used to create a collocation 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
group group to store data for 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
selected client nodes on as 3. Click Select Action, click View Collocation
few volumes as possible. Groups, and click Go.
4. In the server’s Collocations Groups table, click
Select Action, select Create Collocation
Group, and click Go.

Add volumes Used to check volumes into 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
the library inventory, and label 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
them if necessary. Also used 3. In the Libraries for All Servers table, click the
to label volumes without name of a library, select the Volumes tab.
checking them in. 4. In the library Properties table, click Select
Action, select Add Volumes, and click Go.

Restore volumes Used to restore all files on 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
damaged volumes in a 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
primary storage pool that was 3. Click Select Action, select View Storage
backed up to a copy storage Pools, click Go.
pool. 4. In the server’s Storage Pools table, select a
storage pool.
5. Click Select Action, select Restore Volumes,
and click Go.

366 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Wizard Description Path

Delete volume Used to delete volume history 1. Click Storage Devices in the Work Items list.
history file records that are no longer 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
needed (for example, records 3. Click Select Action, select View Volume
for obsolete database backup History, and click Go.
volumes). 4. In the Volume History table, select a volume.
5. Click Select Action, select Delete Volume
History, and click Go.

Policy domains and client nodes

Table D-3 shows the descriptions and paths of the wizards concerning policy
domains and client nodes.

Table D-3 Policy domains and client nodes

Wizard Description Path

Create a client node Used to create a client node. 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client
Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, click Select Action,
select Create a Client Node, and click Go.

Create client node Used to set up a schedule for 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
schedule automating client node the Work Items list.
operations. 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client
Node Schedules.
5. In the Schedules table, click Select Action,
select Create a Schedule, and click Go.

Appendix D. Administration Center Wizards 367

 Wizard Description Path

Create a Used to create a new 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
management class management class. the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click
Management Classes.
5. In the Management Classes table, click Select
Action, select Create Management Class, and
click Go.

Create an option set Used to create an option set, 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
which allows you to centrally the Work Items list.
manage many client node 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
processing options. 3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Option
Sets.
5. In the Option Sets table, click Select Action,
select Create an Option Set, and click Go.

Create a policy Used to create a policy 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
domain domain with a default the Work Items list.
management class. 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click
Select Action, select Create a Policy Domain,
and click Go.

Enable LAN-free Used to set up a Storage 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
data movement Agent so that it can move the Work Items list.
data on behalf of client nodes 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
over a SAN directly to storage 3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
devices. name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client
Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, select a client node.
6. Click Select Action, select Enable LAN-free
Data Movement, and click Go.

368 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Wizard Description Path

Generate a backup Used to create a point-in-time 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
set copy of a client node’s data. the Work Items list.
The copy is created directly 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
from server storage, so the 3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
data does not have to be name of a domain.
transferred over the network 4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client
to create the backup set. Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, click the name of a
client node.
6. In the node’s properties notebook, click the
Backup Sets tab.
7. In the Backup Sets table, click Select Action,
select Generate Backup Set, and click Go.

Import or export Used to import or export client 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
client node node definitions. the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
name of a domain.
4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client
Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, select a client node.
6. Click Select Action, select either Import
Client Node or Export Client Node, and click
Go.

Import or export Used to import or export 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
policy domain policy domain definitions. the Work Items list.
2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
3. In the Policy Domains table, select a domain.
4. Click Select Action, select either Import
Policy Domain or Export Policy Domain, and
click Go.

Restore by file name Used to restore files for a NAS 1. Click Policy Domains and Client Nodes in
(NAS) file server by file name when a the Work Items list.
table of contents was created 2. In the Servers table, click the name of a server.
at the time of backup, or when 3. In the server’s Policy Domains table, click the
you know the names of name of a domain.
individual files to restore. 4. In the domain’s properties portlet, click Client
Nodes.
5. In the Client Nodes table, click the name of a
NAS client node.
6. In the NAS client’s Properties notebook, click
the File Spaces tab.
7. In the File Spaces table, click Select Action,
select Restore by File Name, and click Go.

Appendix D. Administration Center Wizards 369

Server maintenance
Table D-4 shows the description and path of the wizard concerning server
maintenance.

Table D-4 Server maintenance

Wizard Description Path

Create maintenance Used to create a maintenance 1. Click Server Maintenance in the Work Items
script script to automatically run the list.
essential processes that 2. In the Servers table, select a server.
protect the server database 3. Click Select Action, select Create
and storage pools. The script maintenance script and click Go.
helps keep the server running
well.

370 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 E

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions:

Administration Center
This appendix contains frequently asked questions and answers about general
information, installation, and use of the Administration Center.

Note: The Tivoli Storage Manager Server and the Administrations Center can
be installed on the same machine. The Administration Center requires, at a
minimum, 512 MB RAM in addition to the RAM required for the Tivoli Storage
Manager Server.

For the latest recommendations on the Administration Center installation, use

keyword TSMADMINCENTER when you visit:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager.html

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 371

Basics
Table E-1 answers some general questions to help introduce you to the
Administration Center.

Table E-1 Basics of the Administration Center

What is the Administration Center? The Administration Center is a new Web-based
interface for centrally configuring and managing
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 servers.
This new task-oriented interface replaces the
previous administrative Web interface. The
Administration Center provides wizards to help
guide you through common configuration tasks.
Properties notebooks allow you to modify settings
and perform advanced management tasks.

What are the key features of the Administration You only need to log in once to access multiple
Center? Tivoli Storage Manager servers from a single
interface. You can easily monitor the health of your
storage environment. Regular status updates are
provided for:
򐂰 Scheduled events
򐂰 The server database and recovery log (using
rules based on best practices)
򐂰 Storage devices, including information about
offline drives and paths, and mounted
volumes.
򐂰 You can filter and sort storage objects, such as
client nodes and library volumes.
򐂰 You can use wizards to more easily perform
complex tasks, such as:
򐂰 Creating schedules to perform client node and
administrative operations.
򐂰 Creating a server maintenance script to
perform database and storage pool backup,
migration, expiration, and reclamation.
򐂰 Configuring storage devices. A comprehensive
wizard helps you create a library, add drives,
check in media volumes, and create storage
pools.

What is the IBM Integrated Solutions Console? The Integrated Solutions Console, or ISC, is a
component framework that allows you to install
components provided by multiple IBM applications,
and access them from a single Web interface. The
Administration Center is installed as an Integrated
Solutions Console component.

372 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Have other IBM applications been enabled for Several IBM applications provide components that
use in the Integrated Solutions Console? can be installed in the Integrated Solutions
Console, and more are being developed.

Do I need a separate Integrated Solutions No. The Administration Center is the only Tivoli
Console instance for each Tivoli Storage Storage Manager interface that is currently using
Manager server? the Integrated Solutions Console. However, Web
clients can be accessed from the Administration
Center.

Can I still use the previous administrative Web The Administration Center replaces the
interface? administrative Web interface. The previous
administrative Web interface cannot be used with
Version 5.3 servers. Because the interface has
been completely redesigned, you should expect to
spend some time learning to use it. To assist you in
this transition, a set of animated tutorials is
provided in the Administration Center (just click
Getting Started in the Work Items list). These
tutorials are designed to help you learn how to
navigate the Administration Center and perform
basic tasks. You can obtain more information by
searching the knowledge base for Tivoli Storage
Manager from the ibm.com support Web site
(http://www.ibm.com/support).
For information about creating common Tivoli
Storage Manager objects, use the search term
TSMADMINCENTER.
For information about performing common
administrative tasks, use the search term 1193101.

Why was the administrative Web interface The Administration Center was created in response
replaced? to customer feedback. Extensive user interviews
were conducted to develop an interface that better
supports common configuration and administration
tasks. Moving to the Integrated Solutions console
provides a framework that will allow for further
improvements in the future, as well as better
integration with other IBM products.

Can I use the Administration Center to manage The Administration Center can only be used with
all of my Tivoli Storage Manager servers? Version 5.3 servers.

Can I use the Administration Center to manage You can access the Web client interface from the
my client nodes? Administration Center. If you have the appropriate
level of administrative authority, you can use this
interface to perform client node management
tasks.

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions: Administration Center 373

 Do I need a separate license to use the No. The base product license for the Tivoli Storage
Administration Center? Manager server includes support for the
Administration Center and the Integrated Solutions
Console.

How is security handled for the Administration Security is provided, or can be enabled, for each
Center? component of the Administration Center system. To
secure communications between the Web browser
and the Administration Center, you can configure
the Integrated Solutions Console to use Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL). This provides
certificate-based 128-bit encryption. Instructions
for configuring SSL are provided in the
Administrator’s Guide.
Note that if the Web browser and Administration
Center are behind a firewall, this might not be
necessary. The Integrated Solutions Console user
credentials and Tivoli Storage Manager
administrator credentials stored in the WebSphere
database are fully encrypted. If the Administration
Center is used to manage Tivoli Storage Manager
servers across a network, communications
between the Administration Center and Tivoli
Storage Manager servers are secured using Data
Encryption Standard (DES) encryption.

What are the basic steps for setting up the These are the basic steps:
Administration Center? 1. Install and start your Tivoli Storage Manager
Version 5.3 servers. Give each server a unique
name.
2. Install the Integrated Solutions Console. During
the installation process, create an Integrated
Solutions Console user ID and password.
3. Install the Administration Center on the same
system as the Integrated Solutions Console.
4. Log in to the Integrated Solutions Console
using a Web browser.
5. Add connections for the Tivoli Storage
Manager servers you want to manage.
6. Create additional Integrated Solutions Console
user IDs and passwords for any other
administrators who will access the
Administration Center.
7. For details, see the Tivoli Storage Manager
Installation Guide and the Getting Started work
item in the Administration Center.

374 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Installation
Table E-2 answers some common questions you may have about installing the
Administration Center.

Table E-2 Installation of the Administration Center

Where should I install the Integrated Solutions The Integrated Solutions Console (along with the
Console? Do I need a dedicated machine? Administration Center) can be installed on the
same system as a Tivoli Storage Manager server if
the system meets the combined requirements for
both applications. See the Installation Guide for
detailed system requirements. If you plan to use the
Administration Center to manage an environment
with a large number of servers or administrators,
consider installing the Administration Center on a
separate system.

Which operating systems are supported for the The following operating systems are supported:
Administration Center? 򐂰 AIX 5.1 or 5.2
򐂰 Sun Solaris 8
򐂰 SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 8 Powered by
򐂰 United Linux 1.0 (for Intel only)
򐂰 Red Hat Linux Advanced Server 2.1
(for Intel only)
򐂰 Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server
򐂰 Windows Server 2003

For the most current information about

Administration Center requirements, see the Tivoli
Storage Manager Version 5.3 page of the support
Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products
/support/IBMTivoliStorageManagerVersionRelea
se.html

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions: Administration Center 375

 What are the basic installation requirements? At least 512 MB of physical memory is suggested.
The installation process requires 982 MB of
available disk space, and an additional 679 MB of
available space in the system temporary directory.
After the Administration Center is installed, it
occupies approximately 500 MB of disk space.If
you are installing the Administration Center and a
Tivoli Storage Manager server on the same
system, the system must meet the combined
minimum requirements for both applications. To
estimate the minimum amount of memory needed
to run both applications, add the following values:
򐂰 For the Administration Center: 512 MB
򐂰 For the Tivoli Storage Manager server: 32 MB
+ (the value specified for the BUFPOOLSIZE
server option, in MB) + (1 MB x the number
specified by the MAXSESSIONS server

Other memory requirements, such as those for the

operating system and any other applications,
should also be factored into the total. For example,
if you are using the default values for Tivoli Storage
Manager and your operating system requires 256
MB, you would perform the following calculation:

512 MB for the Administration Center

89 MB for the Tivoli Storage Manager server
(32 + 32 + 25)
256 MB for the operating system
--------------------------------------------
857 MB total

See the Installation Guide for detailed

requirements.

Do I have to use the wizard-based installation No. In addition to the standard InstallShield
for the Administration Center? wizard-based installation, command-based and
silent installation options are also available. See the
README.INSTALL file for instructions.

How long does the installation process take? Installing the Integrated Solutions Console and
Administration Center takes approximately 25 to 50
minutes, depending on processor speed. See the
README.INSTALL file for more information.

376 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Do I need to install or manage any additional No. Although some of the underlying components
components to use the Administration Center? of the Integrated Solutions Console are provided by
WebSphere, you do not need to separately install
or manage these components. You only need to
manage the Administration Center itself, and to a
lesser degree, the Integrated Solutions Console.

Using the Administration Center

Table E-3 answers some questions to help get you started using the
Administration Center.

Table E-3 Using the Administration Center

Where do I start? After you log in to the Integrated Solutions Console,
expand the Tivoli Storage Manager folder in the
Work Items list and click Getting Started. The
Tivoli Storage Manager welcome page is
displayed. This page provides instructions, as well
as animated tutorials designed to help you learn
how to navigate the Administration Center and
perform basic administrative

How do I... The help for the Administration Center includes

topics about how to create common Tivoli Storage
Manager objects and perform common
administrative tasks. You can obtain current
information about these topics by searching the
knowledge base for Tivoli Storage Manager from
the ibm.com support Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/support

For current information about how to perform

common administrative tasks, use the search term
TSMADMINCENTER.

Where is the command line? The command-line interface is available from all of
the main server tables in the Administration Center.
To access the command line, select a server, click
Select Action, select Use Command Line, and
click Go.

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions: Administration Center 377

 Why aren’t policy sets visible for policy To simplify the process of configuring and
domains? managing policy, the Administration Center does
not expose policy sets. Instead, you always work
with the active policy set. Any changes that you
make to management classes are immediately
activated, without additional effort on your part.

What’s the difference between a Tivoli Storage When you install the Integrated Solutions Console,
Manager administrator name and an Integrated you are prompted to create a user ID and
Solutions Console user ID? password. These credentials allow you to log in to
the Integrated Solutions Console and access the
Administration Center. In the Administration Center,
Tivoli Storage Manager administrator credentials
are only used when adding server connections.
After server connections have been added, you can
access all of these servers by logging in to the
Integrated Solutions Console.

How do Tivoli Storage Manager administrators As a best practice, create a separate Integrated
register to use the Administration Center? Solutions Console user ID for each Tivoli Storage
Manager administrator. If you add a new user ID to
the TSM_AdminCenter group, the administrator will
have access to all Administration Center functions,
but will not be authorized to add other users to the
Integrated Solutions Console. After logging in to the
Integrated Solutions Console, each administrator
must use their own Tivoli Storage Manager
administrator credentials to add connections for the
servers they will manage. In effect, this provides
each administrator with a custom interface, which
contains only the servers for which they have
authority, and allows them to perform only the tasks
allowed by their privilege class.

Can all Tivoli Storage Manager administrators Yes. Any administrator with an Integrated Solutions
use the Administration Center, regardless of Console user ID can log in and use their Tivoli
their privilege class? Storage Manager administrator credentials to add
connections for the servers they manage. The
administrator credentials used to add a server
connection determine the privilege class that will
apply for the tasks performed on that server. As a
best practice, create a separate Integrated
Solutions Console user ID for each Tivoli Storage
Manager administrator.

378 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Why does the Administration Center require Using unique names for your Tivoli Storage
unique Tivoli Storage Manager server names? Manager servers is a best practice. The
Administration Center enforces this practice for the
following reasons:

򐂰 Several Administration Center features rely on

server-to-server communications, which
requires unique server names.
򐂰 Because the Administration Center allows you
to work with multiple servers from a single
interface, using unique names helps to avoid
confusion.

How do I change the Integrated Solutions By default, users are logged out of the Integrated
Console timeout? Solutions Console after 30 minutes of inactivity. You
can use the Administration Center Support Utility to
adjust the timeout period. This utility, named
supportUtil, is available in one of the following
directories:
[ISC root]\Tivoli\dsm\bin\ (Windows)
[ISC root]/Tivoli/dsm/bin (UNIX and Linux)

To start the utility, issue the following command:

supportUtil.bat (Windows)
supportUtil.sh (UNIX and Linux)

Are there any Tivoli Storage Manager functions The Administration Center supports most of the
not currently supported by the Administration functions provided by the current product version.
Center? However, there are some exceptions. For example,
Disaster Recovery Management is not currently
supported, and must be configured and managed
using the command-line interface. You can obtain a
list of functions not currently supported by the
Administration Center by searching the knowledge
base for Tivoli Storage Manager from the ibm.com
support Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/support
Use the search term 1193324.

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions: Administration Center 379

 To use the health monitor, do I need to When you install a Tivoli Storage Manager Version
configure it for each of my Tivoli Storage 5.3 server, an administrator named
Manager servers? ADMIN_CENTER with the password
ADMIN_CENTER is automatically created. The
health monitor uses this administrator to access the
server and obtain health information. Before you
can use the health monitor, it must be configured.
This consists of setting the default password for the
ADMIN_CENTER administrator and optionally
adjusting the health monitor refresh interval.
This configuration only needs to be done once,
regardless of the number of administrators and
server connections you add. The new password
you specify will be applied to all of the servers that
are connected to the Administration Center. By
default, the ADMIN_CENTER administrator is
locked. For each server connection you add, you
can specify whether to unlock the
ADMIN_CENTER administrator to enable health
monitoring.

Can I run the Administration Center as a Yes. When you install the Administration Center on
Windows service? a Windows system, it is automatically installed as a
service.

How can I best optimize performance of the For performance information, search the
Administration Center? knowledge base for Tivoli Storage Manager from
the IBM support Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/support
Use the search term 1193443.

How do I back up the Integrated Solutions Currently, you must back up the Integrated
Console? Solutions Console root directory to ensure that the
credential information stored in its database is
protected. If this credential information is lost and
cannot be restored, you will have to recreate any
server connections and Integrated Solutions
Console user IDs you have created.

How does the Administration Center handle Any client node or administrative schedules you
scheduling across time zones? create will run according to the time used by the
Tivoli Storage Manager server. If the Integrated
Solutions Console machine or the machine running
the Web browser is located in a different time zone,
you will need to take the time difference into
account when creating schedules.

380 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Troubleshooting and additional information
Table E-4 includes information about troubleshooting problems and finding
additional resources.

Table E-4 Troubleshooting and additional information

How do I diagnose and resolve Administration Informational messages are provided for most
Center issues? errors that occur in the Administration Center.
These messages typically provide a recommended
action to help you resolve the error. In some cases,
additional information from the server is also
provided. If you are unable to resolve an error, see
the Administration Center section of the Problem
Determination Guide, which is available from the
Tivoli Storage Manager publications Web site at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tiv
ihelp/index.jsp

Is there documentation available for using the Installation information is provided in the Tivoli
Administration Center? Storage Manager Installation Guide, which is
shipped with the product. General information
about using the Administration Center is provided
in the Tivoli Storage Manager Administrators
Guide, which is available on the publications CD.
Online help is also available. For context-specific
help, click the •?• icon in any work page or portlet.
For concept and task help, as well as information
about using the Integrated Solutions Console, click
the •Help• link at the upper right corner of the
console.

Where can I get the latest Administration For the latest information, including known issues,
Center information? see the Administration Center readme file. The
most current version of this readme file is available
from the Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 page
of the support Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products
/support/IBMTivoliStorageManagerVersionRelea
se.html

Appendix E. Frequently asked questions: Administration Center 381

382 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 F

Appendix F. Tables of the changes and

enhancements by versions
This appendix contains tables giving you an overview of the changes or
enhancement for a given version.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 383

Client versions
The following sections provide an overview of changes for IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Client listed by version.

Table of Version 5.1.5 TSM Client enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, N=Netware, M=Mac OS X

Changes A H L S W N M

Enhanced domain processing x x x x x x

Enhanced query backup and query archive commands x x x x x x

New backup-archive option to preserve last access date of files x x x x x

Support for a globally unique identifier (GUID) x x x x x

64-bit support for the Storage Manager HP-UX client x

Linux86 client support for the General Parallel File System (GPFS) x

LAN-free data movement support on linux86 client x

Storage Agent 5.1 (October 2002) - for Linux!!! x

Support for excluding specific system objects from backup processing x

Enhanced image backup and restore processing (Windows 2000 only) x

Ignore NTFS compression attribute x

Support for DBCS installation path on Unicode-enabled clients x

Support for monitoring or cancelling server-free operations (Windows x

2000)

Support for Novell Cluster Services x

No changes introduced in 5.1.5 to the Mac OS X N/A

Table of Version 5.2 TSM Client enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, N=Netware, M=Mac OS X

Changes A H L S W N M

Enhanced firewall security x x x x x x

Enhancements for command line image restore operations x x x x x

384 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Changes A H L S W N M

Enhancements for the query filespace command x x x x x

Enhancements to the Web client interface x x x x x x

NDMP file-level restore x x x x x

Separately installable language packs available x x x x x

Support for an external snapshot provider in the backup-archive clients x x x x x x

Support for backing up files from one or more file space origins x x x x x x

Support for backup and restore of the WebSphere Application Server x x x x x

(WAS)

Support for displaying options and their settings via the command line x x x x x x

Support for gathering Tivoli Storage Manager system information x x x x x

Support for processing EMC Celerra Network Attached Storage (NAS) x - - x x

file system images

Veritas file systems, ACLs, and Veritas Volume Manager support on AIX x - - -
(32-bit and 64-bit) clients

Automounter support for Linux86 and Linux390 clients x

Open file support for backup and archive operations on Windows 2000 x
and Windows XP

Support for Microsoft Automated System Recovery (ASR) on Windows x

Server 2003 and Windows XP

Support for Microsoft Volume Shadowcopy Service (VSS) on Windows x

Server 2003

Tivoli Storage Manager command line and GUI display actual image x
size stored on Tivoli Storage Manager server

Enhanced ALL-LOCAL domain processing [NDS replica] x

Autofsrename x

Inclexcl x

Migrating to the Unicode-enabled client x

Appendix F. Tables of the changes and enhancements by versions 385

Table of Version 5.2.2 TSM Client enhancements
A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, N=Netware, M=Mac OS X

Changes A H L S W N M

Language support expanded to include Russian, Hungarian, Polish, and x x x x x

Czech

Multi-session backup session enhancements x x x x x x x

Removal of operand limits for backup and archive operations x x x x x

Support for WebSphere Application Server (WAS) security x - x x x

Support for controlling symbolic link processing x x x x

Backup and restore support for IBM TotalStorage SAN File System x

Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client Linux on iSeries x

Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client for Linux on Intel Itanium x

Support for Veritas Cluster Server cluster environment x

Backup and restore support for IBM TotalStorage SAN File System x
[Win2000 Client]

Support for Novell NetWare 6.5 operating system x

Enhanced firewall security x

Support for a Tivoli Storage Manager command line interface x

Support for a Tivoli Storage Manager administrative client x

Support for controlling symbolic link and alias processing x

Support for displaying options and their settings via the command line x
[avail. since 5.1.5 for all others]

Support for encrypting data during backup or archive operation x

Support for gathering Tivoli Storage Manager system information [avail. x

since 5.1.5 for all others]

Support for non-administrators to use Tivoli Storage Manager to manage x

their own data

Support for Tivoli Storage Manager as a background scheduler x

386 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Table of Version 5.3 TSM Client enhancements
A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, N=Netware, M=Mac OS X

Changes A H L S W N M

Dynamic client tracing x x x x x N/A

Enhanced encryption x x x x x N/A

Enhancements to query schedule command x x x x x x N/A

Include-exclude enhancements x x x x x x N/A

New links from the backup-archive client Java GUI to the Tivoli x x x x x N/A
Storage Manager and Tivoli Home Pages

New options, Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax, and DSM_LOG x x x x x N/A

environment variable changes

Optimized option default values x x x x x x N/A

Support for deleting individual backups from a server file space x x x x x x N/A

Tivoli Storage Manager Administration Center x x x x x x N/A

Web client enhancements (and Java GUI in UNIX) x x x x x x N/A

Client node proxy support [asnodename] x x x x N/A

Tivoli Storage Manager backup-archive client for HP-UX Itanium 2 x N/A

Linux for zSeries offline image backup x N/A

Journal based backup enhancements x N/A

Single drive support for Open File Support (OFS) for online image x N/A
backups

New options, Errorlogmax and Schedlogmax x N/A

Server versions
The following sections will provide an overview of changes for IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Server listed by version.

Appendix F. Tables of the changes and enhancements by versions 387

Table of Version 5.1.5 TSM TSM Server enhancements
A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

Additional O/S platform support x x

Table of Version 5.2 TSM TSM Server enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

Accurate SAN Device Mapping x x x x x

Device Driver for Windows Server 2003 x

IBM Device Driver for 3570, 3590, and IBM LTO Devices x

Increased Archive Retention Limits x x x x x x x

Licensing changes x x x x x x x

Linux for pSeries x

Linux for zSeries x

Macintosh OS X Unicode Support for Backup-Archive Client x x x x x x x

Move Data by Node x x x x x x x

Product Packaging & Name Changes x x x x x x x

Server Performance Tuning TXNGROUPMAX x x x x x x x

Server to Server Export and Import x x x x x

Security Firewall Support x x x x x x x

StorageTek VolSafe Support x x x x x

Support for SCSI Libraries with Multiple Drive Types x x x x x x

Support for Simultaneous Writes to Primary and Copy Storage Pools x

TapeAlert Device Support x x x x x

Tape Autolabeling x x x x x

388 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Table of Version 5.2.2 TSM Server enhancements
A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

Disaster Recovery Manager x

DVD support x

EMC Centera Support x x x x x

IBM 3592 Support x x x x x x x

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention x x x x x x x

NDMP Operations x x x x x

Operational Reporting x x x x x x x

Sony AIT50 and AIT100 WORM Media Support x x x x x

Table of Version 5.3 TSM Server enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

ACSLS Library Support Enhancements x x x x

Accurate SAN Device Mapping x x x

Activity Log Management x x x x x x x

Check-In and Check-Out Enhancements x x x x x

Collocation by Group x x x x x x x

Communications Options x x

Database Reorganization x x x x x x x

Disk-only Backup x x x x x x x

Enhancements for Server Migration and Reclamation Processes x x x x x x x

IBM 3592 WORM Support x x x x x x x

Improved Defaults x x x x x x x

Increased Block Size for Writing to Tape x

LAN-free Environment Configuration x x x x x x x

Appendix F. Tables of the changes and enhancements by versions 389

 Changes A H L S W O Z

NDMP Operations x x x x x

Net Appliance SnapLock Support x x x x x

New Interface to Manage Servers: Administration Center x x x x x x x

Server Processing Control in Scripts x x x x x x x

Simultaneous Write Inheritance Improvements x x x x x x x

Space Triggers for Mirrored Volumes x x x x x x x

Storage Agent and Library Sharing Failover x

Support for Multiple Tivoli Storage Manager Client Nodes x x x x x x x

Tivoli Storage Manager Scheduling Flexibility x x x x x x x

Storage Agent versions

The following sections will provide an overview of changes for IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager Storage Agent listed by version.

Table of Version 5.1.5 Storage Agent enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

Storage Agent for Linux was introduced x

Table of Version 5.2 Storage Agent enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

Support for new Linux Platforms zSeries and pSeries x

390 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Table of Version 5.2.2 Storage Agent enhancements
A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

TCPADMINPORT, TCPPORT and defaults x x x x x x

SHOW LANFREE x x x x x x

Storage Agent Compatibility and Support x x x x x x

Changed settings no longer require Storage Agent restart x x x x x x

Table of Version 5.3 Storage Agent enhancements

A=AIX, H=HP-UX, L=Linux, S=Solaris, W=Windows, O=OS/400 PASE, Z=z/OS

Changes A H L S W O Z

LAN-free Environment Configuration (VALIDATE LANFREE) x x x x x x

Considerations when using LAN free and simultaneous write x x x x x x

Multiple file system support for FILE device types x x x x x x

Multi-session No-Query Restore for LAN-free Path x x x x x x

LANFREETCPServeraddress x x x x x x

Shared Memory Protocol Support x x

Supported Linux Platforms and Kernel Dependencies x

Shared Library Enhancement for z/OS x

Appendix F. Tables of the changes and enhancements by versions 391

392 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
 G

Appendix G. Additional material

This redbook refers to additional material that can be downloaded from the
Internet as described below.

Locating the Web material

The Web material associated with this redbook is available in softcopy on the
Internet from the IBM Redbooks Web server. Point your Web browser to:
ftp://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/SG246638

Alternatively, you can go to the IBM Redbooks Web site at:

ibm.com/redbooks

Select the Additional materials and open the directory that corresponds with
the redbook form number, SG24-6638.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 393

Using the Web material
The additional Web material that accompanies this redbook includes the
following files listed in Table G-1.

Table G-1 Additional material

File name Description

IBM_Tivoli_Storage_Manager_V53_cmd_access.mov This video shows how to access the

command line using the new
Administration Center.

IBM_Tivoli_Storage_Manager_V53_Unlock_Client_Node.mov This video shows how to unlock a

client node using the new
Administration Center.

TivoliStorageManager53Tutorial.zip This multi-media Macromedia Flash

based tutorial provides an introduction
to the new Administration Center.

corrections.zip If it exists, this file contains updated

information and corrections to the
book.

Requirements for downloading the Web material

You should have a media player that is able to play .mov video files. In addition,
you should have 25 MB of free disk space on your computer.

Important: The display quality depends on the video codec of your media
player.

We accomplished excellent playback results for the.mov files using Apples

Quicktime player. To playback the.mov Quicktime movies, please download the
latest Quicktime player using the following Web site:
http://www.apple.com/quicktime/download/

The tutorials packed inside the TivoliStorageManager53Tutorial.zip file require

MacroMedia Flash 6.0 or later. You can download the Flash player at:
http://www.macromedia.com/go/getflashplayer

How to use the Web material

Create a subdirectory (folder) on your workstation, and if applicable, unzip the
contents of the Web material zip file into this folder.

394 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Abbreviations and acronyms
CGI Common Gateway Interface
ABI Application Binary Interface
CIFS Common Internet File System
ACE Access Control Entries
CIM Common Information Model
ACL Access Control List
CPI-C Common Programming
AD Microsoft Active Directory
Interface for Communications
ADSM ADSTAR Distributed Storage
CPU Central Processing Unit
Manager
CSR Client/server Runtime
AFS Andrew File System
DAC Discretionary Access
AIX Advanced Interactive
Controls
eXecutive
DARPA Defense Advanced Research
ANSI American National Standards
Projects Agency
Institute
DASD Direct Access Storage Device
API Application Programming
Interface DBM Database Management
APPC Advanced DCE Distributed Computing
Program-to-Program Environment
Communication DCOM Distributed Component
APPN Advanced Peer-to-Peer Object Model
Networking DDE Dynamic Data Exchange
ARPA Advanced Research Projects DDNS Dynamic Domain Name
Agency System
ASCII American National Standard DES Data Encryption Standard
Code for Information
Interchange DFS Distributed File System

ASR Automated System Recovery DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
DLC Data Link Control
BDC Backup Domain Controller
DRM Disaster REcovery Manager
BIND Berkeley Internet Name
Domain DSA Directory Service Agent

BSD Berkeley Software DNS Domain Name Systemb

Distribution EFS Encrypting File Systems
CA Certification Authorities EGID Effective Group Identifier
CAL Client Access License EMS Event Management Services
C-SPOC Cluster single point of control ERP Enterprise Resources
CDE Common Desktop Planning
Environment ERRM Event Response Resource
Manager

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 395

ESCON Enterprise System I/O Input/Output
Connection IP Internet Protocol
ESP Encapsulating Security IPC Interprocess Communication
Payload
IPL Initial Program Load
ESS Enterprise Storage Server
IPsec Internet Protocol Security
EUID Effective User Identifier
ISA Industry Standard
FAT File Allocation Table Architecture
FC Fibre Channel iSCSI SCSI over IP
FDDIFEC Fiber Distributed Data ISDN Integrated Services Digital
Interface Network
FEC Fast EtherChannel ISNO Interface-specific Network
technology Options
FIFO First In/First Out ISO International Standards
FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name Organization
FSF File Storage Facility ISV Independent Software
FTP File Transfer Protocol Vendor

FtDisk Fault-Tolerant Disk ITSO International Technical

Support Organization
GC Global Catalog
JBOD Just a Bunch of Disks
GDA Global Directory Agent
JFS Journaled File System
GDI Graphical Device Interface
JVM Java Virtual Machine
GDS Global Directory Service
LAN Local Area Network
GID Group Identifier
LCN Logical Cluster Number
GL Graphics Library
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access
GUI Graphical User Interface Protocol
HA High Availability LFS Logical File System (AIX)
HACMP High Availability Cluster LP Logical Partition
Multiprocessing
LPC Local Procedure Call
HAL Hardware Abstraction Layer
LUN Logical Unit Number
HBA Host Bus Adapter
LVCB Logical Volume Control Block
HCL Hardware Compatibility List
LVDD Logical Volume Device Driver
HSM Hierarchical Storage
Management LVM Logical Volume Manager

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol MBR Master Boot Record

IBM International Business MDC Meta Data Controller

Machines Corporation MDM Multiple Device Manager
IDE Integrated Drive Electronics MFT Master File Table
IDS Intelligent Disk Subsystem MIB Management Information
IIS Internet Information Server Base

396 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

MMC Microsoft Management PHB Per Hop Behavior
Console POSIX Portable Operating System
MOCL Managed Object Class Interface for Computer
Library Environment
MSCS Microsoft Cluster Server PP Physical Partition
MSS Modular Storage Server PReP PowerPC® Reference
MWC Mirror Write Consistency Platform

NAS Network Attached Storage PSM Persistent Storage Manager

NBC Network Buffer Cache PSN Program Sector Number

NBPI Number of Bytes per I-node PV Physical Volume

NDMP Network Data Management PVID Physical Volume Identifier

Protocol QoS Quality of Service
NFS Network File System RAID Redundant Array of
NIM Network Installation Independent Disks
Management RAS Remote Access Service
NIS Network Information System RDBMS Relational Database
NTFS NT File System Management System

NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access RISC Reduced Instruction Set

Memory Computer

NetDDE Network Dynamic Data RMC Resource Monitoring and

Exchange Control

ODBC Open Database Connectivity RMSS Reduced-Memory System

Simulator
ODM Object Data Manager
ROLTP Relative OnLine Transaction
OM Object Manager Processing
OPAL IBM Orchestration and ROS Read-Only Storage
Provisioning Automation
Library RPC Remote Procedure Call

OS Operating System RSM Removable Storage

Management
OSF Open Software Foundation
RSVP Resource Reservation
PAM Pluggable Authentication Protocol
Module
SAM Security Account Manager
PCI Peripheral Component
Interconnect SAN Storage Area Network

PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory SCSI Small Computer System

Card International Interface
Association SDK Software Developer's Kit
PDC Primary Domain Controller SFS SAN File System
PDF Portable Document Format SID Security Identifier
PFS Physical File System SMB Server Message Block

Abbreviations and acronyms 397

SMIT System Management VPN Virtual Private Network
Interface Tool VSM Virtual System Management
SMP Symmetric Multiprocessor W3C World Wide Web Consortium
SMS Systems Management Server WAN Wide Area Network
SNA Systems Network WLM Workload Manager
Architecture
WWN World Wide Name
SNMP Simple Network Management
Protocol WWW World Wide Web
SP System Parallel
SQL Structured Query Language
SSA Serial Storage Architecture
SSL Secure Sockets Layer
SRM Storage Resource Manager
SVC SAN Volume Controller
TCP/IP Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDP Tivoli Data Protection
TEC Tivoli Enterprise Console
TOS Type of Service
TSM IBM Tivoli Storage Manager
UDB Universal Database
UDF Universal Disk Format
UFS UNIX File System
UID User Identifier
UNC Universal Naming Convention
UPS Uninterruptable Power
Supply
URL Universal Resource Locator
VCN Virtual Cluster Name
VFS Virtual File System
VG Volume Group
VGDA Volume Group Descriptor
Area
VGSA Volume Group Status Area
VGID Volume Group Identifier
VIPA Virtual IP Address
VP Virtual Processor
VPD Vital Product Data

398 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Glossary

A B
ACSLS Automated Cartridge System Bandwidth A measure of the data transfer
Library Software; it functions as a central rate of a transmission channel.
service provider for StorageTek library
Bridge Facilitates communication with LANs,
operations in heterogeneous environments. It
SANs, and networks with dissimilar protocols.
allows you to collapse disparate,
application-dedicated libraries to one
centralized library or string of libraries
accessed via a single point of control.
C
Agent A software entity that runs on CIM Common Information Model.
endpoints and provides management
capability for other hardware or software. An CIM agent The code that is comprised of
example is an SNMP agent. An agent has the common building blocks that can be used
ability to spawn other processes. instead of proprietary software or
device-specific programming interfaces to
AL See arbitrated loop. manage CIM-compliant devices. A CIM agent
is made up of the following components: agent
Allocated storage The space that is code, a CIM object manager (CIMOM), client
allocated to volumes, but not assigned. application device, device provider, and
Service Location Protocol.
Allocation The entire process of obtaining a
volume and unit of external storage, and CIM object manager (CIMOM) The common
setting aside space on that storage for a data conceptual framework for data management
set. that receives, validates, and authenticates the
CIM requests from the client application. It
Arbitrated loop A Fibre Channel then directs the requests to the appropriate
interconnection technology that allows up to component or service provider.
126 participating node ports and one
participating fabric port to communicate. See Client A function that requests services from
also Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop and loop a server, and makes them available to the
topology. user. A term used in an environment to identify
a machine that uses the resources of the
Array An arrangement of related disk drive network.
modules that have been assigned to a group.
Client application A storage management
program that initiates Common Information
Model (CIM) requests to the CIM agent for the
device.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 399

Client authentication The verification of a Device driver A program that enables a
client in secure communications where the computer to communicate with a specific
identity of a server or browser (client) with device, for example, a disk drive.
whom you wish to communicate is discovered.
A sender's authenticity is demonstrated by the Device Manager One of three components
digital certificate issued to the sender. that make up the IBM TotalStorage Multiple
Device Manager. IBM TotalStorage Multiple
Client-server relationship Any process that Device Manager uses the Service Location
provides resources to other processes on a Protocol (SLP) on the IBM Director to discover
network is a server. Any process that employs storage devices, creates managed objects to
these resources is a client. A machine can run represent these discovered devices, and
client and server processes at the same time. provides the user with access to device
configuration functionality.
Common Information Model (CIM) A set of
standards developed by the Distributed Discovery The process of finding resources
Management Task Force (DMTF). CIM within an enterprise, including finding the new
provides a conceptual framework for storage location of monitored resources that were
management and an open approach to the moved.
design and implementation of storage
systems, applications, databases, networks, Disk group A set of disk drives that have
and devices. been configured into one or more logical unit
numbers. This term is used with RAID devices.
Console A user interface to a server.

CSC Client System Component (Term used E

in a STK ACSLS environment) It provides a
seamless connection between backup Enterprise network A geographically
applications and ACSLS Manager software. dispersed network under the backing of one
organization.
CSI Client System Interface (Term used in a
STK ACSLS environment) Interface to the ESS See IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
CSC on an ACSLS server. Storage Server.

Event In the Tivoli environment, any

D significant change in the state of a system
resource, network resource, or network
Data Center Model (DCM) The IBM Tivoli application. An event can be generated for a
Provisioning Manager data store and data problem, for the resolution of a problem, or for
schema. It includes a representation of all the successful completion of a task. Examples
physical and logical assets. of events are: the normal starting and s ping of
a process, the abnormal termination of a
DB2 Universal Database An IBM program process, and the malfunctioning of a server.
product that helps leverage information by
delivering the performance, scalability,
reliability, and availability needed for the most
demanding applications.

400 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

F Fibre Channel standard An ANSI standard
for a computer peripheral interface. The I/O
interface defines a protocol for communication
Fabric The Fibre Channel employs a fabric over a serial interface that configures attached
to connect devices. A fabric can be as simple units to a communication fabric. Refer to ANSI
as a single cable connecting two devices. The X3.230-199x.
term is often used to describe a more complex
network utilizing hubs, switches, and File system An individual file system on a
gateways. host. This is the smallest unit that can monitor
and extend. Policy values defined at this level
FAStT Storage Server A RAID controller override those that might be defined at higher
device that contains Fibre Channel interfaces levels.
that connect the host systems and the disk
drive enclosures. The FAStT Storage Server
provides high system availability through use
of hot-swappable and redundant components.
G
FC See Fibre Channel. Gateway In the SAN environment, a
gateway connects two or more different
FCS See Fibre Channel standard. remote SANs with each other. A gateway can
also be a server on which a gateway
Fiber optic The medium and the technology component runs.
associated with the transmission of
information along a glass or plastic wire or
fiber. H
Fibre Channel A technology for transmitting Hardware zoning Hardware zoning is based
data between computer devices at a data rate on physical ports. The members of a zone are
of up to 1 Gb. It is especially suited for physical ports on the fabric switch. It can be
connecting computer servers to shared implemented in the following configurations:
storage devices and for interconnecting one to one, one to many, and many to many.
storage controllers and drives.
HBA See host bus adapter.
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop A reference
to the FC-AL standard, a shared gigabit media Host Any system that has at least one
for up to 127 nodes, one of which can be internet address associated with it. A host with
attached to a switch fabric. See also arbitrated multiple network interfaces can have multiple
loop and loop topology. Refer to American internet addresses associated with it. This is
National Standards Institute (ANSI) also referred to as a server.
X3T11/93-275.
Host bus adapter (HBA) A Fibre Channel
HBA connection that allows a workstation to
attach to the SAN network.

Glossary 401
Hub A Fibre Channel device that connects Java Virtual Machine (JVM) The execution
up to 126 nodes into a logical loop. All environment within which Java programs run.
connected nodes share the bandwidth of this The Java virtual machine is described by the
one logical loop. Hubs automatically recognize Java Machine Specification which is published
an active node and insert the node into the by Sun Microsystems. Because the Tivoli
loop. A node that fails or is powered off is Kernel Services is based on Java, nearly all
automatically removed from the loop. ORB and component functions execute in a
Java virtual machine.

I JBOD Just a Bunch Of Disks.

JRE See Java runtime environment.

IBM Director A suite of tools and utilities that
automates many of the processes required to JVM See Java Virtual Machine.
manage systems, including capacity planning,
asset tracking, preventive maintenance,
diagnostic monitoring, and troubleshooting. It
uses a graphical interface that provides easy
L
access to both local and remote systems.
Logical device operation A logical device
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Storage operation (also logical operation) is an
Server (ESS) Provides an intelligent disk abstraction of an operation against a device in
storage subsystem for systems across the the Data Center Model.
enterprise.
Logical unit number (LUN) The LUNs are
IP Internet protocol. provided by the storage devices attached to
the SAN. This number provides you with a
volume identifier that is unique among all
J storage servers. The LUN is synonymous with
a physical disk drive or a SCSI device. For disk
subsystems such as the IBM Enterprise
Java A programming language that enables
Storage Server, a LUN is a logical disk drive.
application developers to create
This is a unit of storage on the SAN which is
object-oriented programs that are very secure,
available for assignment or unassignment to a
portable across different machine and
host server.
operating system platforms, and dynamic
enough to allow expandability. Loop topology In a loop topology, the
available bandwidth is shared with all the
Java plug-in A simple workflow that invokes
nodes connected to the loop. If a node fails or
only a single action. Java plug-ins provide
is not powered on, the loop is out of operation.
workflow access to basic storage functions
This can be corrected using a hub. A hub
and can be combined into more complex
opens the loop when a new node is connected
workflows.
and closes it when a node disconnects. See
Java runtime environment (JRE) The also Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop and
underlying, invisible system on your computer arbitrated loop.
that runs applets the browser passes to it.
LUN See logical unit number.

402 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

LUN assignment criteria The combination N_Port node port A Fibre Channel-defined
of a set of LUN types, a minimum size, and a hardware entity at the end of a link which
maximum size used for selecting a LUN for provides the mechanisms necessary to
automatic assignment. transport information units to or from another
node.
LUN masking This allows or blocks access
to the storage devices on the SAN. Intelligent NL_Port node loop port A node port that
disk subsystems like the IBM Enterprise supports arbitrated loop devices.
Storage Server provide this kind of masking.
node An addressable entity connected to an
I/O bus or network. Used primarily to refer to
M computers, storage devices, and storage
subsystems. The component of a node that
Managed object A managed resource. connects to the bus or network is a port.

Managed resource A physical element to be

managed. O
Management Information Base (MIB) A Open system A system whose
logical database residing in the managed characteristics comply with standards made
system which defines a set of MIB objects. A available throughout the industry, and
MIB is considered a logical database because therefore can be connected to other systems
actual data is not stored in it, but rather that comply with the same standards.
provides a view of the data that can be
accessed on a managed system.

MIB See Management Information Base.

P
MIB object A MIB object is a unit of Point-to-point topology It consists of a
managed information that specifically single connection between two nodes. All the
describes an aspect of a system. Examples bandwidth is dedicated for these two nodes.
are CPU utilization, software name, hardware
Port An end point for communication
type, and so on. A collection of related MIB
between applications, generally referring to a
objects is defined as a MIB.
logical connection. A port provides queues for
sending and receiving data. Each port has a
N port number for identification. When the port
number is combined with an Internet address,
it is called a socket address.
Network topology A physical arrangement
of nodes and interconnecting communications
links in networks based on application
requirements and geographical distribution of
users.

Glossary 403
Port zoning In Fibre Channel environments, Server A program running on a mainframe,
port zoning is the grouping together of multiple workstation, or file server that provides shared
ports to form a virtual private storage network. services. This is also referred to as a host.
Ports that are members of a group or zone can
communicate with each other but are isolated Shared storage Storage within a storage
from ports in other zones. See also LUN facility that is configured such that multiple
masking and subsystem masking. homogeneous or divergent hosts can
concurrently access the storage. The storage
Protocol The set of rules governing the has a uniform appearance to all hosts. The
operation of functional units of a host programs that access the storage must
communication system if communication is to have a common model for the information on a
take place. Protocols can determine low-level storage device. You need to design the
details of machine-to-machine interfaces, such programs to handle the effects of concurrent
as the order in which bits from a byte are sent. access.
They can also determine high-level exchanges
between application programs, such as file Simple Network Management Protocol
transfer. (SNMP) A protocol designed to give a user
the capability to remotely manage a computer
network by polling and setting terminal values
R and monitoring network events.

SMI-S See Storage Management Initiative

RAID Redundant array of inexpensive or
Specification.
independent disks. A method of configuring
multiple disk drives in a storage subsystem for SNMP See Simple Network Management
high availability and high performance. Protocol.

SNMP agent An implementation of a

S network management application which is
resident on a managed system. Each node
SAN See storage area network. that is to be monitored or managed by an
SNMP manager in a TCP/IP network, must
SAN agent A software program that have an SNMP agent resident. The agent
communicates with the manager and controls receives requests to either retrieve or modify
the subagents. This component is largely management information by referencing MIB
platform independent. See also subagent. objects. MIB objects are referenced by the
agent whenever a valid request from an SNMP
SCSI Small Computer System Interface. An manager is received.
ANSI standard for a logical interface to
computer peripherals and for a computer SNMP manager A managing system that
peripheral interface. The interface utilizes a executes a managing application or suite of
SCSI logical protocol over an I/O interface that applications. These applications depend on
configures attached targets and initiators in a MIB objects for information that resides on the
multi-drop bus topology. managed system.

404 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

SNMP trap A message that is originated by host information and communicating with
an agent application to alert a managing other components. This component is platform
application of the occurrence of an event. dependent. See also SAN agent.

Software zoning Is implemented within the Subsystem masking The support provided
Simple Name Server (SNS) running inside the by intelligent disk storage subsystems like the
fabric switch. When using software zoning, the Enterprise Storage Server. See also LUN
members of the zone can be defined with: masking and port zoning.
node WWN, port WWN, or physical port
number. Usually the zoning software also Switch A component with multiple entry and
allows you to create symbolic names for the exit points or ports that provide dynamic
zone members and for the zones themselves. connection between any two of these points.

SQL Structured Query Language. Switch topology A switch allows multiple

concurrent connections between nodes. There
Storage administrator A person in the data can be two types of switches, circuit switches
processing center who is responsible for and frame switches. Circuit switches establish
defining, implementing, and maintaining a dedicated connection between two nodes.
storage management policies. Frame switches route frames between nodes
and establish the connection only when
Storage area network (SAN) A managed, needed. A switch can handle all protocols.
high-speed network that enables any-to-any
interconnection of heterogeneous servers and
storage systems. T
Storage Management Initiative
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
Specification (SMI-S) A design specification
developed by the Storage Networking Industry TCP/IP Transmission Control
Association (SNIA) that specifies a secure and Protocol/Internet Protocol.
reliable interface that allows storage
management systems to identify, classify, Topology The physical and logical
monitor, and control physical and logical arrangement of devices in a storage area
resources in a storage area network. The network (SAN). Topology can be displayed
interface is intended as a solution that graphically, showing devices and their
integrates the various devices to be managed interconnections.
in a storage area network (SAN) and the tools
used to manage them. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) A
reliable, full duplex, connection-oriented,
storage pool A collection of storage end-to-end transport protocol running on of
resources on a storage area network (SAN) IP.
that have been set aside for a particular
purpose.

Subagent A software component of SAN

W
products which provides the actual remote
WAN Wide Area Network.
query and control function, such as gathering

Glossary 405
workflow A sequenced set of operations
that can be large and complex, or can be as
Other glossaries:
simple as a single command. A workflow itself
can be included as a step in other workflows. For more information on IBM terminology, see
the IBM Storage Glossary of Terms at:
http://www.storage.ibm.com/glossary.htm
Z
zone A segment of a storage area network For more information on Tivoli terminology,
(SAN) fabric composed of selected storage see the Tivoli Glossary at:
devices nodes and server nodes. Only the http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/glossary
members of a zone have access to one /tivoliglossarymst.htm
another.

zone member A device in a zone.

zone set A group of zones that function

together on the fabric. All devices in a zone
see only devices assigned to that zone, but
any device in that zone can be a member of
other zones in the zone set.

Zoning In Fibre Channel environments,

zoning allows for finer segmentation of the
switched fabric. Zoning can be used to
instigate a barrier between different
environments. Ports that are members of a
zone can communicate with each other but
are isolated from ports in other zones. Zoning
can be implemented in two ways: hardware
zoning and software zoning.

406 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Related publications

The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a
more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook.

IBM Redbooks
For information on ordering these publications, see “How to get IBM Redbooks”
on page 410. Note that some of the documents referenced here may be available
in softcopy only.

Redbooks
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Management Concepts, SG24-4877-03.
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Implementation Guide, SG24-5416-02.
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.1 Technical Guide, SG24-6554-00
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 4.2 Technical Guide, SG24-6277-00
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 3.7.3 & 4.1: Technical Guide, SG24-6110-00
򐂰 ADSM Version 3 Technical Guide, SG24-2236-01
򐂰 Tivoli Storage Manager Version 3.7: Technical Guide, SG24-5477-00
򐂰 Understanding the IBM TotalStorage Open Software Family, SG24-7098-00.
򐂰 Exploring Storage Management Efficiencies and Provisioning -
Understanding IBM TotalStorage Productivity Center and IBM TotalStorage
Productivity Center with Advanced Provisioning, SG24-6373-00.

Redpaper
򐂰 Integrating IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Operational Reporting with Event
Management, REDP-3850-00

Tips
򐂰 Technote: 3592 Media Types, TIPS0419
򐂰 Technote: VMware Backup Considerations with IBM Tivoli Storage Manager,
TIPS0398

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 407

Other publications
These publications are also relevant as further information sources:

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Administrator's Guides

򐂰 TSM V5.3 for HP-UX Administrator's Guide, GC32-0772-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Windows Administrator's Guide, GC32-0782-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Sun Solaris Administrator's Guide, GC32-0778-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Linux Administrator's Guide, GC23-4690-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for z/OS Administrator's Guide, GC32-0775-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for AIX Administrator's Guide, GC32-0768-03

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Administrator's References

򐂰 TSM V5.3 for HP-UX Administrator's Reference, GC32-0773-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Sun Administrator's Reference, GC32-0779-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for AIX Administrator's Reference, GC32-0769-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for z/OS Administrator's Reference, GC32-0776-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Linux Administrator's Reference, GC23-4691-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Windows Administrator's Reference, GC32-0783-03

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Data Protection Publications

򐂰 ITSM for Mail 5.3: Data Protection for Lotus Domino for UNIX, Linux, and
OS/400 Installation and User's Guide, SC32-9056-02
򐂰 ITSM for Mail 5.3: Data Protection for Lotus Domino for Windows Installation
and User's Guide, SC32-9057-01

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Install Guide

򐂰 TSM V5.3 for AIX Installation Guide, GC32-1597-00
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Sun Solaris Installation Guide, GC32-1601-00
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Linux Installation Guide, GC32-1599-00
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for z/OS Installation Guide, GC32-1603-00
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for Windows Installation Guide, GC32-1602-00
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for HP-UX Installation Guide, GC32-1598-00

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Messages

򐂰 TSM V5.3 Messages, SC32-9090-02

408 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Performance Tuning Guide
򐂰 TSM V5.3 Performance Tuning Guide, SC32-9101-02

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Read This First

򐂰 TSM V5.3 Read This First, GI11-0866-06

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3 Storage Agent User's Guides

򐂰 TSM V5.3 for SAN for AIX Storage Agent User's Guide, GC32-0771-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for SAN for HP-UX Storage Agent User's Guide, GC32-0727-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for SAN for Linux Storage Agent User's Guide, GC23-4693-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for SAN for Sun Solaris Storage Agent User's Guide,
GCGC32-0781-03
򐂰 TSM V5.3 for SAN for Windows Storage Agent User's Guide, GC32-0785-03

Tivoli Storage Manager V5.3.0 Backup-Archive Clients

򐂰 TSM 5.3 Using the Application Program Interface, GC32-0793-03
򐂰 TSM 5.3 NetWare Backup-Archive Clients Installation and User's Guide,
GC32-0786-05
򐂰 TSM 5.3 UNIX and Linux Backup-Archive Clients Installation and User's
Guide, GC32-0789-05
򐂰 TSM 5.3 Windows Backup-Archive Client Installation and User's Guide,
GC32-0788-05
򐂰 TSM 5.3 for Space Management for UNIX and Linux User's Guide,
GC32-0794-03

Online resources
These Web sites and URLs are also relevant as further information sources:
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager product page:
http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/storage-mgr/
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager information center:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/index.jsp
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager product support:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager.html
򐂰 IBM Tivoli Support:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support

Related publications 409

 򐂰 IBM Tivoli Support - Tivoli support lifecycle:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/eos.html
򐂰 IBM Software Support Lifecycle - Tivoli Product lifecycle dates:
http://www.ibm.com/software/info/supportlifecycle/list/t.html
򐂰 Tivoli Support - IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Supported Devices for AIX
HPUX SUN WIN:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBM_TSM_Supported_Devi
ces_for_AIXHPSUNWIN.html
򐂰 Tivoli Support - IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version Release Information:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sysmgmt/products/support/IBMTivoliStorageManager
VersionRelease.html

How to get IBM Redbooks

You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Hints and Tips,
draft publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks
or CD-ROMs, at this Web site:
ibm.com/redbooks

Help from IBM

IBM Support and downloads
ibm.com/support

IBM Global Services

ibm.com/services

410 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Index
Favorites 301
Numerics frequently asked questions 371
3494
Getting Started window 213
library support 35
Health Monitoring 295
3570
install path 203
Windows device driver 92
Install Wizard 200
3590
installation 200
Windows device driver 92
installation option 206
3592
Integrated Solutions Console 188, 211
support 34
interface layout 212
WORM support 53
introduction 188
Java installation 200
A label volume 242
ACSLS LAN-free setup 254
Library Support Enhancements 37 License Agreement 202
multiple server configuration 38 Login 208
Activity log Managing open pages 302
management 42 Manually enabling LAN-free 256
Administration Center 153, 187 mount waittime 247
Add a Storage Device 222 navigation frame 214
Add Device 228 new interface 59
Add Drive 227 new Storage Pool 234
Adding Drives 235 New user 218
Admin ID 203 password 204
administering server(s) 209 plug-in 212
authenticated users 218 Policy Domains 239
check-in volume 242 port 203
Client Nodes 249 Protecting ISC Server 302
client remote access 249 Quick start tips 215
Configure Health Monitor 297 restrictions 209
Create Management Class 254, 285 SCSI settings 225
Creating a library 222 Server Connection 221
Creating multiple Admin login accounts 216 Server link 221
Creating or modifying Option Set 239 Server-to-Server Communication Settings 259
Creating Policy Domain 254 setup Storage Pool 272
Creating Storage Pool 230 storage agent as server 260
Define LAN-free policy 278 tutorials 187
Define Library 224 Unlocking a client node 241
define paths to storage devices 268 unsupported commands 210
Define Server 263 User and Group Management 217
Device Class 275 using Command Line 332
drive details 238 validate LAN-free setup 293
Enable LAN-free Data Movement 255 video 187
enterprise management 257 view Storage Pools 272

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005. All rights reserved. 411

 volume management 242 enhancements 43
Wizards 363 Check-Out
AIX enhancements 43
HACMP 324 Client
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 71 Access Another Node 336
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 159 AIX specific enhancements 159
SAN File System 161 common enhancements 129
Veritas file system 160 configuration Wizard 149
Veritas Volume Manager 160 delete backup 154
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server displaying options 137
accurate SAN device mapping 73 DSM_LOG variable 157
library sharing failover 73 dynamic tracing 157
Storage Agent failover 73 encryption 157
Version 5.1.5 72 Enhanced domain processing 130
Version 5.2 72 enhancements, additions and changes 10
Version 5.2.2 72 external snapshot provider 134
Version 5.3 72 firewall security 136
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent 111 gathering system information 142
Version 5.1.5 112 GUID support 131
Version 5.2 112 HP-UX specific enhancements 159
Version 5.2.2 112 included and excluded objects 147
Version 5.3 112 include-exclude enhancements 145
Apple language packs 143
Quicktime 394 Linux specific enhancements 159
Apple OS X. see OS X 30 multiple Nodes 60
archive multi-session backup 144
increase retention limits 29 Netware specific enhancements 175
ASR 167 new options 156
autolabelling one or more file spaces backup 133
tape 33 operand limit removed 143
Automated Cartridge System Library Software. see optimized option values 155
ACSLS OS X specific enhancements 179
Automounter support 161 preservelastaccessdate 130
preview function 145
restore another node to own client 333
B tcpadminport 136
backup
UNIX specific enhancements 159
delete 155
Version 5.1.5 130
deleting individual from server file space 153
improvements 10
disk only 50
Version 5.2 133
grouping differences 134
improvements 11
journal based enhancements 168
Version 5.2.2 143
one or more file spaces 133
improvements 12
Block Size
Version 5.3 144
increased 93
improvements 13
view policy information 135
C Web interface 135
changes and enhancements by versions 383 WebSphere Application Server 141
Check-In WebSphere Application Server security 144

412 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Windows specific enhancements 165 D
collocation 45 Data Protection for IBM ESS for mySAP.com 21,
by group 45 23
COLLOCGROUP 47 Data Protection for Lotus Domino 16
COLLOCMEMBER 47 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for Linux 17
command examples 47 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for OS/400 17
groups benefits 46 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for UNIX 17
optimal recovery 47 Data Protection for Lotus Domino for Windows 17
COLLOCGROUP 48 Data Protection for Microsoft Exchange Server 18
COLLOCMEMBER 48 Data Protection for Microsoft SQL Server 19
command Data Protection for Oracle 19
backup group 133 Data Protection for WAS 24
CHECKIN 43 Data Protection for WebSphere Application Server
CHECKOUT 43 24
COLLOCGROUP 48 data retention
COLLOCMEMBER 48 deletion hold 34
dd 141 event based policy 34
DEFINE DEVCLASS 36 protection 34
DEFINE STGPOOL 53 database 18
DELETE BACKUP 154 DB2 UDB 21
EXPORT 32 Microsoft SQL Server 19
IMPORT 32 Oracle 19, 23
LABEL 43 database reorganization 49
MIGRATE STGPOOL 52 DB2 UDB 21
MOVE 43 default parameter improvements 54
NODEDATA 48 device
PROXYNODE 60 accurate SAN mapping 28, 73
query archive 131 drivers for Windows Server 2003 92, 328
query backup 131 file type 104
query filespace 142 TapeAlert support 32
QUERY OPTIONS 137 disaster
query schedule 152 preparation 5
QUERY STGPOOL 53 recovery 5
query systeminfo 142 Disaster Recovery Manager. see DRM
RECLAIM STGPOOL 52 disk only backup 50
REGISTER LICENSE 68 drives
restore image 141 support multiple types for SCSI libraries 32
SCHEDULE 67 DSM_LOG environment variable 157
SHOW LANFREE 100 DVD
TAPEALERTMSG 33 support 92
UPDATE STGPOOL 53 dynamic tracing 157
VALIDATE LANFREE 55, 104, 293
VIRTUALFSMAPPING 57
command line 331 E
EMC Celerra
access 331
NAS device support 36
display options 137
NAS file system images 140
image restore operations 141
EMC Centera
common enhancements 27
support 33
components 4

Index 413
encryption 157 Version 5.2.2 114
Enterprise Resource Planning. see ERP Version 5.3 114
ERP 19
EXPORT 32
external provider 134
I
IBM 3592
support 34
F IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 5
Favorites 301 Administration Center 187
file level restore 35 Client enhancements, additions, and changes
NDMP 140 10
firewall database reorganization 49
security 136, 181 development timeline 6
security support 31 disaster preparation and recovery 5
Flash 394 license 68
FlashBack new features overview 6
Restore 20 Operational Reporting 305
FlashCopy 20 overview 3–4
Restore 20 product components 4
frequently asked questions 371 product positioning 5
Basics 372 Server enhancements, additions and changes
Installation 375 7
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client. see Client
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Extended Edition 5
G license 68
General Parallel File System. see GPFS
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Application Servers
Glossary 399
24
GPFS 160, 321
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Data Retention 34
cluster 322
license 68
GUID 131
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Databases 18
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for ERP 19
H IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Hardware 20
HACMP cluster 324 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Mail 16
Health Monitoring 295 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for Products 15
HIGHMIG 53 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server. see Server
Hints 319 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent. see
HP-UX Storage Agent
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 75 IBM TotalStorage Open Software Family 4
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 159 IMPORT 32
64-bit support 160 include-exclude enhancements 145
Itanium 2 163 Integrated Solutions Console 188
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server administrator userid 195
Version 5.1.5 76 components 189
Version 5.2 76 Infrastructure 188
Version 5.2.2 76 installation 189
Version 5.3 76 Java Install 189
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent 113 License Agreement 192
Version 5.1.5 114 login details 199
Version 5.2 114 ports 196

414 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 Welcome window 190 license
Intel Itanium 162 changes in Version 5.2 30
iSeries files
Linux client 161 tsmbasic.lic 68
IT100 36 Licensing changes in Version 5.3 67
REGISTER LICENSE 68
z/OS 69
J Linux 17, 79
Java GUI 158
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 79
installation 326
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 159
journal based backup 168
Automounter support 161
command line client status messages 170
Intel Itanium 162
documentation 172
iSeries 161
File System Monitor 169
zSeries 163
improved Journal Database 169
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
JournalPipe 171
Communications Options 82
multiple journal services 169
DRM
Multiple Session support 169
pSeries 80
New options and configuration settings 171
Version 5.1.5 80
regulating backup and archive sessions 172
Version 5.2 80
resourceutilization 172
Version 5.2.2 80
utilities 172
Version 5.3 82
zSeries 80
L IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent 115
LANFREE 100 Communications Options 117
LAN-free kernel dependencies 117
define policy 278 pSeries 116
functionality 107 supported Linux platforms 117
LANFREETCPServeraddress 105 Version 5.2 116
linux86 client 160 Version 5.2.2 116
Multi-session No-Query Restore 105 Version 5.3 116
our lab environment 106 zSeries 116
setup operations 254 Storage Agent 160
simultaneous write limitations 103 LOWMIG 53
VALIDATE LANFREE 55 LTO
validate setup 293 Windows device driver 92
validating configuration 103
validating environment configuration 55
Wizard 368 M
MacroMedia
language packs 143
Flash 394
language support 144
Mactinosh. see Apple
library
Media support
ACSLS support enhancements 37
WORM 36
add drives 235
Microsoft
define in Administration Center 224
SQL Server 19
sharing failover 73
Microsoft Automated System Recovery 167
sharing how components work 39
Microsoft Volume Shadowcopy Service 167
Storage Agent failover 73
Microsoft Windows. see Windows
z/OS 124

Index 415
multiple file system support 104 create Hourly Monitor 311
multi-session backup 144 e-mail recipients 309
Multi-session No-Query Restore 105 Functions 304
mySAP.com 20–21 MMC Plugin 305
Monitor details 312
Net send recipients 314
N Report Sections 308
NAS 57, 140, 369
Using 305
device support 36
option
directory level backup 57
asnodename 320
file system images 140
autofsrename 180
NDMP 140
CLUSTERNODE 324
directory level backup 57
default values optimized 155
file level restore 35
diskbuffsize 155
file-level restore 140
Errorlogmax 157
operations 35, 57
fromnode 320
support 35
inclexcl 180
NDS
LANFREETCPServeraddress 105
replica 176
largecommbuffers 155
NetApp
new 156
SnapLock Support
preservelastaccessdate 130
Netware
resourceutilization 172
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 175
Schedlogmax 157
ALL-LOCAL domain 176
sessioninitiation 136
domain processing 176
TCPADMINPORT 100
NDS replica 176
tcpadminport 156
NetWare 6.5 176
tcpbuffsize 156
Novell Cluster Services 176
tcpnodelay 156
Version 5.1.5 176
TCPPORT 100
Version 5.2 176
tcpwindowsize 156
Version 5.2.2 176
virtualnodename 320
Version 5.3 177
Option Set
Network Appliance. see NetApp
create and modify 239
NODEDATA 47–48
options
Novell Cluster Services 176
use command line to display 137
NTFS
Oracle 19, 23
compression attribute 166
OS X
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 179
O administrative client 182
objects alias processing 182
included and excluded 147 Autofsrename 180
OFS 173 background scheduler 182
online image backups 173 command line interface 182
open file support 167, 173 controlling symbolic link 182
operand limits 143 displaying options 181
Operational Reporting 36, 303 Encrypting data 181
Additional Reading 36 firewall security 181
Automatic Notification 310 Gathering system information 182
create Daily Report 306 Inclexcl option 180

416 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

 non-administrators manage their own data S
182 SAN
Unicode-enabled client 180 accurate device mapping 28, 73
Version 5.1.5 180 SAN File System 161, 168
Version 5.2 180 SAP R/3 19
Version 5.2.2 181 SCHEDULE 67
Version 5.3 183 scheduler 152
unicode support for BA client advanced schedule 62
OS/400 PASE 89 Advanced Schedule Options 64
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 89 Archive Options 62
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server Associate Nodes 65
PASE support discontinued 90 flexibility 61
Version 5.1.5 90 Repeat the Schedule 63
Version 5.2 90 Repetition Options 63
Version 5.2.2 90 SCHEDULE 67
Version 5.3 90 start Wizard 62
overview 3 Summary 65
SCSI libraries
support multiple drive types 32
P
parameter security firewall support 31
defaults improved 54 sequential-access 52
HIGHMIG 53 Server
LOWMIG 53 AIX specific enhancements 71
WAITTIME 43 common enhancements 27
performance enhancements, additions and changes 7
tuning 31 HP-UX specific enhancements 75
policy Linux specific enhancements 79
view information 135 migration enhancements 52
Preface xxvii option
preservelastaccessdate 130 TCPADMINPORT 37
preview function 145 TCPPORT 37
PROXYNODE 60 TXNGROUPMAX 31
OS/400 PASE specific enhancements 89
performance tuning 31
Q processing control with scripts 59
Quicktime 394 scripts
PARALLEL 59
R SERIAL 59
random-access 52 Solaris specific enhancements 85
RECLAIM STGPOOL 53 Version 5.1.5
Reclamation improvements 8
processes enhancements 52 Version 5.2
Redbooks Web site 410 changes 28
Contact us xxx improvements 8
REGISTER LICENSE 68 Version 5.2.2
retention limits improvements 8
increase archive 29 Version 5.3
changes 37
improvements 9

Index 417
 Windows specific enhancements 91 Version 5.1.5 100
z/OS specific enhancements 95 Version 5.2 100
Server to Server Version 5.2.2 100
export and import 31 Version 5.3 102
server-free Windows specific enhancements 121
operations 166 z/OS specific enhancements 123
Single drive support 173 Storage Pool
snapshot 134 create 230
Solaris 85 setup 272
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 85 StorageTek
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 159, 162 VolSafe support 32
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server Sun Solaris. see Solaris
Accurate SAN Device Mapping 87 symbolic link processing 161
Version 5.1.5 86 system information
Version 5.2 86 gathering 142
Version 5.2.2 86
Version 5.3 86
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent 119
T
Tape
Version 5.1.5 120
writing to 93
Version 5.2 120
tape
Version 5.2.2 120
autolabelling 33
Version 5.3 120
TapeAlert
Sony
device support 32
AIT50 support 36
TAPEALERTMSG 33
IT100 support 36
TCPADMINPORT 37
SQL Server 19
tcpadminport 136
Storage Agent
TCPPORT 37
AIX specific enhancements 111
timeline 6
common enhancements 99
Tips 319
compatibility 102
tivguid program 131
console log 108
tutorial 187
FILE device type 104
TXNGROUPMAX 31
HP-UX specific enhancements 113
LAN-free functionality 107
LANFREETCPServeraddress 105 U
Linux 160 unicode support
Linux specific enhancements 115 UNIX
multiple file system support 104 enhanced domain processing 130
Multi-session No-Query Restore for LAN-free IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 159
105 64-bit support 160
restart 327 GPFS
restart after changed settings 102 symbolic link processing 161
SHOW LANFREE 100 Version 5.1.5 160
simultaneous write LAN-free limitations 103 Version 5.2 160
Solaris specific enhancements 119 Version 5.2.2 161
support 102 Version 5.3 162
TCPADMINPORT 100 Java GUI 158
TCPPORT 100
validating LAN-free configuration 103

418 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

V Device Driver for Windows Server 2003 92
VALIDATE LANFREE 55 DVD support 92
Veritas Cluster Server 168 Increased Block Size 93
Veritas file systems 160 LTO driver 92
Veritas Volume Manager 160 Version 5.1.5 92
video 187 Version 5.2 92
command line access 394 Version 5.2.2 92
unlock client node 394 Version 5.3 93
VIRTUALFSMAPPING 57 Writing to Tape 93
VolSafe 32 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent 121
Communications Options 122
Version 5.1.5 122
W Version 5.2 122
WAITTIME 43
Version 5.2.2 122
Web client
Version 5.3 122
enhancements 158
MMC Plugin 305
Web client interface 135
Server 2003 92, 167
Web material 394
system objects 166
Weblinks 156
Windows 2000 166–167
WebSphere Application Server 24
XP 167
backup and restore 141
Wizard
security 144
Add Storage Device 222
Windows
Add storage device 365
2003 Server 328
Add Volumes 244
domain processing 130
Add volumes 366
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 91
Administration Center 200
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Client 165
Client configuration 149
actual image size 168
Create a client node 367
DBCS installation path 167
Create a collocation group 366
enhanced image backup 166
Create a device class 366
Excluding specific system objects 166
Create a library 365
journal based backup 168
Create a management class 368
Microsoft Automated System Recovery 167
Create a policy domain 368
NTFS compression attribute 166
Create a profile 364
open file support 167
Create a server group 364
restore processing 166
Create a storage pool 366
SAN File System 168
Create a subscription 364
server-free operations 166
Create administrative schedule 365
Unicode-enabled clients 167
Create an option set 368
Veritas Cluster Server 168
Create client node schedule 367
Version 5.1.5 166
Create maintenance script 370
Version 5.2 167
Create Management Class 287
Version 5.2.2 168
Define a server 364
Version 5.3 168
define server 263
Volume Shadowcopy Service 167
Delete volume history 367
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Enable LAN-free Data Movement 254
3570 driver 92
Enable LAN-free data movement 368
3590 driver 92
Enterprise management 364
Communications Options 93
Generate a backup set 369

Index 419
 Import or export a serve 365
Import or export administrator 365
Import or export client node 369
Import or export policy domain 369
include and exclude selection 148
list of available Wizards 363
Policy domains and client nodes 367
Protect a NAS file server 366
Restore by file name (NAS) 369
Restore volumes 366
scheduler 62
Set up enterprise configuration 364
Storage devices 365
WORM
3592 support 53
media support 36

Z
z/OS 95
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 95
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server
Version 5.1.5 96
Version 5.2 96
Version 5.2.2 96
Version 5.3 96
IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent 123
LAN-free Volume selection 124
shared library 124
Version 5.1.5 124
Version 5.2 124
Version 5.3 124
zSeries
Linux client 163

420 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5.3 Technical Guide
(0.5” spine)
0.475”<->0.875”
250 <-> 459 pages
 Back cover ®

IBM Tivoli Storage Manager

Version 5.3 Technical Guide

Understand and use This IBM Redbook presents an overview of IBM Tivoli Storage
the new Manager Version 5.3, giving detailed descriptions of the INTERNATIONAL
Administration changes provided in this new release. This book also covers TECHNICAL
Center the cumulative changes in the releases after Version 5.1. SUPPORT
ORGANIZATION
This book is intended for customers, consultants, IBM
Learn about
Business Partners, and IBM and Tivoli staff who are familiar
enhancements and
with earlier releases of Tivoli Storage Manager and who want
new functions to understand what is new in Version 5.3. It should be used in BUILDING TECHNICAL
conjunction with the manuals and readme files provided with INFORMATION BASED ON
Covering Versions PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE
the products and is not intended to replace any information
5.1.5, 5.2.x, and 5.3 contained therein.
IBM Redbooks are developed by
the IBM International Technical
Support Organization. Experts
from IBM, Customers and
Partners from around the world
create timely technical
information based on realistic
scenarios. Specific
recommendations are provided
to help you implement IT
solutions more effectively in
your environment.

For more information:

ibm.com/redbooks

SG24-6638-00 ISBN 0738492310